LIBRARY
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA.
OIFT OF
u,s
Class
DRILL REGULATIONS
FOR
Field Companies of the
Signal Corps
(PROVISIONAL)
Edition of March, 1911
WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
1911
((UNIVERSITY ,1
JUN 141911
GIFT
WAR DEPARTMENT,
OFFICE OF THE CHIEF SIGNAL OFFICER,
Washington, March 21, 1911.
The following Provisional Drill Regulations for field com-
panies of the Signal Corps, prepared under the direction of the
Chief Signal Officer of the Army, are approved and published
by authority of the Secretary of War. In order to insure uni-
formity throughout the Signal Corps, these regulations only
shall be used in the instruction of field companies from the
date of their receipt. Commanding officers of field companies
will submit to the Chief Signal Officer of the Army not later
than November 1, 1911, any suggestions or recommendations
relative to these drill regulations which they think will add to
their value.
JAMES ALLEN,
Brigadier General,
Chief Signal Officer of the Army.
214808
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PART I.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND DEFINITIONS.
CHAPTER I. General Principles:
Section I. Instruction Par-
Object of the instruction 1-6
Sequence and methods of instruction 7-12
Section II. General rules 13-27
Section III. Commands 28-33
CHAPTER II. Definitions 34
PART II.
DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
CHAPTER I. General Rules 35-40
CHAPTER II. The Soldier Dismounted:
Section I. General provisions 41^4
Section II. The recruit 45
Position of the soldier, or attention 46
To assemble 47
The rests 48-51
Facings 52-53
Salute with the hand 54-55
Setting-up exercises 56
Steps and marchings 57
Quick time 57-59
Double time 60-62
To mark time 63
Half step 64
v
VI CONTENTS.
CHAPTER II. The Soldier Dismounted Continued. Par-
Section II. The recruit Continued.
Steps and marchings Continued.
Side step 65
Back step 66
To march by the flank 67
To march to the rear 68
Change step 69
Covering and marching on points 70
Section III. The squad 71-72
To form the squad 73-74
Alignments 75-79
To take intervals L 80
To assemble 81
Marchings 82
To march to the front 83-84
To march by the flank 85-88
To march obliquely 89-91
To change direction in flank column *. 92-93
Section IV. Manual of the pistol 94-99
Firings 100-106
To fire at will 107-108
CHAPTER III. The Company Dismounted:
Section I. General provisions 109-115
Section II. Posts of officers, noncommissioned officers,
etc., in line 116-117
Section III. To form the company dismounted 118
Alignments 119
To dismiss the company 120
Route order and at ease 121
PART III.
MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
CHAPTER I. The Soldier Mounted 122-125
The equipment of the horse 126
To fold the saddle blanket 127
To put on the blanket and surcingle 128
To put on the watering bridle 129
To unbridle 130
CONTENTS. VII
CHAPTER I. The Soldier Mounted Continued. Par -
The saddle and bridle 131-132
To saddle 133-134
To unsaddle 135
To put on the curb bridle 136-138
To unbridle 139
To roll the overcoat 140
The blanket roll for mounted men 141
The blanket roll for men not individually mounted 142
To pack the saddle 143
The position of stand to horse 144
To lead out 145
To align the rank 146
To mount (without saddle) 147
Position of the soldier, mounted (without saddle) 148
Remarks on the position of the soldier mounted 149
To lengthen or shorten the reins 150
To take the reins in one hand 151
To adjust the reins 152
To retake the reins in both hands 153
To drop and retake reins 154
To dismount (without saddle) 155
To mount from the off side 156-160
To dismiss the squad 161-162
Mounted exercises 163
Gaits of horses 164
Analysis of gaits 165
The aids in horsemanship 166
To gather the horse 167
To march 168
To halt 169
Being in line with intervals, to march by the flank in
column of files 170-174
The individual about 175
To oblique 176-177
To change direction 178
To rein back 179-180
To mount in line (without saddle) 181
To dismount (without saddle) 182
Being in line without intervals, to march by the flank
in column of files 183
VIII CONTENTS.
CHAPTER I. The Soldier Mounted Continued. Par -
To trot 184
To pass from the trot to the walk 185
To increase and diminish the rapidity of the trot 186-187
To pass from the halt to the trot 188
To halt from the trot 189
To pass from the front to the rear of the column 190
To pass from the rear to the front of the column 191
To march in circle 192-193
Individual circling 194
To mount (with saddle) 195
Position of the soldier (with saddle) 196
Stirrups 197
To dismount (with saddle) 198
The curb bridle 199
The spur 200
Instruction with saddle, curb bridle, and spurs 201
To gallop 202-204
To pass from the canter to the gallop and the reverse- 205
To pass from the gallop or canter to the trot 206-207
To passage 208
Jumping 209-213
To jump the ditch 214-215
Alignments 216
To march in line 217-218
To halt 219
To march backward 220
Being in line, to oblique 221
To turn and advance 222
Being in line, to form column of fours to the front 223
To change direction 224
Being in column of fours, to move to the rear 225
Being in column of fours, to form line to the front 226
Being in column of fours, to form column of twos to
the front 227
Being in column of fours, to form column of files 228
Being in column of twos, to form column of fours 229
Being in column of files, to form column of fours or
twos 230-231
Movements in column of twos__, 232
CONTENTS. IX
CHAPTER I. The Soldier Mounted Continued. Par -
Being in column of fours, to dismount 233
Manual of the pistol 234
CHAPTER II. The driver:
Object and sequence of the instruction 235-236
Section II. General provisions 237-238
Rests 239-242
Disposition of the harness 243
To harness 244-245
To unharness 246
To harness and unharness in the field 247
Fitting harness 248
To lead out 249
To hitch 250
To unhitch 251
To dismiss the teams from the park 252-253
Management of teams in draft 254-258
Marchings
To march to the front 259
To halt 260
To march by the flank 261
To march to the rear 262
Being in column, to change direction 263-264
To back the carts 265
Alignments 266
CHAPTER III. The Packer:
Object and sequence of the instruction 267
General provisions
Guides 268
The individual packer 269-270
The aparejo packsaddle L 271-273
To fold the blanket 274
To blind the mule 275
To harness 276-277
To unharness 278-279
To set up the aparejo 280-285
Remarks on the packsaddle 286
Care of the harness 287
To gather the mule 288
Management of the led mule 289
To dismiss the packer 290-292
X CONTENTS.
CHAPTER IV. The section mounted: Par-
Section I. The wire section 293-296
To open station and move off 297-301
To recover the wire 302-305
Section II. The pack wireless section 306-312
To open station 313-314
To close station 315-316
Section III. The wagon wireless section 317-323
To open station 324-327
To close station 328-329
CHAPTER V.The Company Mounted 330-331
General provisions 332-333
Organization of the company 334-336
Duties of individuals 337
Formation of the company and posts of individuals. 338-341
Posts of individuals 342-543
To form the company mounted 344-345
To dismiss the company 346-348
Commands and signals 349-351
Arm signals 352-353
Preparatory signals 354
Maneuvers of the company 355-358
Gaits 359-361
To align the company 362
To march to the front 363
To halt 364
To march by the flank 365-366
To march to the rear 367-368
Being in line or column, to march obliquely 369
To change direction 370-371
To close or extend intervals in line 372
To form section column to the front from line 373
To form line from section column 374-377
To re-form the sections in the normal formation 378
To form the mounted men in column of twos or files. 379
To re-form the mounted men in column of fours 380
To form platoon column from section column 381
To form section column from platoon column 382
Being in line, to form platoon column, to the right (or
left) 383
Being in platoon column, to form line to the left (or
right) 384
CONTENTS. XI
CHAPTER VI. The Battalion Mounted: Par.
Organization and formation of the battalion 385-390
To form the battalion
Posts of individuals 391-396
Maneuvers of the battalion 397-398
PART IV.
CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
CHAPTER I. Training of Horses:
Skeleton of the horse 399
Points of the horse 400-403
Bridling 404
The cavesson and longeing 405-414
Breaking in the young horse to harness 415
To accustom the horse to the report of firearms 416H17
To break the horse of kicking 418
Swimming horses and fording 419
CHAPTER II. Draft Animals:
Care of draft animals in the field 420-426
Necks and shoulders 427
Traces 428
Breeching 429-436
CHAPTER III. Driving:
Double harness 437-438
Coupling reins 1 439
Holding the reins 440-447
Driving four-in-hand 448-449
The reins 450
Adjusting the reins 451
Wheel reins 452
Lead reins 453
Crossing the road 454
Turning to the left 455
Turning to the right 456
To steady the team 457
The whip 458-461
To start 462
Pulling up 463
XII CONTENTS.
CHAPTER III. Driving Continued. Par -
A few hints 464
Rules of the road 465
CHAPTER IV. Care of Saddle Animals 466-469
Blanket 470
Saddle J 471
Saddling 472
Cinching 473
Unsaddling 474-477
Bitting 478-479
CHAPTER V. Care of Pack Animals 480-504
CHAPTER VI. Stable Management 505
General rules for stable management 506-507
Sick horses 508-512
Grooming 513
To groom 514
Feeding 515-516
Watering 517
PART V.
TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
CHAPTER I. General Principles 518-522
Field lines 523-540
CHAPTER II. Instruction in Garrison:
General rules v 541-543
Visual signaling 544-545
Visual stations 546-551
Telegraphy 552-555
Alphabet and numerals 556-559
Elementary principles 560-562
Methods of practice 563-565
Checking the message 566
CHAPTER III. Instruments:
The buzzer in telegraphy and telephony 567-569
The field buzzer model 1908 570-571
Transmission of information 572
The cavalry buzzer 573-576
To use the buzzer as a telephone 577
Care of buzzers, location of faults and adjustments.- 578
CONTENTS. XIII
CHAPTER III. Instruments Continued. Par-
Location of faults (field buzzer) 579-580
Adjustments 581-582
Dry cells 583
Field wireless telegraphy
General principles 584
General description of pack wireless set (1910
type) 585
Transmitting and receiving apparatus 586-595
Instructions for operating field wireless pack
sets 596
Receiving apparatus 597
In general 598
Visual signaling apparatus
The flag kit 599-601
The heliograph 602-609
The acetylene lantern 610-616
Rockets 617-619
Very's night signals 620
CHAPTER IV. Field Lines:
General provisions 621-622
The wire cart 623-624
To clean the wire cart 625-626
Manipulation of the wire cart 627
Laying the lines 628
Operating the lines
Station and call letters 629-632
Maintaining the lines : 633-635
Recovering the wire 636
PART VI.
SIGNAL TROOPS IN THE FIELD.
Position 637-638
Marches 639-641
Camping 642-648
Pitching tents :
Single shelter tents 649-650
Double shelter tents _ 651-652
XIV CONTENTS.
Par.
To strike shelter tents 653
Common and wall tents 654
Conical wall tents 655
To strike common, wall, and conical wall tents 656
To fold tents 657
General remarks 658-665
PART VII.
CEREMONIES.
CHAPTER I. General rules 666-668
CHAPTER II. Reviews:
General rules 669-688
Battalion review : 689
Review of a battalion with closed intervals, 000-691
Garrisori review 692
CHAPTER III. Inspections:
General rules 693-695
Company inspection, mounted 696-698
Company inspection, dismounted 699-701
Battalion inspection, mounted 702-705
CHAPTER IV. Muster:
Battalion or company muster 706
CHAPTER V. Funeral escort 707-714
CHAPTER VI. Company guard mounting 715-716
PART VIII.
MISCELLANEOUS.
The guidon 717-721
The standard 722-725
The saber 726-732
The band 733
Signals of the drum major 734
To inspect the band 735
Honors _ 736-751
CONTENTS. XV
Par.
Trumpet calls :
Warning calls 752
Formation calls 753
Alarm calls 754
Service calls 755
Drill signals 756
Trumpet calls 245-272
Arms and equipment 757
Service kit 758
Technical equipment 759
PART 1.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND DEFINITIONS.
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
SECTION 1. Instruction.
Object of the Instruct/on.
1. The certain transmission of information and orders from
commanding officers to their subordinates and information from
subordinates to commanding officers, regardless of conditions or
terrain, is the goal to be kept constantly in view in peace train-
ing. School and drill ground training must not be allowed to
obscure this.
2. The special qualifications required of Signal Corps troops
in war are the ability, first, to be in position fully equipped
with efficient men and materiel to carry out the orders of the
commanding officer; second, to maintain, uninterruptedly, such
communication, either by electricity or visual signaling, or
both, without regard to change of headquarters, as will keep the
commander fully and continuously informed as to the progress
of the action, the position of his troops, hospitals, trains, and
supply departments.
To meet the first requirement, the Signal Corps must have
men, technically trained in time of peace; and it must also be
prepared to cover long distances as quickly as Cavalry or Ar-
tillery, and to overcome all the difficulties and obstacles of the
route, and still keep in touch with such subordinate commanders
as orders require.
To meet the second requirement the personnel must under-
stand thoroughly all classes of signaling; must know how to
82940 11 1
2 GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
repair the necessary materiel, and must be prepared to meet,
tactically, the shifting requirements of the battle field and the
strategical condition of the occupied territory.
Mobility, thorough theoretical training, and extensive practice
in establishing and maintaining lines of information over varied
country under conditions approximating those of service, are the
essentials.
3. An additional object of instruction is to develop resource-
fulness, initiative, and self-reliance on the part of Signal Corps
men of all grades.
The regulations prescribe a method of training in the ordi-
nary duties of field companies and battalions of the Signal
Corps. The personnel must be so thoroughly drilled in these
duties that in the excitement of action the same may be
performed readily, naturally, and as a matter of second
nature.
On account of the varied conditions that arise in handling
Signal Corps troops, no hard and fast rules can be laid down
to cover all conditions. As a consequence much is left to
the energy and ingenuity of the officers and noncommissioned
officers.
4. Instruction in peace must therefore be conducted with a
view, first, to drilling the personnel thoroughly in their habitual
duties; and second, to affording officers and men practice and
experience in dealing with the situations and difficulties apt to
arise in campaign.
5. Solutions of practical problems, involving at first simple
tactical situations with appropriate units, should be required.
These should be progressive to include the use of the higher
tactical units. Signal troops can carry out this instruction to
advantage without the assistance of other troops.
6. Systems of instruction or of materiel can be perfected only
by actual use by troops. To the end that true progress may be
made, officers and noncommissioned officers will be encouraged
to make suggestions, based upon their practical experience, in
regard to methods of instruction as well as in regard to the
different electrical and mechanical features of the materiel.
The experience of those most competent to judge of the merits
of such systems will thus be made available for future improve-
ments therein.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 3
Sequence and Methods of Instruction.
7. A progressive order will be followed in all instruction,
which should commence with theoretical instruction in the
smallest unit, and proceed to the larger ones, culminating in
field maneuvers. (See par. 5.)
8. Thorough training of the individual soldier is the basis of
efficiency. Great precision and attention to detail are essential
to this instruction, for from it the soldier must acquire that
habit of implicit obedience to orders, and of accurate perform-
ance of his individual duties, which is the indispensable requi-
site for efficiency in combined training.
9. Recruits should be assembled in small squads for the be-
ginning of their instruction. As the instruction progresses it
may be consistently carried on by sections, platoons, or by the
entire company. This principle will apply to technical training
as well, particularly to visual signaling, telegraphy, and tele-
phony. Grouping according to progress and efficiency should
be strictly carried out. Those who lack aptitude and quickness
should be placed under experienced instructors.
The training of the recruit will include instruction in the
duties of sentinels, the care of equipment, packing of field kits,
tent pitching, pistol practice, and the customs and courtesies of
the service, in addition to his training as a signalman.
10. Short and frequent drills are better than long ones, which
exhause the attention of both the instructor and recruit.
11. The instructor of each unit is habitually its immediate
chief, and should be given all due latitude in conducting the
instruction, and be held to strict accountability for results at-
tained. The habit of self-reliance and a feeling of responsibility
for the instruction of their respective units, as well as a proper
feeling of pride therein, may thus be developed among the sub-
ordinate commanders.
The instructor will always maintain a military bearing, and
by a quiet, firm demeanor, set a proper example to the men.
Faults should be gradually corrected without nagging.
12. Instruction in establishing wire, wireless, or visual lines
of information, telegraphy, and tent pitching may appropriately
be given by section or by platoon, as a healthy rivalry among
the units may thus be developed.
4 GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
SECTION II. General rules.
13. Movements that may be executed toward either flank are
explained as toward but one flank, it being necessary merely to
substitute left for right, or the reverse, to have the explanation
of the corresponding movement toward the other flank.
14. Any movement may be executed either from the halt or
when marching, unless otherwise prescribed.
15. All movements on foot not especially excepted may be
executed in double time If the movement be from the halt, or
when marching in quick time, the command double time precedes
the command march; if marching in double time, the command
double time is omitted.
16. All mounted movements not especially excepted may be
executed at the trot or gallop.
17. The gait should habitually be increased or decreased
progressively, the trot being executed from the walk, and the
gallop from the trot. If marching at the gallop, the gait will
be decreased to the trot, then to the walk, before halting; if
marching at the trot, the same rule applies, halting from the
trot or gallop being considered an exceptional movement.
18. To execute a movement at the trot or gallop the com-
mand trot or gallop precedes the command march, unless already
marching at the gait desired.
19. Movements or procedures explained for the smaller units
are, in general, applicable to the larger ones when under in-
struction of the same character, the commands being modified
so as to be adapted to the particular unit dealt with.
20. The intervals and distances prescribed are in general
such that, if marched by the flank from line, the elements will
be in column at proper distances; or if marched by the flank
from column, they will be in line at proper intervals. Similarly,
if marching obliquely, a second oblique will place the elements
in line or column, as the case may be, at proper intervals or
distances. If, however, due to differences of length of elements,
these conditions do not accurately obtain, the proper intervals
or distances are gradually secured by appropriate modifica-
tions of the gait.
21. If, in forming elements abreast of each other, the com-
mands: 1. Company (platoon, etc.) f 2. HALT, be given during the
movement, only those elements halt which have reached their
GENEKAL PRINCIPLES.
new positions ; the others continue the march and halt on reach-
ing their positions.
22. For the purpose of correcting errors while marching, the
instructor may command: 1. In place, 2. HALT; when all halt
and stand fast. To resume the march, he commands: 1. Com-
pany (platoon, etc.), 2. MARCH.
23. To revoke a preparatory command, or being at a halt, to
begin anew a movement improperly begun, the instructor com-
mands: AS YOU WERE, at which the movement ceases and the
former position is resumed.
24. If a change of formation requires a change of post of
officers and noncommissioned officers, they proceed by the short-
est route to their posts in the new formation.
25. While the posts of officers and noncommissioned officers
are specified in the text, as instructors they go wherever their
presence is necessary.
26. Officers and noncommissioned officers who are absent are
replaced ordinarily by the next lower in rank. In a company,
chiefs of platoon are replaced by the chiefs of sections of the
platoon in the order of rank. The first sergeant, if performing
the duties of an officer, and the supply and stable sergeants, are
not replaced. Sergeants and corporals replace absent chiefs of
section.
27. The numerical designation of units does not change, as
their relative order in line or column is changed.
SECTION III. Commands.
28. Commands are of two kinds : Preparatory commands and
commands of execution.
The preparatory command, such as forward, indicates the
movement that is to be executed.
The command of execution, such as MARCH, HALT, causes the
execution.
Preparatory commands are distinguished in the text by
italics; those of execution by capitals.
29. The commands prescribed in the text are given by the
instructor, except when otherwise specified.
30. To permit the preparatory command being understood, a
well-defined pause should be made between it and the command
of execution. The duration of this pause depends in a measure
6 GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
upon the size of the body of troops under command, and upon
whether the troops are dismounted or mounted. Ordinarily,
in dismounted movements and in mounted movements executed
from a halt, the pause should be brief and of uniform duration,
as otherwise uncertainty is communicated to the ranks, and a
ragged execution of the movement results.
31. The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a
loudness proportioned to the number of men under command.
Indifference in giving commands leads to laxity in execution.
Each preparatory command is pronounced in an ascending
tone of voice, but always in such a manner that the command of
execution may be more energetic and elevated.
On foot the command of execution is pronounced in a firm,
brief tone.
In mounted movements the preparatory commands are more
or less prolonged to insure their being heard; the command of
execution is always prolonged.
When giving commands to troops, it is usually best to face
or look toward them.
32. To secure uniformity, officers and noncommissioned offi-
cers are practiced in giving commands.
33. The bugle calls and prescribed arm signals are frequently
used in instruction in order that the officers and men may
readily recognize them.
CHAPTER II. DEFINITIONS.
34. Alignment: A straight line upon which several men,
teams, carts, or bodies of troops are formed, or are to be formed.
Base: The element on which a movement is regulated, or on
which a formation is made.
Center: The middle point or element of a command.
Column: A formation in which the elements are placed one
behind another.
Depth: The space from head to rear of any formation, includ-
ing the leading and rear elements.
Disposition: The arrangement of the elements in a formation.
Distance: Open space between elements in the direction of
depth.
Element: One of the similar parts of a larger unit as a file,
squad, team, cart, wagon, section, platoon, company, etc.
DEFINITIONS. 7
Facing distance: The difference between the front of a man
in ranks, including his interval, and his depth about 14 inches.
File: Two men the front-rank man and the corresponding
man of the rear rank. The front-rank man is the file leader.
A file which has no rear-rank man is a blank file. The term
files applies also to individual men in single-rank- formation.
A single mounted man in ranks is also called a file.
File closers: The noncommissioned officers, and men acting as
such, who, in dismounted formation, are posted 2 yards in rear
of the line.
Flank: The right or left of a command in line or column ;
also the element on the right or left of a line.
By the enemy's right (left) flank is meant the flank which the
enemy himself would so designate.
Formation: Arrangement of the elements of a command in
their order in line, in column, or for battle.
Front: The space in width occupied by a command either in
line or column. The term front is also used to denote the direc-
tion in which the elements of a command face, as well as to
denote the direction of the enemy.
Guide: An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon
whom a command or an element thereof regulates its march.
Interval: Open space between elements abreast of each other.
Left: The left extremity or element of a body of troops.
Line: A formation in which the different elements are abreast
of each other. When the elements are in column, the formation
is called a line of columns.
Lines of information: Channels along which military informa-
tion may be transmitted, as wire, wireless, visual, or messenger.
Maneuver: A movement executed by a company or larger unit
for the purpose of changing from one formation to another.
Rank: A line of men, horses, teams, or carts, abreast of each
other.
Right: The right extremity or element of a body of troops.
PART II.
DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
CHAPTER I. GENERAL RULES.
35. Field companies will habitually turn out mounted and
with full equipment for all drills and ceremonies. Therefore
only so much dismounted instruction will be given as is neces-
sary for the training of recruits and for the few occasions when
the company is obliged to be dismounted.
36. Formations are habitually in double rank. The men
always fall in at attention.
37. The interval between men in ranks is 4 inches; the
allowance for the front of a man is taken at about 26 inches,
including the interval ; the depth about 12 inches. The distances
between subdivisions in column is measured from guide to
guide.
38. To secure uniformity of interval between files, when fall-
ing in, and in the alignments, each man slightly opens out his
right elbow, lightly touching the left elbow of the man on his
right, and he drops it when the intervals has been secured.
39. When marching in flank column, the leading man of the
leading rank is, without indication, the guide of the column.
During the oblique march the leading man of the leading rank
is, without indication, the guide.
40. When marching in line, the guide is always announced
as soon as the march is begun, or as soon as the line is formed.
On marching to the rear from line, or on taking the full step
after a turn, the guide is announced as soon as the march in
the new direction is begun. For example :
Being in line at a halt :
1. Forward, 2. MARCH, 3. Guide (right or left).
Being in line:
1. Right (or left) oblique, 2. MARCH, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH,
5. Guide (right or left).
Marching in line:
1. To the rear, 2. MARCH, 3. Guide (right or left).
8
THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 9
CHAPTER II. THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED.
SECTION I. General provisions.
41. This instruction has for its object the training of the
individual recruit and afterwards that of the squad. It must
be given with the greatest attention to detail.
42. In the instruction of the recruit, frequent short rests
should be given, in order that the men may not be unduly
fatigued.
The instructor will take advantage of these rests to instruct
the recruits in the customs and courtesies of the service, the
duties of orderlies, the proper manner of receiving messages
from and delivering them to officers, etc., so that when the re-
cruit is finally reported for duty he will not only know his
prescribed drill thoroughly, but will know how to conduct him-
self out of ranks as a trained soldier.
43. From the beginning the instructor will insist on a smart
appearance of the recruits, and will require that their clothing
be clean and neatly adjusted.
44. The instructor briefly explains each movement, at first
executing it himself if necessary. He exacts by degrees the
desired precision and uniformity.
SECTION II. The recruit.
45. For the individual instruction, a few recruits, usually not
exceeding four, are placed in a single rank, facing to the front
and about 4 inches apart.
They execute the marchings as explained for a squad.
Position of the Soldier, or Attention.
46. Heels on the same line and as near each other as the con-
formation of the man permits.
Feet turned out equally and forming with each other an angle
of about 60.
Knees straight without stiffness.
Body erect on the hips, inclined a little forward ; shoulders
square and falling equally.
10 DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
Arms and hands hanging naturally, backs of hands outward ;
little fingers opposite the seams of the trousers; elbows near
the body.
Head erect and square to the front, chin slightly drawn .in
without constraint, eyes straight to the front.
To Assemble.
47. To teach the recruits to assemble, the instructor will
first place them in a single rank arranged according to height,
the tallest man on the right with intervals of 4 inches, as
nearly as may be between men, and explain that the objects of
the interval are to give freedom of movement in marching ; then
direct them to open out the right elbow slightly until the left
elbow of the man on the right is lightly touched and then
withdraw the elbow; this repeated a few times, he will cause
the recruits to fall out and, placing the man on the right in
position, will instruct them that at the command FALL IN they
will successively and quickly take their places in rank as before,
each assuring himself of his interval by making the touch by
the elbow and then withdrawing the elbow. He then commands :
FALL IN, when they assemble rapidly as above prescribed.
The Rests.
48. Being at a halt, to rest the men: FALL OUT, or REST,
or AT EASE.
At the command fall out, the men may leave the ranks, but
will remain in the immediate vicinity.
At the command fall in, they resume their former places at
attention.
At the command rest, each man keeps one heel in place, but
is not required to preserve silence or immobility.
At the command at ease, each man keeps one heel in place,
and preserves silence, but not immobility.
If marching: 1. ROUTE ORDER, or, I. AT EASE.
The men keep their places in the squad, but are not required
to keep the cadence step; at route order, they are not required
to preserve silence.
To resume the attention : 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.
The men take the position of the soldier and fix their atten-
tion.
THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED.
11
49. 1. Parade, 2. REST.
Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee
slightly bent; clasp the hands in front of the center of the
body, left hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by thumb and
forefinger of right hand; preserve silence and steadiness of
position.
50. To resume the attention or position of the soldier: 1.
Squad, 2. ATTENTION.
The men take the position of the soldier and fix
their attention.
5 1. To dismiss the squad : DISMISSED.
Facings.
52. To the flank: 1. Right (Left), 2. FACE.
Raise slightly the left heel and right toe, face
to the right, turning on the right heel, assisted by
a slight pressure on the ball of the left foot;
place the left foot by the side of the right. Left
face is executed on the left heel.
To face in marching and advance, turn on the
ball of the foot in advance and step off with the
other foot in the new line of direction ; to face in
marching without gaining ground in the new direc-
tion, turn on the ball of the foot in advance and
mark time.
53. To the rear: 1. About, 2. FACE.
Raise slightly the left heel and right toe, face
PI. 1, Par. 49.
to the rear, turning to the right on the right heel and the ball
of the left foot ; replace the left foot beside the right.
Officers execute the about face as follows :
At the command about, cari-y the toe of the right foot about
8 inches to the rear and 3 inches to the left of the left heel
without changing the position of the left foot.
At the command face, turn upon the left heel and right toe,
face to the rear, and replace the right heel by the side of the
left.
Enlisted men out of ranks may use the about face prescribed
for officers.
DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
Salute with the Hand.
54. 1. Right (left) hand, 2. SALUTE.
Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger
touches the lower part of the headdress above the right eye,
thumb and fingers extended and joined, palm
to the left, forearm inclined at about 45, hand
and wrist straight; at the same time look to-
ward the person to be saluted. TWO. Drop the
arm smartly by the side.
If uncovered, the forefinger touches the fore-
head above the eye.
The salute for officers is the same; the left
hand is used only when the right is engaged.
55. Enlisted men salute with the hand far-
thest from the officer, giving salute 6 yards before
passing the
officer, and
holding the
hand at the,
visor until
the salute
is acknowl-
edged or the
PI. 2, par. 54. officer passed.
Setting-up Exercises.
56. All soldiers are regu-
larly practiced in the fol-
lowing exercises, which may
be supplemented by those
authorized in calisthenic
manuals.
The instructor places the
men about 2 yards apart.
In these exercises the
blouses should be unbuttoned and the cap removed.
As soon as the exercises are well understood they may be
continued without repeating the commands. For this purpose
PI. 3, par. 56, 1 Ex.
THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED.
13
the instructor gives the commands as prescribed, then adds:
Continue the exercise, upon which the motions to be repeated are
continuously executed until the command halt.
At the command halt, given at any time, the
position of the soldier is resumed.
1. Arm, 2. EXERCISE, 3. HEAD,
4. UP, 5. DOWN, 6. RAISE.
At the command exercise, raise
the arms laterally until horizontal,
palms upward. HEAD: Raise the
arms in a circular direction over
the head, tips of the fingers touch-
ing top of head, backs of fingers in
contact their full length, thumbs
pointing to the rear, elbows pressed
back. UP: Extend
the arms upward
their full length,
palms touching.
DOWN: Force the
arms obliquely back
and gradually let
them fall by the
sides. RAISE: Raise
the
arms laterally
PL 5, par. 56,
1 Ex.
as prescribed for the second
command. Continue by re-
peating head, up, down, raise.
Second Exercise.
1. Arms vertical, palms to
the front, 2. RAISE, 3. DOWN,
4. UP.
At the command raise., raise
the arms laterally from the
sides, extended to their full
length, till the hands meet above the head, palms to the front,
fingers pointing upward, thumbs locked, right thumb in front,
PI. 6, par. 56,
2 Ex.
PI. 7, Par. 56, 2 Ex.
14
DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
shoulders pressed back. DOWN: Bend over till the hands, if
possible, touch the ground, keeping the arms and knees straight.
UP: Straighten the body and swing the ex-
tended arms (thumbs locked) to the vertical
position. Continue by repeating down, up.
Third Exercise.
1. Arm, 2. EXERCISE, 3. FRONT, 4. REAR.
At the command exercise, raise the arms
laterally until horiozntal, palms upward.
FRONT: Swing the extended arms horizon-
tally to the front, palms touching. REAR:
Swing the extended arms well to the rear,
inclining them slightly downward, raising the
body upon the toes. Continue by repeating
front, rear, till men, if possible, are able to
? touch the backs of the hands behind the back.
Fourth Exercise.
PI. 8, Par. 5G, 3 Ex. 1. Leg, 2. EXERCISE, 3.
UP.
At the command exercise, place the palms
of the hands on the hips, fingers to the front,
thumbs to the rear, elbows pressed back.
UP: Raise the left leg to the front, bending
and elevating the knee as much as possible,
leg from the knee to the instep vertical, toe
depressed. UP: Replace the left foot and
raise the right leg as prescribed for the left.
Execute slowly at first, then gradually in-
crease to the cadence of double time. Con-
tinue by repeating up when the right and left
legs are alternately in position.
Fifth Exercise.
1. Leg, 2. EXERCISE, 3. Left (Right), 4. PI. 9, Par. 56, 4 Ex.
FORWARD, 5. REAR; or, 5. GROUND.
At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips, as in
the fourth exercise. FORWARD: Move the left leg to the front,
THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 15
knee straight, so as to advance the foot about 15 inches, toe
turned out, sole nearly horizontal, body balanced on right foot.
PEAR : Move the leg to the rear, knee straight, toe on a line with
the right heel, sole nearly horizontal. Continue by repeating
forward, rear.
When the recruit has learned to balance himself, the command
forward is followed by GROUND: Throw the weight of the body
forward by rising on the ball of the right foot, advance and
plant the left, left heel 30 inches from the right, and advance
the right leg quickly to the position of forward. Continue by
repeating ground when the right and left legs are alternately in
the position of forward.
Sixth Exercise.
1. Lung, 2. EXERCISE, 3. INHALE, 4. EXHALE.
At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips as in
fourth exercise. IN HALE: Inflate the lungs to full capacity by
short, successive inhalations through the nose. EXHALE: Empty
the lungs by a continuous exhalation through the mouth. Con-
tinue by repeating inhale, exhale.
Seventh Exercise.
1. Trunk, 2. EXERCISE, 3. Circle right (or left). At the com-
mand exercise, raise the hands and place them on the hips,
fingers to the front, thumbs to the rear, elbows pressed back.
Circle right, bend the trunk to the right; turn the trunk to the
rear and bend to the rear; turn the trunk to the left and bend
to the left ; turn the trunk to the front and bend forward. Con-
inue by repeating Circle right.
STEPS AND MARCHINGS.
Quick Time.
57. The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches,
measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120
steps per minute.
/ 58. To march in quick time: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.
At the command forward, throw the weight of the body upon
the right leg, left knee straight.
16 DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
At the command march, move the left foot smartly, but with-
out jerk, straight forward 30 inches from the right, measuring
from heel to heel, sole near the ground; straighten and turn
the knee slightly out ; at the same time throw the weight of the
body forward and plant the foot without shock, weight of body
resting upon it; next, in like manner, advance the right foot
and plant it as above; continue the march.
The cadence is at first given slowly, and gradually increased
to that of quick time.
The arms hang naturally, the hands moving about 6 inches
to the front and 3 inches to the rear of the seam of the trousers.
59. The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of
the step by calling one, two, three, four; or, left, right, the instant
the left and right foot, respectively, should be planted.
This rule is general.
Double Time.
60. The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches;
the cadence is at the rate of 180 steps per minute.
6 1. To march in double time : 1. Forward, 2. Double time,
3. MARCH.
At the command forward, throw the weight of the body on the
right leg.
At the command march, raise the hands until the forearms are
horizontal, fingers closed, nails toward the body, elbows to the
rear; carry forward the left foot, knee slightly bent and some-
what raised, and plant the foot 36 inches from the right ; then
execute the same motion with the right foot; continue this
alternate movement of the feet, throwing the weight of the body
forward and allowing a natural swinging motion of the arms.
If marching in quick time, the command forward is omitted.
At the command march, given as either foot strikes the ground,
take one step in quick, and then step off in double time.
To resume the quick time: 1. Quick time, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, given as either foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the other foot in double time, resume the
quick time, dropping the hands by the sides.
Recruits are also exercised in running, the principles being
the same as for double time*
THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 17
When marching in double time and in running, the men
breathe as much as possible through the nose, keeping the
mouth closed.
Distances of 100, and 180 yards, are marked on the drill
ground, and noncommissioned officers and men practiced in
keeping correct cadence and length of pace in both quick and
double time.
62. To arrest the march in quick or double time: 1. Squad,
2. HALT.
At the command halt, given as either foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the other foot; place the foot in rear by the
side of the other. If in double time drop the hands by the
sides.
The halt, while marking time, and marching at the half step,
side step, and back step, is executed by the same commands.
This rule is general, the command section, platoon, company, etc.,
being substituted for squad.
To Mark Time.
63. Being in march: 1. Mark time, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, given as either foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the other foot ; bring up the foot in rear, and
continue the cadence by alternately raising and planting each
foot on line with the other. The feet are raised about 4 inches,
from the ground and planted with the same energy as when
advancing.
To resume the full step : 1. Full step, 2. MARCH.
Half Step.
64. Being in march: 1. Half step, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, given as either foot strikes the ground,
take steps of 15 inches.
To resume the full step : 1. Full step, 2. MARCH.
The length of the half step in double time is 18 inches.
Side Step.
65. Being at a halt: 1. Right (Left) step, 2. MARCH.
Carry and plant the right foot 10 inches to the right; bring
the left foot beside it and continue the movement in cadence of
quick time.
82940 11 2
18 DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
The side step is used for small intervals only, and is not
executed in double time.
Back Step.
66. Being at a halt: 1. Backward, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, step back with the left foot 15 inches
straight to the rear, then with the right, and so on, the feet
alternating.
At the command halt, bring back the foot in front to the side
of the one in rear.
The back step is used for short distances only, and is not
executed in double time.
To March by the Flank.
67. Being in march: 1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the
ground, advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right
in marching and step off in the new direction with the right
foot.
To March to the Rear.
68. Being in march: 1. To the rear, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the
ground, advance and plant the left foot; then turning on the
balls of both feet, face to the right about and immediately step
off with the left foot.
If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking
four steps in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with
the left foot.
Change Step.
69. Being in march: 1. Change step, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the
ground, advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of the
right foot near the heel of the left and step off with the left foot.
The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the com-
mand march being given as the left foot strikes the ground.
THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 19
Covering and Marching on Points.
70. The instructor indicates two points and requires the
recruits, in succession, to place themselves upon the prolonga-
tion of the straight line through these points and then to march
upon them in both quick and double time.
It should be demonstrated to the recruits that they can not
march in a straight line without selecting two points in the
desired direction and keeping them covered while advancing.
A distant and conspicuous landmark is next selected as a
point of direction. The recruit is required to choose two inter-
mediate points in line with the point of direction and to march
upon it by covering these points, new points being selected as he
advances.
SECTION III. The squad.
71. As soon as the recruits are sufficiently instructed for the
purpose, they are formed into squads of convenient size in order
to teach them the principles of the alignments, taking intervals,
and the marchings.
72. For this instruction, the recruits are formed in double
rank. The files on the right and left of the squad are always
complete; if there be an incomplete file, it will be the second
from the left. The rear-rank men cover their file leaders accu-
rately at 1 yard distance.
In the case of a small number of recruits, they may be formed
in single rank. The movements described for the double rank
formation apply equally well to the single rank, omitting the
explanations for the rear-rank men.
To Form the Squad.
73. To form the squad, the instructor designates a recruit as
the front-rank man of the right file and indicates to him where
the right of the squad is to rest; he then places himself about
3 yards in front of where the center is to be formed, and
commands: FALL IN.
The men form on the designated recruit, in two ranks facing
to the front, as already prescribed. (Par. 47.)
74. The squad executes the rests; resumes the attention;
marks time; and executes the facings, the setting-up exercises,
20 DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
the steps, and the halt, and is dismissed by the same commands
and means as explained for the recruit.
Alignments.
75. The alignments are first taught by requiring the recruits
to align themselves upon two files established as a base.
Being at a halt, the instructor causes the first two files on the
flank toward which the alignment is to be made to move for-
ward a few paces, and establishes them as a base; he then
commands : 1. Right (left), 2. DRESS, 3. FRONT.
At the command dress the first two files turn their heads to
the right so as to bring the left eye in a line about 2 inches to
the right of the center of the body. Eyes fixed on the line of
eyes of the men in or supposed to be in the same rank. The
remaining files march to the front, each man shortening the last
step so as to place himself about 6 inches in rear of the new
alignment, which must never be passed; each man then looks
to the right, as previously prescribed for the first two files, and,
taking steps of 2 or 3 inches, moves up, slightly opening out his
right elbow and touching the left elbow of the man on his right,
bringing his eyes and shoulders in line with those of the men in
rank on his right, then withdraws his elbow from touch, but
keeps his eyes to the right. In dressing to the left, intervals
are taken in a similar manner, by making a light touch with the
left elbow to the right elbow of the next man on the left. At
the command front, given when the ranks are aligned, the men
cast their eyes to the front. All movement in ranks must then
cease.
76. At first, the basis of the alignment is established parallel
to the front of the squad ; afterwards, in oblique directions.
77. The recruits having learned to align themselves, the in-
structor establishes the base file and commands : 1. Right (left),
2. DRESS, 3. FRONT.
At the command dress, the men, except the base file, move for-
ward and all dress as previously explained, the rear-rank men
being careful to cover their file leaders accurately.
78. Alignments to the rear are executed on the same prin-
ciples : 1. Right (left) backward, 2. DRESS, 3. FRONT.
The men step back, halt a little in rear of the line, and im-
mediately dress up as previously explained.
THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 21
79. To execute the alignments, using the side step, the in-
structor establishes the base file a short distance to the right or
left of the squad, and commands : 1. Right (left) step, 2. (Right
or left), 3. DRESS, 4. FRONT.
At the command dress, the men execute the side step, close
toward the base file, and dress as previously explained.
To Take Intervals.
80. Being in iine at a halt: 1. To the right (left) take inter-
vals, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.
At the first command, the rear rank steps back to 2 yards
distance from the front rank ; at the command march, all face to
the right and the leading man of each rank steps off; the other
men step off in succession so as to follow the preceding man at
2 yards.
At the command halt, given when all have their intervals, all
halt and face to the front.
To Assemble.
81. 1. To the right (left) assemble, 2. MARCH.
The front-rank man on the right stands fast, the rear-rank
man on the right closes to 1 yard. The other men face to the
right, close by the shortest line, and face to the front.
Marchings.
82. During the marchings the guide conducts the march, pre-
serving with great care the direction, length, and cadence of
the step, selecting points on which to march, as explained in
paragraph 70.
To March to the front.
83. Being at a halt: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.
The men step off and march straight to the front.
If in line, the rear-rank men follow their file leaders accu-
rately. The instructor sees that the ranks preserve the align-
ment and the intervals toward the side of the guide. The men
yield to pressure from that side and resist pressure from the
22 DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
opposite side; by slightly shortening or lengthening the step
they gradually recover the alignment, and by slightly opening
out or closing in they gradually recover the interval, if lost;
while habitually keeping the head to the front, they may occa-
sionally glance toward the side of the guide to assure them-
selves of the alignment and interval, but the head is turned as
little as possible for this purpose.
If in flank column, the men of the leading file step off at full
step; the leading rear-rank man marches abreast of his file
leader at 26 inches interval. The other files march at the half
step, each taking the full step when at 1 yard distance.
84. Being in march: 1. To the rear, 2. MARCH.
Executed as explained in paragraph 68.
If at a halt, the squad may be faced about and then moved
forward, as explained in the preceding paragraph; or, without
facing about, it may be marched a short distance to the rear,
as explained in paragraph 66, by the command : 1. Backward,
2. MARCH.
Whenever the squad in line is faced about or marched to the
rear, all men in the front rank not covered step into the new
front rank.
To March by the Flank.
85. Being in line: 1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH.
Executed as explained in paragraphs 67 and 83.
The formation obtained by marching by the flank from line is
called a flank column.
If at a halt, the squad may be marched by the flank by first
facing it in the desired direction and then moving it forward,
as explained in paragraph 83.
When the march by the flank is executed from flank column
while at 1 yard distance, the file close in gradually toward the
guide until they have the prescribed interval.
86. Whenever the flank column is halted while marching at
1 yard distance, the leading file halts at the command ; the
others close to facing distance before halting.
87. To close up in flank column without halting: 1. Close,
2. MARCH.
The leading file takes the half step; the other files close to
facing distance and take the half step; all the files having
THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 23
closed to facing distance, the column is halted or marched by
the flank as previously explained.
88. To halt the flank column without closing up : 1. In place,
2. HALT.
To March Obliquely.
89. For the instruction of recruits, the squad being correctly
aligned, the instructor causes the squad to face half right or
half left, points out to the men their relative positions, and ex-
plains that these are to be maintained in the oblique march.
90. 1. Right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH.
Each man steps off in a direction 45 to the right of his
former front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his
shoulders parallel to those of the guide, and so regulates his
step as to keep the ranks parallel to their original direction.
If the command halt be given while marching obliquely, the
men halt faced to the original front.
To resume the original direction : 1. Forward, 2. MARCH,
3. Guide (right or left)
At half step or mark time, while obliquing, the oblique march
is resumed by the commands: 1. Full step, 2. MARCH.
91. After obliquing, if line be formed, the files, if not at
proper intervals, close in gradually toward the guide; similarly,
if flank column be formed, the files, if not at 1 yard distance,
fall back as prescribed in paragraph 83.
To Change Direction in Flank Column.
92. 1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH.
The pivot man of the leading file faces to the right in march-
ing and takes the half step ; the man on the marching flank, by
twice obliquing to the right, places himself abreast of the pivot
man ; the latter then takes the full step. The other files march
squarely up to the turning point and execute the change of
direction on the same ground and in the same manner. When
executed from a halt, all the men step off at the command march.
93. The exercise of a section dismounted are similarly exe-
cuted, substituting in the latter case the word section for squad
in the commands.
24 DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
SECTION IV. Manual of the pistol.
94. The instruction under this head is first given on foot.
95. The pistol being in the holster, to raise pistol: 1. Raise,
2. PISTOL.
At the command raise, unbutton the holster flap with the right
hand and grasp the stock, back of the hand to the body.
At the command pistol, draw the pistol from the holster,
reverse it, muzzle up, the hand holding the stock with the thumb
and last three fingers; the little finger may be placed -under the
butt ; forefinger outside of the guard ; guard to the front ; barrel
nearly vertical; hand as high as the neck and 6 inches to the
right and front of the right shoulder. This is the position of
raise pistol.
96. Being mounted and at position raise pistol, 1. Lower,
2. PISTOL. At the command pistol, lower the pistol, without
changing the grasp, rest the hand and pistol on the right thigh,
back of hand up, muzzle in front of right knee.
97. Being at raise or lower pistol: 1. Return, 2. PISTOL.
Insert the pistol in the holster, back of hand to the body, but-
ton the flap, and drop the hand by the side.
If the holster is so constructed that the butt is to the rear,
raise and return pistol are executed as already prescribed, ex-
cept that the back of the hand is to the right and the pistol is
not reversed.
98. 1. Inspection, 2. PISTOL.
Execute raise pistol, except that the pistol is held about 6
inches in front of the center of the body, barrel up, pointing to
the left front and upward at an angle of about 45, wrist
straight and as high as the breast.
The instructor passes along the rank and examines the pistols.
To inspect the pistol minutely, he takes it in his hands and then
returns it to the soldier, who grasps it at the stock and resumes
inspection pistol ; each man returns pistol as the inspector passes
to the next. If the pistols are not inspected, they are returned
by the commands : 1. Return, 2. PISTOL.
For purposes of instruction the men may be required to exe-
cute inspection pistol simultaneously, suitable caution being
given to that effect by the instructor. But at formal inspections
the men execute inspection pistol in succession as the inspector
approaches them.
THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 25
99. Being at raise or lower pistol: LOAD.
Place the pistol at the cylinder in the left hand, latch up,
barrel inclined to the left front and downward at an angle of
about 30 ; draw back the latch with the right thumb, push the
cylinder out with the second finger of the left hand, and, if
necessary, eject the empty shells by pressing the ejector with
the left thumb, right hand steadying the pistol at the stock;
take a cartridge from the belt or box, insert it in the chamber,
press it home with the right thumb, and so on for each cham-
ber to be loaded ; close the cylinder with the left thumb so that
the hammer will rest over the empty chamber and resume posi-
tion held before loading.
Firing*.
100. For single action. Being at raise (or lower) pistol:
1. To the front (right oblique, etc.); or, 1. At (such an object),
2. READY.
Cock the pistol with the right thumb and direct the eyes to
the front or toward the target.
101. 1. Squad, 2. FIRE.
Thrust and point the pistol to the front or toward the target,
arm nearly or quite extended, keeping the eyes on the object,
and fire; resume the raise (or lower) pistol.
To continue the firing in the same direction, or at the same
target: 1. READY, 2. Squad, 3. FIRE.
102. For double action, being at raise (or lower) pistol:
1. To the front (right oblique, etc.), 2. Squad, 3. FIRE; or, 1. At
(such an object), 2. Squad, 3. FIRE.
Executed as in paragraph 103, except that at the command
Fire the pistol is cocked by pressing steadily on the trigger.
103. An almost imperceptible pause may be allowed between
the thrusting and firing, in which to correctly point the pistol.
Deliberate aiming, however, should not be encouraged. After
firing without cartridges, pause an instant to see if the pistol is
correctly pointed, to get the personal error.
The instructor must take into account individual peculiarities
in order to secure the best results in firing; in such cases de-
parture from the text is permissible.
When mounted, lean slightly forward, bearing on the stir-
rups; in firing to the front, lean well to the right and slightly
forward, to avoid burning or frightening the horse,
26 DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
104. In a similar manner the men will be instructed to fire
to the left, right, right oblique, left oblique, right rear, left rear,
and rear. When firing to the left, the pistol hand will be about
opposite the left shoulder ; when firing to the rear or right rear,
the shoulders are turned about 45 to the right; when firing to
the left and left rear, the shoulders are turned about 45 to the
left.
105. The recruits are first taught the motions of loading and
firing without using cartridges. Loading and pointing practice
shall be given mounted, at all gaits.
106. No cartridges will be used, except when indicated in
the first command, thus: 1. With (so many) Dummy (blank or
ball) cartridges, 2. LOAD.
To Fire at Will.
107. 1. Fire at will, 2. To the front, etc., or, 2. At (such an
object), 3. COMMENCE FIRING, 4. CEASE FIRING.
The man fires as rapidly as is consistent with good pointing
at each shot. The raise or lower pistol is resumed after each
shot.
108. At the command cease firing, the firing will stop, and
the men resume the raise or lower pistol.
Target practice will be conducted on the principles explained
in the Small-Arms Firing Regulations.
CHAPTER III. THE COMPANY DISMOUNTED.
SECTION I. General provisions.
109. The instruction herein prescribed for the field company
dismounted is applicable, with obvious modifications, to the
platoon dismounted and the section dismounted. Other com-
panies of the Signal Corps, not mounted, will be governed by the
Infantry Drill Regulations.
110. Sections are either wire sections or wireless sections.
A wire section dismounted comprises all the men assigned to
the installation and maintenance of a wire line of information.
It consists of one first-class sergeant, who is chief of section,
one sergeant, two corporals, driver, operators, linemen, mes-
sengers, and horse holders
THE COMPANY DISMOUNTED. 27
A wireless section dismounted comprises all the men assigned
to the establishment and maintenance of a wireless station. A
pack wireless section consists of one first-class sergeant, who is
chief of section, one sergeant, two corporals, operators, antenna
men, messengers, and horse holders. A wagon wireless section
consists of one first-class sergeant, who is chief of section, one
sergeant, two corporals, the engineer, the wagoner, operators,
antenna men, guy men, messengers, and horse holders.
The men are permanently assigned to sections and are trans-
ferred by order of the captain only; they may be temporarily
attached to sections not their own to equalize subdivisions at
drill or other duty.
111. A platoon dismounted consists of one lieutenant, who is
chief of platoon, and two sections dismounted.
112. A company dismounted comprises three platoons and such
additional men as are necessary for administrative, tactical,
and technical purposes.
113. Chief of platoons and of sections supervise the move-
ments of their platoons and sections, but repeat or give com-
mands only when prescribed.
114. File closers will rectify mistakes and insure steadiness
and promptness in the ranks.
115. The company is formed in double rank, with the platoons
and sections arranged from right to left in the order of their
permanent numbers.
The senior lieutenant is assigned as chief of the first platoon,
the lieutenant next in rank as chief of the second platoon, and
so on.
The first four sections of a field company are wire sections;
the other two are pack wireless sections.
The first four sections in a field wireless company are pack
wireless sections ; the other two are wagon wireless sections.
SECTION II. Posts of officers, noncommissioned officers, etc., in
line.
116. The captain: Four yards in front of the center of the
company. Chiefs of platoons: Two yards in front of the center
of their platoons. Master signal electricians: In the line of file
closers, opposite the centers of the first and third platoons, re-
spectively. First sergeant: In the front rank, 1 yard from the
28 DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
right of the guidon. Chiefs of sections: One yard in front of
the center of their sections. Sergeants: In the front rank on
the right of their sections, not covered in the rear rank. Supply,
stable, and mess sergeants: In the line of file closers. Corporals:
In the front rank of their sections, one on the left of the ser-
geant, the other on the left of the section. Guidon: On the
right of the front rank of the first section, not covered in the
rear rank. Trumpeters: In the line of file closers, in rear of the
first section. Mechanics, cooks, etc., when present, will be as-
signed to the various sections.
117. In flank columns the posts are the same as when faced
with the company from line.
SECTION III. To form the company dismounted.
118. At the sounding of the assembly, the first sergeant,
facing the company, and 6 yards in front of where the center
is to be, commands : 1. Fall in, 2. Call rolls, 3. REPORT.
At the command fall in, the sergeants place themselves on the
line facing to the front, in their proper order, at sufiicient dis-
tance apart for the formation of their sections. The men of
each section fall in on the left of their sergeants, as prescribed
in paragraph 73; the chiefs of sections take their posts, facing
their sections, and the guidon and the file closers, except the
master signal electricians, take their posts. The assembly hav-
in ceased, the first sergeant causes the sections to close to the
right, if necessary.
At the command call rolls, the chief of sections call the rolls
and then face to the front.
At the command report, the chief of the first section salutes
and reports, " First section present," or " First section, Cor-
poral and Private are absent." The first sergeant,
having received and verified the report, returns the salute with
the right hand. The chief of the second section then reports in
like manner, and so on. Men who are known to be absent by
proper authority are not reported absent by the chiefs of sec-
tion. After receiving the reports the first sergeant faces about,
salutes the captain and reports, "Sir, the company is present or
accounted for," or "Sir, (so many) noncommissioned officers or
privates are absent." The first sergeant then takes his post.
The captain places himself about 12 yards in front of the center
THE COMPANY DISMOUNTED. 29
of the company, superintends the formation, and receives the
report of the first sergeant, whose salute he returns. The
lieutenants and master signal electricians take their posts as
soon as the first sergeant has reported. During instruction the
officers have the saber drawn or in the scabbard, at the dis-
cretion of the captain. When the captain draws saber the
lieutenants also will draw sabers.
Alignments.
119. The alignments are executed as prescribed for the
squad, the guide being established instead of the base file. In
aligning the company, the captain places himself in prolonga-
tion of the line, 2 yards from and facing the flank toward which
the alignment is made; after commanding FRONT he resumes
his post.
To Dismiss the Company.
120. Being in line at a halt the captain directs the first
sergeant : Dismiss the company, and returns the salute of the
first sergeant.
The officers and master signal electricians fall out; the first
sergeant salutes, steps 3 yards to the front, faces to the left,
and commands : DISMISSED.
In exceptional cases the company may be dismissed from
any formation, either at a halt or marching.
Route Order and at Ease.
121. Marching in flank column: 1. ROUTE ORDER, or, 1.
AT EASE.
The officers carry their sabers at will or in the scabbard ; the
men retain their positions in ranks, but are not required to
keep step.
If the command be route order, the men are permitted to talk ;
if the command be at ease, silence is preserved.
To resume the cadenced step : 1. Company, 2. A TTENTION.
If halted, while marching at route order, the men remain at
rest in ranks ; if halted while marching at ease, they remain at
ease.
Route order and at ease are not used while marching in
double time.
PART III.
MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
CHAPTER I. THE SOLDIER MOUNTED.
122. The object of this instruction is to teach horsemanship
to the extent necessary to enable detachments and companies
of the Signal Corps to efficiently perform the mounted duties
required of them.
123. During the first few lessons the instructor will devote
his attention chiefly to giving the recruits the proper seat and
carriage and to making them self-confident on horseback; he
quietly and patiently corrects the faults of each individual as
they occur, frequently passing from one to another, and will re-
quire by degrees the correct execution of his teachings; these
understood and confidence imparted, the positions and motions
will be rigidly enforced.
The recruit will be taught that his own disposition or temper
is usually communicated to and reacts upon the horse, and
therefore it is to their mutual interest to preserve calmness.
The instructor may dismount when he can, in that way the
better teach the positions.
Quiet, well-trained horses are first assigned.
124. Each mounted drill begins and ends at the walk. This
rule is general.
125. During the drills the recruits are taught the following
rules for the care of horses, until the instructor is satisfied by
means of questions that they are thoroughly comprehended :
Never threaten, strike, or otherwise abuse a horse.
Before entering a stall or when approaching a horse from the
rear speak to the horse gently.
Never take a rapid gait until the horse has been warmed up
by gentle exercise.
Never put up a horse brought in a heated condition to the
stable or picket line, but throw a blanket over him and rub
his legs, or walk him until cool. When he is wet, put him under
shelter, and rub him until dry.
30
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 31
Never feed grain to a horse nor allow him to stand uncovered
when heated. Hay will not hurt a horse no matter how warm
he may be.
Never water a horse when heated unless the exercise or
march is to be immediately resumed.
Never throw water over any part of a horse when heated.
Never allow a horse's back to be cooled suddenly by washing
or even removing the blanket unnecessarily.
To cool the back gradually, the blanket may be removed and
replaced with the dry side next the horse.
The Equipment of the Horse.
126. The instructor indicates the different parts and uses
of each equipment as a commencement of this instruction.
To Fold the Saddle Blanket.
127. The blanket, after being well shaken, will be folded
into six thicknesses, as follows: Hold it well up by the two
corners, the long way up and down; double it lengthwise (so
the fold wih come between the " U " and " S "), the folded cor-
ner (middle of blanket) in the left hand; take the folded corner
between the thumb and forefinger of the right hand ; thumb
pointing to the left; slip the left hand down the folded edge
two-thirds its length and seize it with the thumb and second fin-
ger ; raise the hands to the height of the shoulders, the blanket
between them extended; bring the hands together, the double
fold falling outward; pass the folded corner from the right
hand into the left hand, between the thumb and forefinger, slip
the second finger of the right hand between the folds, and seize
the double-folded corner; turn the left (disengaged) corner in,
and seize it with thumb and forefinger of the right hand, the
second finger of the right hand stretching and evening the
folds; after evening the folds, grasp the corners and shake the
blanket well in order to smooth the folds, raise the blanket,
and place it between the chin and breast; slip the hands down
halfway, the first two fingers outside, the other fingers and
thumb of each hand inside, seize the blanket with the thumbs
and first two fingers, let the part under the chin fall forward;
32 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
hold the blanket up, arms extended, even the lower edges, seize
the middle points between the thumbs and forefingers, and flirt
the outside part over the right arm ; the blanket is thus held
before placing it on the horse.
To put on the Blanket and Surcingle.
128. The instructor commands: BLANKET.
Approach the horse on the near (left) side, with the blanket
folded and held as just described; place it well forward on his
back, by tossing the part of the blanket over the right arm to
the off (right) side of the horse, still keeping hold of the middle
points; slide the blanket once or twice from front to rear to
smooth the hair, being careful to raise the blanket in bringing
it forward; place the blanket with the forefinger of the left
hand on the withers, and the forefinger of the right hand on the
backbone, the blanket smooth ; it should then be well forward
with the edges on the left side ; remove the locks of mane that
may be under it ; pass the buckle end of the surcingle over the
middle of the blanket, and buckle it on the near side, a little
below the edge of the blanket.
To put on the Watering Bridle.
129. The instructor commands: BRIDLE.
Take the reins in the right hand, the bit in the left; approach
the horse on the near side, slip the reins over the horse's head
and let them rest on his neck; reach under and engage the
snap in the right halter ring, insert the left thumb in the side
of the horse's mouth above the tush and press open the lower
jaw ; insert the bit and engage the snap in the left halter ring.
The bit should hang so as to touch, but not draw up, the corners
of the mouth.
To Unbridle.
130. At the command unbriddle, pass the reins over the
horse's head, disengage the snaps, and remove the bit gently
from the horse's mouth.
131.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED.
The Saddle and Bridle.
33
NOMENCLATURE OF THE
SADDLE.
A, Pommel.
B, Cantle.
C, Side bar.
D, E, Spider (quarter
straps).
F, Spider (or girth-strap)
ring.
G, Cincha.
H, Cincha strap.
I, Cincha ring.
i, Cincha-ring safe.
K, Stirrup loop.
L. Stirrup strap.
M, Stirrup tread.
N, Stirrup hood.
P, Shield.
Q, Stud.
R, R, Rings.
S. S, Saber straps.
T, Staple.
a, a, a, a, Coat straps.
PI. 10, Par. 131.
82940 11-
34
MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
NOMENCLATURE OF THE BRIDI
Headstall :
A, Crovvnpiece.
B, Brow band.
C, Ornament.
D, D, Cheek piece.
E, Throatlatch.
Bit:
F, F, Mouth piece.
G, Port.
H, II, Branches.
I, I, Rein rings.
K, Curb strap.
R, Reins.
Link :
L, Link strap.
M, Link snap.
PI. 11, Par. 131.
132. Greatest care will be taken in the fitting of the saddle;
sore backs are generally occasioned by neglect, and the men
must never be allowed to lounge or sit unevenly in the saddle.
To Saddle.
133. For instruction, the saddle may be placed 4 yards in
rear or front of the horse. The stirrups are crossed over the
seat, the right one uppermost ; then the cincha and cincha strap
are crossed above the stirrups, the strap uppermost. The
blanket having been placed as previously explained, the in-
structor commands: SADDLE.
Seize the pommel of the saddle with the left hand and the
cantle with the right, approach the horse on the near side from
the direction of the croup, and place the center of the saddle on
the middle of the horse's back, the end of the side bar about three
finger widths behind the point of the shoulder blade ; let down
the cincha strap and cincha ; pass to the off side, adjust the
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 35
cincha and straps, and see that the blanket is smooth; return
to the near side, raise the blanket slightly under the pommel
arch so that the withers may not be compressed; take the
ciiicha strap in the right hand, reach under the horse and
seize the cincha ring with the left hand, pass the end of the
strap through the ring from underneath (from inside to out-
side), then up and through the upper ring from the outside; if
necessary, make another fold in the same manner.
The strap is fastened as follows: Pass the end through the
upper ring to the front; seize it with the left hand, place the
fingers of the right between the outside folds of the strap ; pull
from the horse with the right hand and take up the slack with
the left ; cross the strap over the folds, pass the end of it with
;he right hand underneath and through the upper ring back of
the folds, then down and under the loop that crosses the folds,
and draw it tightly; weave the ends of the strap into the
strands of the cincha.
Another method of fastening the cincha strap is as follows:
Pass the end through the upper ring to the rear; seize it with
;he right hand, place the fingers of the left between the outer
folds of the strap ; pull from the horse with the left hand and
take up the slack with the right; pass the end of the strap
underneath and draw it through the upper ring until a loop is
formed ; double the loose end of the strap and push it through
:he loop and draw the loop taut. The free end should then be
long enough to conveniently seize with the hand.
Having fastened the cincha strap, let down the right stirrup
and then the left.
The surcingle, when used, is then buckled over the saddle and
should be a little looser than the cincha.
The cincha, when first tied, should admit a finger between it
and the belly. After exercising for awhile the cincha will be
found too loose and should be tightened.
134. To approximate the length of the stirrup straps before
mounting, they are adjusted so that the length of the stirrup
strap, including the stirrup, is about 1 inch less than the length
of the arm, fingers extended.
To Unsaddle.
135. The instructor commands : UNSADDLE.
Stand on the near side of the horse ; unbuckle and remove
the surcingle ; cross the left stirrup over the saddle ; loosen the
36 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
cincha strap and let down the cincha ; pass to the off side, cross
the right stirrup, then the cincha; pass to the near side, cross
the cincha strap over the saddle; grasp the pommel with the
left hand, the cantle with the right, and remove the saddle over
the croup and place it in front or rear of the horse, as may be
directed, pommel to the front ; grasp the blanket at the withers
with the left hand and at the loin with the right, remove it in
the direction of the croup, the edges falling together, wet side
in, and place it across the saddle, folded edge on the pommel.
If in the stable, place the saddle on its peg when taken off the
horse.
To Put on the Curb Bridle.
136. The instructor commands: BRIDLE.
Take the reins in the right, the crown piece in the left hand;
approach the horse on the near side, passing the right hand
along his neck ; slip the reins over his head and let them rest on
his neck ; take the crownpiece in the right hand and the lower
left branch of the bit in the left hand, the fore finger against
the mouthpiece; bring the crownpiece in front of and slightly
below its proper position ; insert the thumb into the side of the
mouth above the tush ; press open the lower jaw, insert the bit
by raising the crownpiece; with the left hand draw the ears
gently under the crownpiece, beginning with the left ear; ar-
range the forelock, secure the throatlatch, and then the curb
strap, taking care not to set them too closely.
137. The mouthpiece, which should fit the width of the
horse's mouth, rests on that part of the bars (the lower jaw be-
tween the tushes and molars) directly opposite the chin groove;
the curb strap should then lie in the chin groove without any
tendency to mount up out of it on the sharp bones of the lower
jaw. This position of the mouthpiece will be attained for the
majority of horses by adjusting the cheek straps so that the
mouthpiece will be 1 inch above the tushes of the horse and 2
inches above the corner teeth of the mare.
The throatlatch should admit four fingers between it and the
throat; this prevents constriction of the windpipe or pressure
on the large blood vessels.
The curb strap should fit smoothly the chin groove and be
loose enough to admit one or two fingers when the branches of
the bit are in line with the cheek straps.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 37
138. At the discretion of the instructor, the halter may be
taken off before bridling, the reins being first passed over the
neck; the hitching strap, if not left at the manger or picket
line, is tied around the horse's neck ; if the horse be saddled, in
the near pommel ring.
To Unbridle.
139. The instructor commands: UNBRIDLE.
Stand on the near side of the horse; pass the reins over the
horse's head, placing them on the bend of the left arm ; unbuckle
the throatlatch, grasp the crownpiece with the right, and assist-
ing with the left hand gently disengage the ears; grasp the bit
with the left hand, and gently disengage it from the horse's
mouth by lowering the crownpiece ; place the crownpiece in the
palm of the left hand, take the reins in the right hand, pass
them together over the crownpiece, make two or three turns
around the bridle, then pass the bight between the brow band
and crownpiece and draw it snug.
The bridle is hung up by the reins, or placed across the saddle
on the blanket.
If the horse has no halter on, unbridle and push the bridle
back so that the crownpiece will rest on the neck behind the
poll until the halter is replaced.
To Roll the Overcoat.
140. Spread the overcoat on the ground, inside down, skirt
buttoned throughout, sleeves parallel to the middle seam, collar
turned over on the shoulders.
Turn the tails of the coat under about 9 inches, the folded
edge perpendicular to the back seam. Fold over the sides to
form a rectangle not more than 34 inches across, according to
the size of the coat. Roll tightly from the collar with the hands
and knees and bring over the whole roll that part of the skirt
which was turned under, thus binding the roll.
The Blanket Roll for Mounted Men.
141. To make the roll : Spread the shelter half (model 1904)
on the ground, roll straps underneath, and fold over the tri-
angular part on the rectangular part. Turn under the roll-
38 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
strap edge of the shelter half so that the width of the fold will
be 8 inches. Fold the blanket once across the longer edges and
lay the blanket on the shelter half, folded edge within 1 inch
of the roll-strap edge of shelter half. Fold the sides of blanket
and of shelter half inward, width of folds about 11 inches. The
shelter-tent pole and pins are now laid on the blanket at the
edge farthest from the roll-strap edge, pole on one side, pins on
the other, thus leaving what will be the middle of the pack free
to bend.
Roll tightly, using hands and knees, toward the roll-strap
edge, and bring over the entire roll the part the shelter half
which was turned under, thus binding the roll. Buckle the two
available roll straps about the roll, passing them around twice.
The roll should be about 44 inches long and about 6 inches in
diameter.
The Blanket Roll for Men not Individually Mounted.
142. To make the roll, lay the shelter half on the ground
and fold over the triangular part on the rectangular part.
Fold the blanket in six thicknesses, as prescribed in the Drill
Regulations for folding the saddle blanket, except that the first
fold is made across the length of the blanket instead of across
its width.
Lay the folded blanket on the shelter half, so that one of its
shorter sides will be about 8 inches from the edge of the shelter
half farthest from the triangular part. Across the other short
side of the blanket place the shelter-tent pole and pins. Fold
over the sides and ends of the shelter half which lie outside of
the blanket, causing the ropes and straps to be included within
the folds.
Commencing at the end where the pole and pins were placed,
roll the pack, using the hands and knees to insure the roll being
made as tight as possible. Just before the roll is completed,
open out slightly with the hands the pocket formed by the 8-
inch fold of the shelter half, and then draw the pocket over the
roll, thus binding it. Be particularly careful to draw the canvas
over the ends of the roll so as to prevent rain from entering the
inner portions of the roll. The roll should be about 22 inches
long and about 7 inches in diameter.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 39
To Pack the Saddle.
143. Overcoat rolled as prescribed, and strapped on pommel;
saddlebags attached to rear of saddle, by saddlebag stud and
staples, and to cincha rings by saddlebag straps ; blanket and
shelter half rolled as prescribed and strapped to cantle with one
short strap and to the saddlebag rings with two long (60-inch)
straps ; nose bag drawn up under near saddlebag, the ventilating
piece outward and just concealed by the bottom of the saddle-
bag, the nose-bag strap passed through the near cantle rings,
with a turn around the ring to prevent slipping, and then
buckled ; canteen snapped to off cantle ring ; meat can, tin cup,
knife, fork, spoon, two haversack rations in near pocket of
saddlebag; currycomb, brush, watering bridle, one emergency
ration, and the authorized toilet articles in off pocket of saddle-
bag.
The Position of Stand to Horse.
144. The instructor commands: STAND TO HORSE.
Each man places himself, facing to the front, on the near side
of the horse, eyes on a line with the front of the horse's head,
so he can see along the front, and takes the position of the
soldier, except that the right hand, nails down, grasps both
reins, forefinger separating them, 6 inches from the bit.
To Lead Out.
145. The men standing to horse, to leave the stable or picket
line, the instructor commands : LEAD OUT.
Each man, holding his hand well up and firm, leads his horse,
without looking at him, to the place designated by the in-
structor.
The men form in single rank from right to left, and, until
further orders, with intervals of 3 yards.
If the horse shows a disposition to resist being led, the man
takes the reins from the horse's neck, takes the ends in the left
hand, then, with the right hand holding the reins, leads the horse
as before. When leading through a low or narrow doorway
the horse should be quieted by the voice or caresses, and not
allowed to pass through hurriedly. To prevent the horse from
40 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
rushing ahead the instructor may direct the man to face toward
the horse, holding one rein in each hand, close to the bit, and
lead him by stepping backward ; after passing the doorway the
man leads the horse as before.
To Align the Rank.
146. 1. Right (left), 2. DRESS, 3. FRONT.
The men dress to the right and move their horses forward or
backward, as may be necessary to align them.
To Mount (without Saddle).
147. 1. Prepare to mount, 2. MOUNT.
At the first command drop the right rein ? take two back steps,
stepping off with the left foot, at the same time sliding the right
hand along the left rein, face to the right. This should place
the man behind the near shoulder of the horse. Take both
reins in the right hand, aided by the left, the reins coming in
on the side of the forefinger, forefinger between the reins, the
loose end falling over on the off side; place the right hand
behind the withers, holding the reins short enough to feel
lightly the horse's mouth ; pla^e the left hand near the withers,
and grasp a lock of the mane, the lock coming out between the
thumb and forefinger.
At the command mount, spring lightly from the ground and
raise the body, keeping it erect, and supporting the weight on
the hands ; carry the right leg, knee bent, over the horse's back,
the weight still borne on the hands; sit down gently on the
horse's back, and take one rein in each hand, the reins bearing
equally on the horse's mouth.
Position of the Soldier, Mounted (without Saddle).
148. Body balanced on the middle of the horse's back.
Head erect and square to the front.
Chin slightly drawn in, but not so much as to produce stiff-
ness.
Body erect, but without stiffness.
Forearms close to the sides, without pressure.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 41
Hands about 6 inches apart, backs straight up and down and
outward and held low, so that the little fingers will brush the
mane on top of the withers.
The right rein in the right hand and the left rein in the left
hand, coming in on the underside of the little finger and coming
out over second joint of forefinger, on which the thumb firmly
holds the rein; the other fingers closed on the reins, nails to-
ward the body ; reins bearing equally on the horse's mouth ;
bight end of reins falling to the front and on the right side
of the horse's neck.
Buttocks bearing equally on the middle of the horse's back,
the seat being as flat as possible.
Legs stretched by their weight alone; the horse clasped by
the entire leg that is, the flat of the thighs, the inside of the
knees, and the calf of the leg.
Feet hanging naturally and turned out at whatever angle
the conformation of the man requires in order to grasp the
horse as above.
Remarks on the Position of the Soldier Mounted.
149. Body erect but without stiffness. While the head and
shoulders should not droop forward, nor the chest be con-
tracted, nor the back curved to the rear, and any tendency to
slouch should be promptly corrected, still no part of the body
should be held so straight or erect as to produce stiffness.
Forearms close to the sides without pressure, to prevent their
"being thrown out when the horse trots; if with pressure, the
motion of the body will be communicated to the hand and rein.
Buttocks bearing equally, and seat as flat as possible, so that
the body will preserve its steadiness.
Flat of thighs, inside of knees, and the calf of the leg clasping
the horse equally to give a firm, steady seat.
The body from the hips up should be movable and should
yield to the motion of the horse.
The man should have hold the horse all the time with the
legs, but not grasping him so much as to produce fatigue; his
legs from the inside of the thighs and knees and calf should
be in constant contact with the horse, but not so much as to
produce fatigue in the man. The arms should be without stiff-
42 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
ness at the shoulders to avoid communicating the motion of the
body to the reins.
The hands take a gentle feel of the horse's mouth, but other-
wise are stationary, except to direct the horse.
During the early lessons the position of the recruit is neces-
sarily one of constraint. He will probably be much fatigued
and possibly made sore in tendons and muscles. An effort
should be made to teach him to ride without unnecessary fa-
tigue or injuring him physically and without putting him to
anything which will tend to destroy his confidence on a horse
or his "nerve."
No man can be said to be a good horseman who has not a
firm, well-balanced seat, and good hands ; these are therefore of
the utmost importance; they will assist the horse; the want of
them will impede the horse's actions and make sore backs, etc.
To Lengthen or Shorten the Reins.
150. Bring the hands toward each other; grasp the right
rein with the thumb and forefinger of the left hand a short dis-
tance from the right thumb ; relax the grasp of the right hand
and allow the rein to slip through to get the proper bearing;
then close the right hand and replace the hands. With the left
rein the positions of the hands are reversed.
To take the Reins in One Hand.
151. To relieve the constraint of the arms by changing their
position, as well as to prepare the recruits for the use of the
curb bridle, the instructor commands: 1. In left (right) hand,
2. TAKE REINS.
At the second command bring the left hand opposite the mid-
dle of the body ; half open and place in it the right rein, hold-
ing both reins as explained for the left rein, except that the
little finger separates the reins, the right rein coming in about
the little finger ; close the left hand and drop the right hand be-
hind the thigh.
To Adjust the Reins.
152. Seize the bight with the thumb and forefinger of the
right hand; partly open the left hand so as to allow the reins
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 43
to slip through it; raise the right hand until the reins bear
equally; close the left hand upon them, letting the bight fall
over the forefinger and right rein ; drop the right hand.
To Retake the Reins in both Hands.
- 153. The reins being in the left hand: 1, In both hands, 2.
TAKE REINS.
Half open the left hand, seize with the right hand the right
rein, and hold them as previously described.
To Drop and Retake Reins.
154. Drop reins: Drop the reins on the horse's neck near the
withers and drop the hands behind the thighs.
Take reins: The man retakes the reins and holds them as
before dropping them.
To Dismount (without Saddle).
155. 1. Prepare to dismount, 2. DISMOUNT.
At the first command pass the right rein into the left hand,
then seize both reins with the right hand, in front of the left,
forefinger between the reins, and place 'the right hand on the
withers, the reins coming into the hand on the side of the fore-
finger; let go with the left hand and grasp a lock of the mane
in front of the withers, the lock coming out between the thumb
and forefinger.
At the command Dismount, raise the body on both hands, carry
the right leg, knee bent, over the horse's back without touching
it; bring the right leg near the left and come lightly to the
ground on the balls of the feet, bending the knees a little ; face
to the left, drop the right rein, step to the front, sliding the
right hand along the left rein, and take the position of stand to
horse.
To Mount from the Off Side.
156. The man being dismounted and on the off side of his
horse: 1. Prepare to mount, 2. MOUNT.
The commands are executed as in paragraph 147, but by
inverse means.
44 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
157. To the right, 2. Prepare to dismount, 3. DISMOUNT.
The second and third commands are executed as in paragraph
155, but by inverse means, the man coming to the ground on the
off side.
158. If the commands be: 1. Squad, 2. MOUNT, the men exe-
cute at the command mount all that has been prescribed at the
commands prepare to mount and mount.
If the commands be: 1. Squad, 2. DISMOUNT; or, 1. To the
right, 2. Squad, 3. DISMOUNT, the men execute at the command'
dismount all that has been prescribed at the commands prepare
to dismount and dismount.
These rules are general.
159. Being at stand to horse, the command rest is executed
as in " The soldier dismounted," except that the men hold the
reins and keep their horses in place.
Being mounted, at the halt, at the command : Rest, or being
in march, at the command : Route order, the men are permitted
to turn their heads, to talk, and to make slight changes of posi-
tion, but they will not lounge on their horses.
Being at stand to horse, the command: At ease is executed as
in " The soldier dismounted."
Being mounted, at the command: At ease, the men are per-
mitted to turn their heads or make slight changes of position,
but preserve silence.
160. To resume the attention: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.
Each man, if dismounted, takes the position of stand to horse ;
if mounted, he takes the position of the soldier mounted.
These rules are general.
To Dismiss the Squad.
161. The squad being dismounted: 1. By the right (left, or
right and left), 2. FALL OUT.
The man on the right leads his horse 1 yard to the front and
then marches directly to the stables or picket line.
Each of the other men executes in succession the same move-
ment, so as to follow the horse next on the right, at a distance
of 1 yard.
The men remove, clean, and put the equipments in place, and
care for and secure their horses under the directions of the
instructor or senior noncommissioned officer.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 45
Each man as soon as he has finished stands to heel. The in-
structor or noncommissioned officer having satisfied himself by
inspection that the horse and equipments are properly cared
for, and that the precautions required on their return from exer-
cise have been observed, orders the men to fall in, marches them
to the company parade, and dismisses them as prescribed in
" The soldier dismounted."
162. STAND TO HEEL: Each man stands at attention, 1
yard in rear of and facing his heel post. At the picket line he
stands at attention, 1 yard in rear of and facing his horse.
Mounted Exercises.
163. These exercises are not considered necessary to the
training of a good horseman, but, if desired, the various move-
ments can be taken from the drill regulations for cavalry.
Gaits of Horses.
164. The gaits are the walk, trot, canter, and gallop.
The walk is at the rate of 4 miles an hour, or 1 mile in 15
minutes, or 117^ yards in a minute.
The maneuvering trot is at the rate of 8 miles an hour, or 1
mile in 7* minutes, or 234 yards a minute. For purposes of
individual instruction, the rate of the trot may be diminished
to the rate of 6 or 6| miles an hour by the command slow trot.
At the command trot out, the rate is 8 miles an hour.
The canter is at the rate of 8 miles an hour and is generally
used for individual instruction.
The maneuvering gallop is at the rate of 12 miles an hour, or
1 mile in five minutes, or 352 yards a minute.
The length of the stride is about 10 feet.
The full or extended gallop is at the rate of 16 miles an hour.
To instruct in the maneuvering cadences, stakes are placed
on the drill ground, on a convenient line for a long track, 117
yards apart. The men and guides are required to march over
the spaces at the rate of one, two, three, or four per minute, ac-
cording as the gait is the walk, trot, canter, gallop, or full
gallop.
Instruction in each gait should be practiced individually and
collectively, until each man knows whether he has the proper
speed or cadence by the rhythm of motion.
46 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
Horses may be trained to walk in column under favorable
conditions 4 miles an hour, making 125 steps a minute, the
stride being 0.916 yard.
The average walk of a horse is a mile in 16 minutes, 3.75
miles an hour, making 120 steps (110 yards) per minute, the
stride being 0.916 yard.
The average trot of a horse is a mile in eight minutes, 7.5
miles an hour, making 180 steps (220 yards) per minute, the
stride being 1.22 yards.
Analysis of Gaits.
165. The walk is a gait of four distinct beats, each foot
being planted in a regular order of succession; e. g., right fore
foot, left hind foot, left fore foot, right hind foot, and so on.
The trot has two distinct beats; the horse springs from one
diagonally disposed pair of legs to the other; between the steps
all the feet are in the air.
The canter has three beats, the regular order of succession
being, e. g., righ hind foot, left hind foot and right fore foot,
left fore foot, and so on. When cantering to the right hand,
the horse goes into the air from the left fore foot.
The gallop has four beats, the regular order of succession
being, e. g., right hind foot, left hind foot, right fore foot, left
fore foot, and so on. When galloping to the right hand, the
horse goes into the air from the left fore foot.
The Aids in Horsemanship.
166. The training of the new horse involves the infliction of
more or less pain, the necessity for which becomes less as his
intelligence is quickened into understanding the lightest pres-
sure.
A horse is bit-wise when (the bit being correctly fitted and
properly adjusted, par. 257) he obeys the lightest pressure upon
either bar.
He is rein-wise when he obeys the lightest pressure of the rein
on either side of the neck, the bit not being disturbed from its
normal position.
He is leg-wise when he obeys the lightest correctly combined
action of the rider's legs.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 47
The most thoughtful care should be constantly exercised in
the combined applications of the aids, that they may not be
opposed to each other in their action; i. e., one favoring the
intended move, the other opposing it.
Preparatory to the movements, the instructor mounts the
squad and explains the uses of the reins and legs.
The reins and legs, the application of which determines the
movements and gaits of the horse, are called the aids.
The man should not only know when he is to apply a given
aid, but he should also understand why he applies it.
The reins serve to prepare the horse to move, and to guide,
support, and halt him ; their action should be gradual and in
harmony with that of the legs.
In using them, the arms should have free action at the shoul-
der ; when a light pressure will be sufficient to govern the horse,
the action of the hand should be at the wrist ; for greater pres-
sure, the elbow should be carried back, but ivithout raising the
hand.
In riding, the bridle hand should be kept steady and ought
not to move with the body; it should merely take a gentle feel
of the horse's mouth ; at the same time it must be kept light,
for the bit causes pain if pressed constantly on the mouth,
destroys its sensibility, and makes the horse's mouth hard.
The hand is light when there is an almost imperceptible alter-
nate feeling and easing of the hand in harmony with the motion
of the horse's head, by which the delicacy of the mouth is pre-
served and the horse made to carry himself light.
That hand is best which, by giving and taking properly and
keeping constant touch of the bit, controls the horse with the
least force, and will best preserve the mouth.
It is recommended that recruits ride with one rein in each
hand ; this will prevent the bad habit of holding the left shoul-
der advanced.
The legs serve to assist in directing the control of the horse.
Closing the legs with a slight pressure prepares him to move,
or, if moving, to keep him up to the hand. Closed with greater
pressure behind the girth, they urge him forward.
Increasing the pressure of the right leg and carrying it
slightly to the rear causes the horse to move his haunches to
the left.
48 MOUNTED 'INSTRUCTION.
The pressure of the legs must be an elastic muscular action,
suited to the sensitiveness of the horse; a heavy clinging pres-
ure, or dull thumping with the heels, must not be permitted.
The reins act to direct the forehand; the lower legs incite to
action and govern the movement of the haunches.
All changes of gait are made gradually. The horse should
never be spurred to make a sudden start, nor should the reins
be jerked.
To Gather the Horse.
167. Close the legs gently; at the same time turn the little
finger toward the body; this is to attract the attention of the
horse and to prepare him to move, that his first motions be
neither too abrupt nor too slow.
To March.
168. 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.
At the command forward, gather the horse.
At the command march, yield the hand and close the legs
slightly to the rear, with a firm, equal, and elastic pressure,
until the horse yields; then relax the legs and adjust the
reins so as to have a slight feeling of the bit.
To Halt.
169. 1. Squad, 2. HALT.
At the command squad, gather the horse without slackening
the gait.
At the command haft, rein in by gradually bringing the hands
toward the body, turning them on the wrist and carrying the
elbows slightly to the rear without raising the hands; at tho
same time close the knees to steady the horse. When the horse
stops, relax the hands and knees.
Being in Line with Intervals, to March by the Flank in Column of
Files.
170. 1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH.
At the first command gather the horse.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 49
At the command march, open the right rein and close both
legs, the right leg a little more to the rear than the other;
turn to the right by moving the horse over a quarter of a
circle whose radius is 2 yards; when the turn is nearly ended
diminish the effect of the right rein and leg, using the left rein
,* CS^~- -CS^3?-- CS^=
if if if if
PI. 12, Par. 170.
and leg to straighten the horse; when the turn is completed,
relax both legs and move off at a right angle to the original
direction. The effect of the rein is to lead the horse in the
desired direction, not to pull him back on that side.
Whenever executing the individual turn at the trot or gallop,
the effect of the outer (in this case the left) leg should be in-
\creasedto sustain the horse.
in. The turn for the individual man is made on the arc of a
circle whose radius is 2 yards.
172. A squad marched by the flank, from line with intervals,
is in column of files, with the distance of 4 feet from the head
of one horse to the croup of the horse next in front.
Marching in column of files, each recruit should so conduct
his horse that the recruit next in front of him shall hide all
others in front; all follow in the trace of the conductor or
leading file.
Distances, when lost, should be regained gradually.
If the column of files be marched by the flank, the squad will
then be in line with intervals of 3 yards between files.
173. For convenience in estimating spaces, each horse with
his rider is considered as occupying a space of 3 yards in
length and 1 yard in width, but by measurement the horse
occupies only about 8 feet in length.
174. To halt the column of files: 1. Squad, 2. HALT, and to
resume the march : 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.
82940 11 4
50
MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
The Individual About.
175. Being in line with intervals, or in column of files:
1. Right (left) about, 2. MARCH.
i
i t i (
PI. 13, Par. 175.
Each man turns his horse on a half circle, and then moves
off in the new direction, to the former rear.
To Oblique.
176. Being in line with intervals, or in column of files:
1. Right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH.
Each man turns his horse half right on an eighth of a circle,
and then moves at an angle of 45 to his former direction.
PI. 14, Par. 176.
To resume the original direction : 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.
Each man turns half left and then moves forward.
Being in line without intervals, the commands and movements
are the same.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 51
177. If, when obliquing, the commands: 1. Squad, 2. HALT,
be given, the men halt in the oblique position ; the oblique march
is resumed at the commands : 1. Oblique, 2. MARCH.
This rule is general.
To Change Direction.
178. Marching in column of files: 1. Column right (left); or,
1. Column half right (half left), 2. MARCH.
The leading man turns or half turns to the right and marches
in the new direction ; the other men move forward and turn
successively on the same ground.
If at the halt, to march and change direction at the same
time ; 1. Forward, 2. Column right (left); or, 2. Column half right
(half left), 3. MARCH.
At the command forward, all the men gather their horses.
At the command march, the leading man turns to the right;
the others move forward and in succession turn on the same
ground.
To Rein Back.
179. Being in line at the halt: 1. Backward, 2. MARCH, 3.
Squad, 4. HALT.
At the command backward, gather the horse.
At the command march, keep a firm seat, hold both legs close ;
carry the weight of the body slightly to the rear, and at the
same time rein in gradually until the horse yields to the pres-
sure of the bit and steps to the rear ; then immediately yield
the hand slightly to allow the horse to regain his balance and
relax the legs; continue in the same manner to yield the hand
and relax the legs, and rein in and close the legs, giving slight
indication to the rear with the weight of the body, so as to keep
the horse in continuous motion.
This movement should be frequently practiced to keep the
horse light and collected.
If the horse raises his nose and throws his weight on his
haunches without stepping back, hold the hands low and play
the reins with light, rapid motions of the hands until he yields.
If the horse throws his haunches to the right, close well the
right leg. If to the left, close well the left leg. If this be not
sufficient to put the horse in proper position, open the rein on
52 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
the side toward which he throws his haunches, supporting him
at the same time with the other rein.
180. For convenience, the instructor may cause the recruits,
upon leading out, to form line with the horses 1 feet apart,
and teach them to mount and dismount in line, to march by
the flank from line, and to form line from column of files, only
employing these movements to begin and end the drill, the inter-
val of 3 yards being maintained during the instruction.
To Mount in Line (Without Saddle).
181. The instructor causes the men to count off, and com-
mands : 1. Prepare to mount, 2. MOUNT, 3. Form,
4. RANK.
At the first command, the odd numbers, step-
ping off with the left foot, lead their horses 4
yards straight to the front, regulating by the
right ; all then prepare to mount.
At the command mount, all mount.
At the command rank, the even numbers
move up in the intervals without jostling or
PI. 15, par. 181. rushing. In forming rank, both mounted and
dismounted, the odd numbers hold their horses'
heads well up to prevent kicking.
To Dismount (Without Saddle).
182. 1. PREPARE TO DISMOUNT, 2. DISMOUNT, 3. Form, 4.
RANK.
At the first command, the odd numbers gather their horses
and move forward 4 yards, and all prepare to dismount.
At the command dismount, all dismount.
At the command rank, the even numbers move up in the
intervals.
Being in Line without Intervals, to March by the Flank in Column
of Files.
183. Being at the halt: 1. By file, by the right (left) flank,
2. MARCH.
At the first command the man on the right gathers his horse.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 53
At the command march, he turns to the right and moves for-
ward in the new direction. The second man from the right
gathers his horse when the first begins to move, he turns to the
right so as to follow the first at the distance of 4 feet from
PI. 16, Par. 183.
head to croup. The movement is executed in succession by the
other men as explained for the second.
If marching, all halt at the command march, except the man
on the right. The movement is then executed as before.
To Trot.
184. Being at the walk: 1. Trot (Slow trot) f 2. MARCH.
At the command trot, gather the horse.
At the command march, yield the hands a little and close the
legs by degrees until the horse obeys, then the hands are
gradually replaced and the legs relaxed.
The gait is slow at first, and the instructor sees that the men
feel lightly their horses' mouths without bearing upon the reins,
and explains that the necessary ease and stability are acquired
by sitting well down on the horse, or saddle, and partially
relaxing the body, thighs, and legs, the hands feeling lightly
the horse's mouth.
He requires the men to preserve their seats by balancing the
body ; that they avoid the common fault of leaning the body too
far or curving the back to the rear; that they sit erect and
keep the legs close to the horse.
The movements already taught at open intervals at the walk
are repeated at the trot. In turning by file to the right or
left, the instructor sees that the trot is neither slackened nor
increased.
To Pass from the Trot to the Walk.
185. Being at the trot: 1. Walk, 2. MARCH.
At the command walk, gather the horse.
54 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
At the command march, rein in, by degrees, carry the weight
of the body slightly to the rear, and hold the legs close to pre-
vent the horse from coming to the halt; as soon as he walks,
replace the hands gradually and relax the legs.
To Increase and Diminish the Rapidity of the Trot.
186. Being at the slow trot: 1. Trot out, 2. MARCH.
Gather the horse, then yield the hands, and close the legs by
degrees until the horse gradually increases the gait to the trot.
The instructor sees that the horses are kept up to the proper
gait, and pays particular attention to the position of the men ;
if their seats become too much deranged, he brings the squad to
the slow trot, or to the walk ; this is especially important in the
earlier instruction of recruits.
187. To resume a moderate trot: 1. Slow trot, 2. MARCH.
Rein in, by degrees, until the horse moderates the gait, clos-
ing the legs to prevent his taking the walk.
The greater part of the work without saddles or stirrups
should be given at the slow trot, as it is unnecessarily fatiguing
and difficult to sit at a fast trot without the saddle or stirrups.
To Pass from the Halt to the Trot.
188. Being at the halt: 1. Forward, 2. Trot, 3. MARCH.
At the command forward, gather the horse.
At the command march, pass at once to the trot as explained
from the walk, except that the legs are closed with more energy.
To Halt from the Trot.
189. Being at the trot: 1. Squad, 2. HALT.
Executed as explained from the walk. The men stop their
horses together, but not too abruptly. (Par. 17.)
To Pass from the Front to the Rear of the Column.
190. Being at the walk, to teach recruits the application of
the aids: 1. First man from front to rear, 2. MARCH, 3. NEXT.
At the first command, the leading man gathers his horse.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 55
At the command march, he leaves the column by the right or
left about, according as he is marching to the right or left hand,
moves parallel to the column, and enters it again by another
about.
The men in succession execute the same movement at the com-
mand next, which is repeated by the instructor until all the men
have passed from front to rear.
To Pass from the Rear to the Front of the Column.
191. Being at the walk: 1. Last man from rear to front, 2.
Trot, 3. MARCH, 4. NEXT.
At the command trot, the man in rear gathers his horse.
At the command march, he leaves the column by an oblique,
takes the trot, moves parallel to the column, enters it again at
the front by another oblique, and resumes the walk, and so on
for the others, each moving out at the command next.
Should the man enter the column at too great a distance in
front of the leading trooper, he slackens the walk until at the
proper distance.
To March in Circle.
192. Marching to the right, and the conductor being at least
17 yards from a corner : 1. Squad, 2. Circle to the right (left),
3. MARCH.
At the first command, the leading conductor gathers his horse.
At the command march, he describes a circle between the two
tracks; the other men follow, each gathering his horse before
entering upon the circle, keeping him there by the inner rein,
and closing the leg on that side. If at the fast trot or gallop,
the haunches should be sustained by the outside leg.
193. While circling, the squad may change gaits, be halted
in column, and put in march, as when marching on the track.
To change hands : 1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH.
The squad passes over the diameter of the circle and circles
in the opposite direction by the commands: 3. Column left
(right), 4. MARCH, the command march being given when the
conductor is 2 yards from the circumference.
To march again on a straight line, the instructor commands :
1. Forward, 2. MARCH, when the leading conductor arrives on
the long side of the track.
56 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
Individual Circling.
194. Marching to the right (left) hand on the long side of
the hall : 1. Men, circle to the right (left), 2. MARCH.
The men should make one circle only, should complete it at
the same time, and take the track to the same hand as when
the movement began. The instructor should make the circle
larger in the beginning, and as the instruction progresses make
it smaller.
When marching on the circle to the right, each man opens the
right rein and closes both legs; when marching at the trot or
gallop, he closes the left more than the right, to sustain the
horse.
I...
PI. 17, par. 194.
If the commands: 1. Squad, 2. HALT, be given, the men halt
their horses facing in the same direction as the conductors.
To Mount (with Saddle).
195. The horses equipped with saddle and curb bridles are
habitually formed in line. The men standing to horse, the in-
structor causes them to count off, and commands : 1. Prepare to
mount, 2. MOUNT.
At the first command, the odd numbers lead out. (Par. 145.)
All the men drop the right rein, take two back steps, stepping
off with the left foot, at the same time sliding the right hand
along the left rein; half face to the right; this should place
the man about opposite the girth ; with the aid of the left hand
take both reins in the right, forefinger between the reins, and
place the right hand on the pommel, the reins coming into the
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 57
hand on the side of the forefinger, and held so as to feel lightly
the horse's mouth, the bight falling on the off side. TWO. Place
a third of the left foot in the stirrup, with the assistance of the
left hand, if necessary; rest upon the ball of the right foot;
grasp a lock of the mane with the left hand, the lock coming
out between the thumb and forefinger.
At the command mount, spring from the right foot, holding
firmly to the mane and keeping the right hand on the pommel ;
pass the right leg, knee bent, over the croup of the horse with-
out touching him ; sit down gently in the saddle ; let go the
mane, insert the right foot in the stirrup, pass the reins into
the left hand and adjust them.
At the command: 3. Form, 4. RANK, the even numbers move
up in their intervals.
Position of the Soldier (with Saddle).
196. Same as previously explained (par. 148), with the fol-
lowing exceptions : Buttocks bearing equally and as flat as pos-
sible upon the middle of the saddle; reins coming into the left
hand on the side of the little finger, and leaving it between
thumb and forefinger ; little finger between the reins, right rein
above it; the other fingers closed, thumb pointing to the right
front in prolongation of the forearm and pressing the reins
firmly on second joint of forefinger, the end of the reins falling
to the front and outside of the right rein ; left forearm close to
the body without pressure; the back of the hand nearly ver-
tical; left hand in front of the pommel of the saddle and as
close to the top of the horse's withers as possible, without rest-
ing upon the pommel ; right hand behind the thigh, arm hanging
naturally; feet inserted in the stirrups so that the ball of the
foot rests on the tread of the stirrup, heel slightly lower than
the tread.
Stirrups.
197. The stirrups should support the feet and the weight of
the legs only, and be 6f such length that when the legs are in
proper position, the feet out of the stirrups, the treads will be
on a level with the lower part of the inner ankle bone.
The length depends somewhat on the formation of the man;
a man with a thick, heavy thigh requires a shorter stirrup
58 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
than a man with a thin, flat one. For long distances at the
gallop and trot a shorter stirrup is required than at a walk.
When riding, the stirrups take up, in a measure, the weight
of the body in its descent to the saddle, by yielding of the
ankles to prevent shock. This action is an easy, quick stiffen-
ing of the muscles which distributes the downward motion
between the feet, thighs, and seat.
If, after the man has exercised a short time at the slow trot,
he has a close seat, his leg in proper position, with his heel
down, but does not easily keep his stirrup, then the stirrup
requires shortening.
To Dismount (with Saddle).
198. 1. Prepare to dismount, 2. DISMOUNT.
At the first command, the odd numbers move forward 4
yards, regulating by the right. All the men then seize the reins
with the right hand, in front of and near the left, forefinger be-
tween the reins, so that they come in on the side of the fore-
finger ; place the right hand on the pommel ; let go with the left
hand, grasp a lock of the mane, the lock coming out between the*
thumb and forefinger ; take the right foot out of the stirrup ;
partly disengage the left foot, body erect.
At the command dismount, rise upon the left stirrup, pass the
right leg, knee bent, over the croup of the horse without touch-
ing him ; descend lightly to the ground, remove the left foot
from the stirrup and place it by the side of the right, body
erect; let go the mane; place the end of the reins on the neck
near the pommel of the saddle with the right hand, which then
seizes the left rein ; face to the left, take two short steps, left
foot first, slipping the right hand along the left rein, and take
the position of stand to horse.
At the command : 3. Form, 4. RANK, even numbers lead up
into their intervals.
The Curb Bridle.
199. The general principles for the use of the reins and legs,
already explained for the watering bridle, apply to the manage-
ment of the horse with the curb bridle, except that the bridle
Land is moved instead of both hands. In all movements of the
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 59
hand the arm should act freely and without constraint to the
body, and as the bit of the curb bridle is much more severe than
that of the watering bridle, it must be applied gradually and
more gently, particularly in halting and in reining back.
To turn the horse to the right (left): Carry the hand a little
forward and to the right (left), so that the left (right) rein
bears on his neck.
The Spur.
200. The spur is used as an aid, and also as a means of pun-
ishment. It is an aid when it is used to augment the effect pro-
duced by one or both legs ; it is used as a means of punishment
when the horse refuses to obey the action of the legs.
To use it as an aid, the man continues the pressure of the leg
until the spur touches the* skin and adds its effect to that of
the leg.
To use it as a means of punishment, hold firmly to the horse
with the legs, turn the toes out a little, yield the hand slightly,
and give him several quick applications of the spur behind the
girth, without moving the body, until the horse obeys. The
spur must never be used to punish unless absolutely necessary,
and then with vigor at the moment the horse commits the fault.
Unnecessary strokes will arouse his resentment and induce
stubbornness ; a thumping or a continuous light touch will
either make the horse insensible to the proper action of the
legs or cause him to kick.
Instruction with Saddle, Curb Bridle, and Spurs.
201. The movements already prescribed are repeated. The
instructor causes recruits at first to use the saddle and watering
bridle, and does not give them the curb bridle and spurs until
they have confidence in their seat and are able to ride fairly
well.
As a general rule, after commencing the use of the saddle in
the riding-hall exercises, about one-half the time of each drill
may be without saddles, the saddles being removed and con-
veniently placed in the hall.
A man who can ride bareback can ride with a saddle.
60 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
To Gallop.
2 O2. The gallop is a succession of leaps during which there
is a small interval of time that all the feet are in the air. In
galloping on a straight line it is immaterial with which foot
the horse leads, but companies will march with greater ease
and comfort if all the horses lead with the same foot.
A horse gallops on the right foot when the right fore and
hind legs move in advance of the left fore and hind legs; he
gallops on the left foot when the left fore and hind legs are
in advance. He gallops true when he gallops on the right foot
in marching to the right, or on the left foot when marching
to the left hand ; he gallops false if in marching to the right
he gallops on the left foot or conversely.
A horse is disunited when he gallops with the near foreleg
followed by the off hind leg, or the off foreleg followed by the
near hind leg; in either case his balance is deranged and his
strength impaired.
When the horse gallops on the left foot, the rider feels a
sensible movement in his position from left to right; when he
gallops on the right foot, the movement of the rider is from
right to left ; when the horse is disunited, the rider experiences
irregular movements ; when the horse gallops true, he preserves
his balance, and in case of a mistake he has his legs under
better control and can more easily recover himself. When he
gallops false or disunited he is apt to fall whenever he makes
a blunder.
203. The canter is a short, collected gallop; the horse's fore-
hand is raised, his whole figure is collected and shortened, his
neck bowed, and his head drawn in, and he moves by the
spring of the haunches. It is the gait that should be used
in the riding-hall exercises and mounted gymnastics.
The gallop can not be safely used in the riding hall unless
the horse gallops true and the track- is in good condition.
204. The recruits marching to the right hand: 1. To three
yards take distance, 2. TROT, 3. MARCH.
The leading man takes the trot; each of the other men in
succession takes the trot when the one in front of him has
gained the distance of 3 yards.
This precaution is taken with recruits to prevent the horses
running upon each other and causing confusion.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 61
1. Gallop; or, canter, 2. MARCH.
At the command gallop, gather the horse.
At the command march, close both legs and rein in with a
firm, light hand (this is to bring the haunches under), then
carry the bridle hand to the left and press the left leg with
vigor ; these actions throw the weight on the near hind leg and
allow the off fore and hind feet to lead ; as soon as the horse
rises, give the hand and relax the left leg; reining in slightly
and closing the legs with light pressure will keep the horse at
the gait and up to the hand ; a dead pull should be avoided ; if
the horse leans on the hand, yield the hand and paly the reins
a little, then close the legs and rein in a little abruptly ; as soon
as the horse obeys, yield the hand.
For recruits the gait at first is restricted to the canter.
To keep the horse true the rider must accommodate himself
to all the horse's motions, sustaining him slightly with the
outside leg, particularly in changing direction at the corners.
When a horse gallops false or disunited, his rider is ordered
to leave the column, come to the trot, and pass to the rear of
the column, taking care not to interfere with the other men;
arriving at the rear he resumes the gallop, the instructor ex-
plaining how to keep the horse true. The gallop to each hand
will be kept up only once or twice around the riding school,
the horses being brought to the trot before changing hands.
In turning corners at a fast gait there is danger that the
horse will fall down. If his haunches swing out, he will change
so as to gallop disunited, and the danger of his falling will be
increased. To prevent this the man should keep the outside leg
closed strongly and not lean in, but maintain a vertical posi-
tion.
The instructor will not at first dwell upon the mechanism of
the gait, but allow each recruit to accommodate himself to the
motion of the horse without losing his seat.
The men must keep their horses steady ; when able to manage
them properly at the gallop the distance of 4 feet from head
to croup is gradually resumed.
In order to make it easier for the man to start his horse true,
the instructor will find it advantageous to march the squad in
line with intervals across the hall at the trot, and, upon ap-
proaching the track, commands: 1. By the right flank, 2. Gallop;
or, 2. Canter, 3. MARCH.
62 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
Or, give the command gallop or canter when the squad is
circling at the trot.
When the men have been sufficiently exercised at the gallop on
straight lines and in circling, they are exercised at the gallop
in inarching by the flank and circling by man, the instructor
taking care that the turns are not made too short; that the
men keep their horses true, and that they do not derange their
positions.
To Pass From the Canter to the Gallop, and the Reverse.
205. Being at the canter: 1. Gallop, 2. MARCH.
Give the hand and close the legs by degrees until the horse
increases his gait to the gallop; when the proper cadence is
attained, the instructor pays particular attention to the posi-
tions of the men ; if their seats become too much deranged, he
brings the squad to the canter or to the trot.
To resume the canter : 1. Canter, 2. MARCH.
Rein in by degrees until the horse moderates the cadence,
closing the legs to prevent his taking the trot.
To Pass From the Gallop or Canter to the Trot.
206. 1. Trot, 2. MARCH.
At the command trot, gather the horse.
At the command march, rein by degrees and hold the legs
close; as soon as the horse trots, replace the hand gradually
and relax the legs.
207. The object of circling on the forehand and haunches
is to teach the horse to obey the pressure of the legs and reins,
and to instruct the recruits in the application of the aids.
Each of these movements will first be taught to the recruits
individually. If the movement be new to the horses, the man
should have one or two pliant switches sufficiently long to reach
his horse behind the girth, which are used at the time of and on
the same side as the pressure of the leg; when the horse yields,
much should be made of him ; it will encourage the horse to
pet him after each effort.
Care is taken that the movements are not hurried, nor too
much required of the horse during the first trials.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 63
To Passage.
208. Being upon a long*side, the squad is marched by the
flank and halted, head to the wall or track, upon arriving near
the opposite side. The instructor then commands : 1. Right
(left) pass, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.
At the first command, gather the horse and incline him to
the right by carrying the bridle hand slightly to the right.
At the command march, rein in, close the legs, to force the
horse to the bit ; bear the hand well to the right, the left rein
pressing the horse's neck, and close the left leg behind the
girth, keeping the body erect. Continue the movement by a
gentle application of the same means.
The horse's shoulder should precede the haunches ; that is, he
is held inclined to the right. Only a few steps should be taken
at first.
At the command halt, replace the bridle hand ; relax the pres-
sure of the left leg as soon as the horse moves his haunches
and is straight in line.
The application of the reins and legs should be in harmony
with the sensibility of the horse ; if the horse obliques too much,
diminish the bearing of the reins ; if he steps too quickly, mod-
erate the effect of reins and legs; if he backs, force him up to
the pit by pressure of the legs.
The passage in column may be executed by the application of
the same means. The movement will be practiced at the trot
and canter.
Jumping.
209. For this exercise the height of the bar should at first
be 1 foot, and the width of the ditch 2 feet. As the men and
horses become used to jumping, the height of the bar and the
width of the ditch are gradually increased, the bar to 3 feet
and the ditch to 5 feet; this exercise should generally be prac-
ticed near the end of each drill.
A horse that hurries or rushes will become an uncertain and
unsafe jumper. If impatient in going up to the bar, he should
be halted, reined back, halted and tried again until he takes it
coolly.
64 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
Horses are taught to jump the ditch and the bar. They are
equipped with the watering bridle and are led by a steady
horse that is accustomed to jumping.
This instruction is also given on the longe.
The horses are taken in the open field and practiced at
jumping shallow ditches, fallen logs, very low fences, etc. If
the horse refuses to take the jump, the instructor may give aid
with the whip, but in such a way as not to terrify him. If the
horse be timid, it is advisable to place the bar on the ground
until he passes over it without alarm. Great discretion must
be used in applying the whip, and the horses will not be re-
quired to jump repeatedly over the same thing or at the same
place.
210. The instructor forms the squad in line, about 30 yards
from the obstacle, and commands: 1. First file from the right
(left), 2. MARCH, 3. NEXT.
The man on the right moves to the front at the walk; he
takes the trot when he has passed over about one-third the dis-
tance, and then the gallop.
After making the jump, he takes the trot, then the walk, and
takes his place in the rank, which is re-formed about 30 yards
beyond, and on the right or left of the obstacle, and facing it.
The other men move out successively from the right at the
command next.
211. In the riding hall the men are formed in two squads, in
line, facing each other at opposite ends of the hall ; two bars
are placed across the track, one on each of the long sides of the
hall, about midway.
1. First file from the right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. NEXT.
The man on the right of each squad moves out at the walk
and marches diagonally across the hall; on passing each other
both take the trot and when abreast of the flank of the opposite
squad they take the track at the gallop (or canter), the horse
leading with the right foot; after jumping both bars, each man
takes the trot, then the walk, passes around the left flank of the
opposite squad, marches at the walk diagonally across the hall,
and forms on the left of his squad.
212. The other men move out successively from the right (or
left) of each squad at the command Next.
This rule is general for individual exercises.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 65
213. in making the flying jump, the horse must not be hur-
ried nor allowed to rush, but be held steady and straight for the
bar or other obstacle. The rider should sit down snugly in the
middle of his saddle, the horse firmly inclosed between the legs,
the hands held low and steady, and the body not forward,
and thus ride steadily and smoothly at the obstacle. The
muscles of the back and shoulders should not be contracted.
The waist should be supple, so as to adopt in its motion the
movement of the horse.
To Jump the Ditch.
214. Ride straight for the ditch at a steady, animated gait,
with the legs closed firmly; the instant the horse springs, give
the hand, and as he grounds sustain him with a light, steady
pressure.
215. The instructor must observe that the rider does not
thrust his weight into the stirrups nor throw out his elbows,
nor check his horse too abruptly. If the hand is held so that
the back of the hand is nearly vertical with the ground, there
will be little tendency to turn out the elbows. If the horse is
checked with a sudden violence after making the jump, he takes
it as a punishment, and may thereafter try. to avoid the obstacle.
Recruits are apt to try to sustain themselves by the reins;
to prevent this the instructor may find it necessary to allow
them to place the bridle hand on the horse's neck until they
have gained confidence. If necessary the bar should be lowered
to the height at which the recruit can easily keep his seat.
The rider will be practiced jumping obstacles without stirrups
and may be without saddles.
Alignments.
216. Being in line without intervals: 1. Right (left), 2.
DRESS, 3. FRONT.
At the command dress all the men move up slowly on the
basis of the alignment established by the instructor, each casts
his eyes to the right so as to see the buttons on the breast of
the second man from him, sits squarely on his horse, keeps his
horse straight in ranks, and touches lightly with his stirrup the
82940 11 5
66 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
stirrup of the man on his right. At the command front, given
when the last man is aligned, all cast their eyes to the front.
All movements in ranks must then cease.
In dressing the first two or three men are accurately aligned
as quickly as possible, in order to afford a base for the rest of
the squad.
This rule is general.
To March in Line.
217. Being in line at the halt: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH, 3.
GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT). The squad moves off promptly, the guide
marching straight to the front at the regular gait.
The instructor observes in marching in line that the squad
marches straight to the front at the regular gait ; that the men
keep their horses straight in the rank ; that they maintain the
interval of about 6 inches from knee to knee (or light touch with
stirrup) toward the side of the guide; that they yield to pres-
sure from that side and resist pressure from the opposite direc-
tion ; that if too much closed toward the guide they carry the
bridle hand from that side and close the leg on the side of the
guide ; that if the interval be too great they carry the hand
toward the guide, and also close the leg on the opposite side,
and, while habitually keeping the head to the front, they occasion-
ally glance toward the guide. If in advance, they rein in
gradually. If in rear, they gradually increase the gait until the
alignment is regained.
218. Marching in line, to effect a slight change of direction:
INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT).
The guide turns his horse slightly to the right and marches
in the new direction. The other men gradually conform to the
movements of the guide, increasing or diminishing the gait
according as the change is toward or opposite the side of the
guide.
To Halt.
219. Whenever the squad is in motion, it is halted by the
commands: 1. Squad, 2. HALT. This rule is general, the com-
mand section, platoon, company, etc., being substituted for squad.
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 67
To March Backward.
220. 1. Backward, 2. Guide right (left), 3. MARCH.
All the men rein back, dressing on the guide.
This movement is used for short distances only.
Being in Line, to Oblique.
221. 1. Right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, each man executes a turn of 45 to
the right, his right knee in rear of the left knee of the man
on his right. The squad moves in the new direction, regulating
by the right, in a line parallel to the
original front.
To resume the original direction :
1. Forward, 2. MARCH.^
Each man turns 45 to the left and
marches straight to the front, regu-
lating on the guide.
To Turn and Advance.
PI. 18, Par. 221.
222. Being in line at the halt or
at the walk, the instructor commands: 1. Right (left) turn,
2. MARCH, 3. GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT). The man on the right turns
his horse 90 to the right, on an arc with a radius of about
4 yards, and moves forward in the new direction without chang-
ing (increasing) the speed. Each of the other men turns his
horse to the right approximating an oblique, and, moving at the
trot by the shortest line, places himself on the new line, when
he takes the gait and direction of the pivot man. During the
turn the guide is, without command, on the frivot flank. The
guide is announced when all men have arrived on the line. If
marching at a trot the pivot man continues at the trot. All
others move at the gallop. If marching at the gallop, the pivot
takes the canter ; all other men continue the gallop, each taking
the canter on arriving in line; as soon as all the men have
arrived on the line all resume the gallop.
68 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
Being in Line, to Form Column of Fours to the Front.
223. 1. Right (left) by fours, 2. MARCH, 3. GUIDE RIGHT
(LEFT). The right four moves straight to the front, the other
fours oblique to the right, so as to follow the leading four at
the proper distance.
If marching, rule 2, paragraph 361, applies for gaits.
To Change Direction.
224. Marching in column of fours: 1. Column right, 2. MARCH.
The leading four executes right turn, the other fours move for-
ward and turn on the same ground as the first. Column half
right is similarly executed, except that the leading four makes a
half turn.
Being in column of fours, at the halt, to march and change
direction at the same time: 1. Forward, 2. Column right (left),
3. MARCH. To make a slight change of direction, incline to
the right (or left).
Being in Column of Fours, to Move to the Rear.
225. 1. Right about, 2. MARCH. The leading four turns to the
right over a half circle with a radius of 4 yards. The other
fours move forward, and, following the first, turn on the same
ground.
Being in Column of Fours, to Form Line to the Front.
226. 1. Squad, 2. Left (right) front into line, 3. MARCH. The
leading four move straight to the front, the rear fours oblique
to the left until the preceding four is uncovered, when it moves
straight to the front until it arrives on the line.
Rule 1, paragraph 361, applies for gaits.
Being in Column of Fours, to Form Column of Twos to the Front.
227. Being at a halt: 1. By twos, march, 2. GUIDE RIGHT
(LEFT).
The right two, Nos. 1 and 2 of the leading four, moves straight
to the front, the left two, Nos. 3 and 4 of the leading four, keep
THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 69
their horses' heads straight until their horses' heads are passed
by the croups of the horses of the right two, when they oblique
to the right and follow the leading two, at a distance of 4 feet.
Each of the other fours form in the same manner as soon as the
left two in the preceding four commences to oblique. Nos. 3
and 4 always follow in rear of Nos. 1 and 2, no matter on which
side the guide may be.
If marching, Rule 2, paragraph 361, applies for gaits.
Being in Column of Fours, to Form Column of Files.
228. 1. By file, 2. MARCH.
The movement is executed according to the principles of the
preceding paragraph. No. 1 of the leading four moves forward
and is followed successively by Nos. 2, 3, and 4, who preserve a
distance of 4 feet from head to croup. When No. 4 commences
to oblique, No. 1 of the succeeding four marches forward or
takes the increased gait.
Column of files from column of twos is formed in similar
manner, No. 1 leading the column.
Being in Column of Twos, fo Form Column of Fours.
229. Being at the halt: 1. Form fours, 2. MARCH. Nos. 1
and 2 of the leading four move straight to the front. The
instructor commands halt when the leading two have moved 3
yards. Nos. 3 and 4 of the leading four oblique to the left until
uncovered, then march to the front and halt when abreast of
Nos. 1 and 2. The other twos march forward and form fours
successively as explained for the first four. Nos. 3 and 4 of
each four commence the oblique to the left when Nos. 1 and 2
are at 3 yards from their position.
If marching, rule 1, paragraph 361, governs the gaits.
Being in Column of Files, to Form Column of Fours or Twos.
230. 1. Form fours, 2. MARCH.
The move is executed on the same principles as in forming
fours from column of twos, No. 1 of each four being the base,
and Nos. 2, 3, and 4 obliquing to the left and forming on the
left of No. 1.
70 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
231. 1. Form Twos, 2. MARCH. The movement is executed
on the same principles as in forming fours, Nos. 1 and 3 being
the base men, No. 2 forming on the left of No. 1, and No. 4 on
the left of No. 3.
Movements in Column of Twos.
232. The column of twos changes direction, halts, and ad-
vances by the same commands and means as a column of fours.
Being in Column of Fours, to Dismount.
233. Being at the halt or marching: 1. Prepare to dismount,
2. DISMOUNT.
At the first command, Nos. 1 and 2 open to the right and
front, Nos. 3 and 4 to the left and front, and all halt. The
four opens only so far as to allow sufficient room for each man
to dismount without interference from the others. Nos. 1
and 4 open a little more than 2 and 3.
The column of twos dismounts by the same commands and
means. In mounting from column of twos or fours the horses
are opened out as in the preceding paragraph at the prepara-
tory command for mounting. At the commands Forward,
March, either before or after mounting, the column moves for-
ward, the files closing toward the center.
Manual of the Pistol.
234. The instruction under this head will conform to what
has already been described in The Soldier Dismounted. (Para-
graphs 94 to 108.)
CHAPTER II. THE DRIVER.
Object and Sequence of the Instruction.
235. The object of this instruction is the detailed training
of the individual drivers.
First. In harnessing and unharnessing, and in fitting and
properly cleaning and caring for harness and packs.
Second. In managing and maneuvering a single pair, and in
the proper caro of draft horses and mules and pack mules.
THE DRIVER. 71
Third. In managing and maneuvering the different pairs of a
team hitched.
Quiet, well-trained animals will be used in the instruction of
recruits.
236. In order to vary the mounted instruction of recruits,
their training as drivers may advantageously be begun as soon
as they have had elementary instruction in the duties of the
soldier mounted. The two kinds of instruction are then con-
tinued concurrently.
SECTION II. General provisions.
237. When two or more carts or wagons march in line, the
instructor, as soon as the march in line is begun, designates
the element on one flank or the other as the guide of the move-
ment, thus: GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT). The other elements align
themselves on the guide thus indicated and maintain their in-
tervals from that flank.
238. If marching in column, or if marching obliquely from
column, the leading element is, without indication, the guide of
the movement.
Rests.
239. The rests are executed and the attention resumed ac-
cording to the general principles heretofore prescribed ; the
drivers, when dismounted, remain close to their teams, so as to
keep them under control.
240. The position of the driver dismounted, at attention,
will be just outside the right wheel, abreast of the footboards,
and holding the reins.
241. After exercise, the drivers, when dismounted, should
raise the collars from the shoulders and adjust the harness if
necessary.
242. Each cart driver is assigned two horses, and each wagon
driver of the combat transportation is assigned four mules.
Disposition of the Harness.
243. In garrison the cart harness is arranged on pegs on
the heel posts, as follows: Both bridles hung from the peg by
72 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
their headstalls ; the traces, reins, and collars, unlocked, of both
horses hung from the peg close to the heel post ; the pole yoke,
with martingales attached, is hung from a spike driven into the
side of the heel post.
In the field the harness is laid back on the footboards; reins,
bridles, and collars on top, and covered with the paulin.
The wagon harness is arranged, as nearly as possible, in a
similar manner.
To Harness.
244. A pair of quiet, well-trained horses, in a double stall,
is assigned to the recruit, who should be supervised at first by
a thoroughly instructed man.
The instructor causes a team to be harnessed, points out and
names the different parts of the harness, and explains their
uses; he then causes the harness to be taken off and replaced
on its peg.
245. The harness being on the heel posts, the instructor
causes the recruits to stand to heel, and commands: HARNESS,
when each man will place the harness upon the team in the fol-
lowing order and manner :
Collar: Each driver puts on and locks the collar of his off
horse, then that of his near horse.
Traces: He lays the middle of the trace of the off horse over the
horse's back, toggles on opposite sides, and, beginning with the
off trace, passes the toggles through the loin loops from the rear
and attaches them to the tugs on the collar. The traces of the
near horse are then attached in the same manner. The rear
ends of the traces are left hanging over the backs of the horses.
Bridle: He bridles the off horse and adjusts the reins, and
then bridles the near horse and adjusts the reins.
Unless instructions to the contrary are given, the halters are
removed before bridling.
Yoke: The driver takes down the yoke ; places himself between
his horses, facing in the same direction with them ; fastens the
breast strap of the off horse, then that of the near horse ; passes
the martingale of the near horse between the forelegs, through
the standing loop on the cincha ; attaches the hooks at the end
of the side straps to the martingale D ring ; secures the martin-
gale of the off horse in the same manner; then passes out in
rear of the near horse, and stands to horse.
UNIVERSITY i)
cr THE DRIVER. 73
.-
To Unharness.
246. UNHARNESS, when the harness will be removed in the
following order and manner :
Unyoke: The driver passes between his horses from the rear,
unhooks the martingale of his near horse, and draws the mar-
tingale through the standing loop on the cincha; then does the
same with respect to the off horse; unhooks the inside end of
each breast strap, detaches the neck yoke and hangs it on its
spike.
Bridle: He detaches the reins from the near horse, puts on the
halter, fastens the halter strap to the manger, does the same
with respect to the off horse and hangs the bridles and reins on
the peg, the near bridle next to the post.
Traces: He disengages the near trace of the near horse and
lays its middle over the horse's back, toggle on the near side;
disengages the off trace and lays it beside the near trace, toggle
on the off side; removes the traces and hangs them on their
peg. In like manner he removes and hangs up the traces of the
off horse.
Collar: He removes the collar of the near horse, then that of
the off horse, and hangs them up, the near collar next to the
post.
To Harness and Unharness in 'the Field.
247. Executed as in garrison, with such modifications as the
disposition of the harness requires. The horses are ordinarily
tied by the halters to the wheels of the carts while harnessing
and unharnessing.
Fitting Harness.
248. The cart harness is the artillery wheel harness, without
saddles, and fitted with a back strap.
When the recruit has become somewhat familiar with the
method of harnessing and unharnessing, he will be instructed
in fitting harness, the importance of which will be thoroughly
impressed upon him.
The bridle is fitted as prescribed in The Soldier Mounted.
The collar, when adjusted, should freely admit the thickness
of the hand between the lower part and the throat, and the
74 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
fingers between the sides and the neck. A short collar chokes
a horse by pressing on the windpipe ; a narrow one pinches and
rubs the neck. A broad collar works about and galls the
shoulders.
The back strap, when adjusted, should admit the breadth of
the hand between it and the horse's back.
The breech strap should Jbe adjusted so that it will bear
quickly when the horse is required to check the movement of
the cart, but will not impede his movement while in draft.
This adjustment is most important. It can best be made by
observing the horse in draft and tightening the straps as much
as can be done without impeding the free movement of the
animal while in draft.
The hip straps should be of such length that the breech strap
will bear just below the point of the buttocks. The lower the
breech strap is adjusted the less does it assist the horse in
checking the movement of the cart.
The loin straps should be so adjusted that the traces, when in
draft, will be straight and without downward pull on the loops
that support them.
The traces: The length of the traces must depend in a great
measure on the size of the horse and his stride. The rule is
to allow about 14 inches from singletree to hind quarters. The
traces should be adjusted so that the line of traction will be
straight from the singletree to the collars. This rule will regu-
late, in some measure, the length of the loin straps.
All trace chains have a ring at one end and a hook at the
other; the hook is passed through the D ring at the end of
the trace, and hooked back into any desired link. By this
means the length of the trace is adjusted, and the trace chain
need not be removed except for cleaning.
To Lead Out.
249. The teams being harnessed, the instructor commands:
LEAD OUT. The teams are led out directly and to the carts.
To Hitch.
250. Hitch. Each driver passes behind the near horse; places
himself between his horses, on the left of the pole; engages the
THE DRIVER. 75
end of the pole in the pole-yoke ring ; then goes behind the near
horse and attaches his traces to the singletree, beginning with
the off trace. He then passes around the front of his team at
double time, and hitches the off horse, beginning with the near
trace.
He then mounts, if the section is mounted ; if it is dismounted
he stands as heretofore prescribed in paragraph 240.
To Unhitch.
251. Unhitch. Each driver dismounts, if mounted; detaches
the traces of his off horse, and places the end of the traces over
the horse's back, as prescribed for harnessing ; passes around the
front of his team at double time, and unhitches his near horse in
like manner; passes between his horses, disengages the pole
from the pole-yoke ring and lowers the pole to the ground.
To Dismiss the Teams from the Park.
252. Lead in. The teams are then conducted to the stable or
other designated place.
253. The instructor then commands: Unharness.
The harness is removed, cleaned, and properly put in place;
the horses rubbed down and cared for. Having satisfied himself
by inspection that these duties have been properly performed,
and that all the precautions required on return from exercise
have been observed, the instructor causes the harness to be
covered, orders the men to fall in, marches them to the company
parade ground, and dismisses them.
Management of Teams in Draft.
254. In all movements from a halt, each driver gathers both
of his horses just before they are to move; if in march and the
gait or direction is changed both horses are gathered just before
they change the gait or direction. Care should be taken that
both the horses move off together and change the gait at the
same time.
255. In starting a cart or wagon, it is especially important
that both the horses of the team should throw their weights
into the collars gradually but simultaneously. Unremitting at-
76 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
tention is required upon the part of every driver in order that
his horse shall at all times do its proper share of the work.
By observing these important rules, a team is. enabled to pull
steadily together and the horses are not fatigued by jerks, which
make them balky, gall their shoulders, and break the harness.
256. In reducing the gait or in halting, the movement must
be checked gradually so as not to bring undue strains upon the
horses or the harness. Ordinarily about 2 yards should be
gained in bringing a cart to a halt from a walk; in the ex-
ceptional cases when carts are halted while moving at rapid
gaits, from 5 to 10 yards should be gained in halting from a
trot ; from 10 to 15 in halting from a gallop.
The command for halting must be so given that the carts may
be properly brought to rest at the place desired.
257. The gaits are always changed gradually, so as not to
strain or worry the horses by sudden movements. In all cases,
whether moving from a halt, changing gait, or halting, the
horses should be made to act together, but they should always
be handled quietly and kindly and allowed a sufficient time for
their movements.
258. In executing the abouts and the turns at a trot or
gallop the radius is sufficiently increased to permit the horses
to execute the movement with ease; and in the abouts the gait
is moderated to avoid overturning the carts.
MARCHINGS.
To March to the Front.
259. 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.
The teams move out simultaneously and march straight to
the front. If in line, they preserve the alignment and the inter-
val from the guiding flank.
To Halt.
260. 1. Carts, 2. HALT.
Each driver stops his team, but not suddenly, and keeps it
straight.
To March by the Flank.
261. 1. Carts, 2. By the right (left) flank, 3. MARCH.
Each driver wheels his team to the right by moving the off
horse over a quarter circle whose radius is 4 yards and causing
THE DRIVER. 77
the near horse to quicken his movements so as to keep abreast
of the off horse. On the completion of the wheel, each driver
moves his team straight to the front in the new direction. If
executed from column, a guide should be announced when line
is formed.
To March to the Rear.
262. 1. Carts, 2. Right (left) about, 3. MARCH.
Executed as explained for the march by the flank, except that
each driver moves his team over a half circle instead of a
quarter circle.
Being in Column, to Change Direction.
263. 1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH.
The leading cart wheels to the right as explained in paragraph
260 ; the rear carts follow in the track of the leading cart, and
wheel on the same ground.
264. Column half right (or left) is similarly executed, except
that only one-eighth of a circle is passed over.
To back the Carts.
265. To the rear: Being at a halt, to move a short distance
to the rear: 1. Backward, 2. MARCH, 3. Carts, 4. HALT.
The drivers rein back their horses, taking care to keep the
pole straight; at the command halt they stretch the traces and
halt.
Alignments.
266. Being in line at a halt, the instructor sees that the
driver on the flank toward which the alignment is to be made is
in the desired position, and commands : 1. Right (left), 2. Dress,
3. FRONT.
At the command dress, the other driversr look to the right and
align themselves accurately, keeping their pairs straight and
preserving their intervals. At the command front, they turn
their eyes to the front.
The instructor may place himself on either flank, and give a
general alignment by ordering any driver to move one or both
of his horses forward or backward.
78 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
CHAPTER III. THE PACKER.
Object and Sequence of the Instruction.
267. The object of this instruction is the detailed training
of the individual packers in harnessing and unharnessing and
in fitting and properly cleaning and caring for harness, and in
managing and maneuvering the different mules of a section.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
Guides.
268. The general instructions for the guide in marching in
line and in column, and for rests, etc., are similar to those given
for the soldier mounted, with such modifications as may be
necessary.
The Individual Packer.
269. The aparejos stand upon the lower edges of their panels
with the cruppers doubled forward; upon each rest, in order,
its frame, folded cincha, folded saddle blanket, and corona.
The corona is doubled, canvas inside, and lies on the blanket,
fold to the front. The bridle, bit to the left, and the blind are
laid across the corona or hung on harness pegs.
270. In garrison, the aparejos are aligned upon racks in
rear of the mules or in the wagon shed. In the field they are
aligned parallel to and about 5 yards from the picket line.
They should rest on poles and be covered with canvas.
The A pare jo Packsaddle.
271. The aparejo packsaddle consists of the aparejo proper
:ind the detachable frame. The aparejo proper consists of
two panels of leather, each braced with light ribs held in place
by a boot stick at the bottom and a saddle bar at the top of
the panel ; the panels are filled with hay, each saddle- being
fitted to its mule. Over the panels is the sobrejalnm of canvas,
leather faced, the ends of which are protected by wooden shoes
held in place by leather caps. The sobrejalma is secured to
the aparejo by thongs at the ends of its center line. To the
THE PACKER. 79
panels is laced the crupper. The cincha is of canvas, doubled,
with a leather cincha strap laced to it at one end, which is
faced with leather and braced with an iron rod. This strap,,
at its attachment to the cincha, carries a rendering ring through
which it passes in tightening. Fifteen inches from this end
of the cincha a leather thong, the finger loop, is attached, which
is used to secure the end of the cincha strap after cinching.
The other end of the cincha carries a curved piece of pipe
which takes the place of a cincha ring. The cincha should be
8 inches longer than the aparejo with which it is used.
272. The frame consists of metal arches and side bars,
riveted to spring-steel side plates for distributing the pressure
on the saddle, and has suitable attachments for supporting the
wireless chests, sections of mast, generator, etc.
273. Each aparejo is provided with a corona, or pad, made
of several thicknesses of blanket, lined with canvas ; also a
saddle blanket.
To Fold the Blanket.
274. Hold the blanket by ttie corners, the short edge up and
down. Bring the short edges together, the right hand holding
the corners, the left holding the folded edge at the top. Shake
the blanket and spread it on the ground, the hands still holding
the corners. Carry the upper edge to the front so as to leave
a portion of the blanket 22 inches wide on the ground. Then
fold back so as to leave the blanket in three equal folds, 22
inches wide and 42 inches long. Shake well and fold once
more, bringing the ends together, and place across the aparejo.
To Blind the Mule.
275. A pack mule is ordinarily blinded during harnessing
and unharnessing, loading and unloading. To teach it not to
move when blinded, the blind must always be lifted before re-
quiring it to change position.
To Harness.
276. Two packers are assigned to each mule. A quiet, well-
trained mule is assigned to two recruits. Each recruit should
80 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
be supervised by a thoroughly instructed man. The instructor
causes a mule to be harnessed and points out and names the
different parts of the pack outfit and explains their uses. He
then has the harness taken off and placed in rear of the mule.
277. The pack outfit being in rear of the mule, the instructor
causes the recruits to stand to heel and commands harness,
upon which the harness is placed upon the mule in the follow-
ing order:
Blind: The packer of the mule being harnessed, on the near
side, takes hold of the halter with the left hand ; grasps an edge
of the blind near one end with the right hand; carries it over
the mule's neck to the off side, tail down ; brings the blind well
to the front over the mule's ears and places it over the eyes,
the tail on top of the neck.
Bridle: The packer of the mule being harnessed, on the near
side, passes the reins over the mule's head, snaps the hook of
the watering bridle into the off halter ring with the left hand ;
opens the mule's mouth with the thumb of the right hand, in-
serts the bit, and snaps the hook in the near ring; secures the
leading rein in the throat latch.
Corona: The off packer on the off side places the corona, can-
vas side down, well forward on the mule's back .and slides it to
the rear until its front edge is just behind the point of the
withers, taking care that the hair lies smooth beneath it.
Blanket: The near packer on the near side places the folded
saddle blanket on the corona, taking care that its lower edges
slightly overlap to prevent bunching, the off packer assisting
from the off side.
Saddle: The near packer on the near side grasps the front
edge of the aparejo near the boot with his left hand, the rear
edge near the boot with his right hand ; the off packer on the off
side grasps the aparejo in a corresponding manner ; both to-
gether raise the aparejo, pass it over the mule from the rear
and place it slightly in rear of its proper position.
Crupper: The packer on the near side places his left hand,
palm up, on the front edge, the right hand, palm down, on the
rear edge of the crupper; the packer on the off side takes a
corresponding position; both together raise the crupper well
up, reverse it and turn it down over the croup. The off packer
raises the mule's tail and places the dock piece well under it,
taking care that no hairs are caught. He then places his left
THE PACKER. 81
hand, thumb down, at the top and rear of the aparejo, his right
hand at the rear of the boot, and moves it forward to its place.
The near packer on the near side throws the upper fold of the
cincha toward the off packer, guiding the cincha to the center
of the aparejo with the left hand. The off packer passes the
cincha well under with his right hand, holding it in position
over the center of the off-side boot until it has been received by
the near packer. He then steps to the mule's shoulder and,
facing to the rear, places his right hand on the collar of the
aparejo, thumb under the corona, and with his left hand at the
rear of the boot pulls the aparejo forward.
Cinch: The off packer holds the aparejo in place, raising the
corona from the withers with his right thumb, taking care not
to raise the front of the aparejo. The near packer holds the
end of the cincha with his left hand, passes the double cincha
strap through the cincha eye from above, brings it up in front
and passes it through the rendering ring from above; grasps
the double cincha strap with the left hand well under and with
the right hand passes the end through the eye in rear of the
other part ; places the palm of his right hand against the rear
end of the boot, pulls the strap taut with his left hand, and calls
set. At this the off packer passes in rear and observes whether
the aparejo is straight. If not, it is correctly adjusted. He
then takes hold of the cincha strap between the near packer and
the mule, the palm of the right hand up, that of the left hand
down, and places his right knee against the boot. The near
packer raises his left foot to the boot and both pull together
until the cincha eye is at the edge of the boot, the cincha in
the center of the aparejo. The near packer holds the cincha
strap with his left hand below his right, and passes the finger
loop from above and back into the right hand of the near
packer, who secures it. The packer of the harnessed mule re-
moves the blind and places it on his left shoulder with the
tail under the right arm.
To Unharness.
278. Unharness, at which the recruits unharness in the fol-
lowing order :
Saddle: The packer on the near side unfastens the cincha
strap and throws its end across the aparejo; folds the cincha
82940 11 6
82 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
with the strap inside and places it on top of the frame. Both
packers push the aparejo slightly to the rear. The near packer
places his left hand on the upper edge of the crupper, his right
on the lower edge near the dock piece; the off packer takes a
corresponding position ; both together raise the crupper and
reverse it forward over the cincha; take hold of the aparejo
as in saddling, pass it backward over the mule, and lower it
carefully to its place in rear:
Blanket: The packer on the near side grasps the front and
rear edges of the blanket at their middle points, removes it,
allows it to fall into a fold between his hands, places it along
the near side of the corona, grasps the corona at the middle
points of its front and rear edges, removes it, and places both
on the aparejo.
Bridle: The packer of the mule being unharnessed removes
the watering bridle in the reverse order of bridling (par. 277)
and places it and the blind on the corona.
279. All recruits are instructed in the duties of both near
and off packers.
To set up the aparejo.
280. To rib up: Unlace the slits and handholes; soak the
aparejo in tepid water for about 15 minutes, drain it and lay it
flat, back pieces up; insert the boot stick and the saddle bar
through the slit in rear and press them to their places at the
boot and the center stitch line, slotted sides up; insert the
numbered set of nine ribs through the slit in rear in their
numerical order and seat them in that order from collar to
rear in the slots of the boot stick and saddle bar, butts at the
boot ; secure the top of each rib as it is seated by inserting the
key bar at the front edge below the collar and passing it over
the rib in place ; fasten the key bar to the collar by the thong.
NOTE. Aparejos are issued to the service with ribs in place.
Ribs are furnished in sets of nine. Each rib is numbered at its
butt to correspond to its proper numerical position in the panel,
counting" from the collar to the rear. Each rib is also stamped
with the size of the aparejo for which it is made. The aparejos
are furnished in 58, 60, and 62 inch sizes. The ribs for a 60-
inch aparejo are therefore marked "1-60," "2-60," "3-60,"
etc. Should repairs or alterations make it necessary to rib up.
THE PACKER. 83
the butt of the fifth rib is seated iu its slot, the overlap at its
slot in the saddle bar is marked and cut away, and the other
ribs are cut to the exact resulting length.
Guava, willow, dogwood, hickory, or any other wood com-
bining the qualities of permanent elasticity and strength may
be used to replace broken ribs.
281. To fill or pad: Turn the aparejo over, belly pieces up;
procure about 6 pounds of long, fine, soft, elastic hay ; taking a
little at a time, tease or " mix " it thoroughly, insert it through
the handhole and thus gradually fill the body of the aparejo
with a smooth and even layer, not more than 2 inches thick.
NOTE. Other filling may be used in necessity, such as moss,
excelsior, curled hair, sea grass, but these substitutes are diffi-
cult of manipulation in alterations necessary to accommodate
the rigging to injuries of the mule. By teasing or " mixing " is
meant the arrangement of the straws so that they will cross
one another. The body of an aparejo is that part which comes
in contact with the body of the mule. As 3 inches of the lower
portion of each boot stick and 3 inches of the upper portion of
each saddle bar must not come in contact with the mule, no
filling should be pressed under the boot stick or within 3 inches
of the center stitch line. The body course tapers, however, so
as to overlap the boot stick and saddle bar, and also tapers
toward front and rear.
282. To face up or dress: To adjust the aparejo more ac-
curately to the shape <Jf the mule, introduce filling and press
it well into the corner of the front boot; working toward the
handhole, continue the facing along the boot stick and front
edge, gradually increasing its thickness to about an inch at 7
inches from the corner and forming its inner edge into the arc
of a circle concentric with the handhole, the thickness tapering
to the ends of the arc; continue the facing for 3 inches more
toward the handhole, rapidly decreasing the thickness to noth-
ing; proceed in exactly the same way at the collar. Under no
circumstances should the collar facings reach within 7 inches
of the center of the handhole. Connect the front boot and
collar facings by a dressing along the front edge about 3 inches
wide and an inch thick, decreasing in thickness toward the
handhole and toward the middle of the edge.
283. Rib up, fill, and dress the other panel in the same
manner.
84 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
NOTE. In facing up, introduce the filling with the hand,
palm up, so as not to disturb the body course. In case the
leather will not yield enough to permit the filling to be intro-
duced well into the corners, the tamping stick may be used to
raise it. This stick, used with the commercial aparejo, is 4 or
5 feet long, 1J inches in diameter, wedge shaped for 4 inches
from one end, the edge of the wedge being about one-fourth
inch thick and grooved. The object of the boot facing is to
cause the boot stick to carry horizontally and parallel to the
center line of the mule and give free action to the mule's elbow.
Mules of large barrel will require a thicker facing than that
described. The object of the collar facing is to cause the
saddle bar to carry horizontally and parallel with the center
line of the mule and to protect the mule's withers. Mules with
high withers will require a thicker facing than that described.
In setting to the shape of the mule the aparejo bends at the
middle of the front edge. It is important that the body course
remain undisturbed during dressing and that the instructions
given be carefully followed to avoid sore withers and tails and
body and belly bunches.
284. To attach the crupper: Stand the aparejo on its boot in
its normal position ; secure a lance thong to the front hole on
the upper facing of the crupper on each side and fasten the
crupper with short thongs to the center holes of the carrier
pieces on the rear of the aparejo; pass the crupper lace thong
through the second hole from the top of the front facing of the
aparejo, through the second hole of the crupper, through the
third hole of the aparejo facing, through the fourth hole of the
crupper, and so on, finishing through bottom holes of facing and
crupper and tying to the crupper hole.
NOTE. In lacing the crupper to the aparejo, the thong must
be passed through the holes from the outside and must not be
twisted, the lacing must not cross, and it is important that the
tie be made on the last hole of the crupper instead of the
aparejo.
285. To assemble the saddle: Place the sobrejalma on the
aparejo so that its staple holes fit over the staples on the latter ;
seat the frame and pass the straps on the sobrejalma through
the staples; pass the cincha through the frame over the side
bars, finger loop up and cincha to the left; double the cincha
over the frame, strap inside; double the crupper forward so
that the dock piece rests on the cincha.
THE PACKER. 85
Remarks on the Pack Saddle.
286. When the set-up aparejo is to be filled, no soaking is
necessary; instead, make the belly pieces pliable by rubbing
with a wet sponge.
Mules weighing 850 to 900 pounds require a 58-inch aparejo;
1,000 pounds, 60-inch; 1,100 pounds, 62-inch; for heavier mules
requisition should be made for larger sizes.
When the mule is loaded the cincha, in travel, should free the
elbow by about an inch; more than this will prevent a proper
grip on the belly.
If the boots ride high on the body of the mule, or if they
reach under the belly, even though they ride horizontally and
parallel to the center line of the mule, the aparejo will be
likely to turn easily. This fault encourages injuriously tight
cinching.
If one or both boots flare out or turn in toward the mule,
cinch sores and sore tails result, or belly and body bunches are
caused.
The width of the collar arch clearance should be at least 5
inches. If it is too narrow or too wide, or if the saddle bars
slope downward toward the front, there will be sores on the
withers; it they slope to the rear there will be injuries over
the loins, called kidney sores.
If the lacing of the crupper is drawn too tight at the bottom
the lower edge of the crupper will rub the buttocks and cause
abrasions.
The object to be attained is the uniform distribution of the
weight of the load over that portion of the mule's body ana-
tomically suited to carrying a burden so that the saddle will
ride with little motion and without friction of the bearing sur-
face of the body. The contact of the bearing surface of the
saddle must be close at all points. As the mule's body swells
from front to rear, the more or less cylindrical shape of the
aparejo after the body course is laid must be modified by facing
up so as to provide a concave surface to fit over a convex sur-
face. But as the barrel of the properly conformed mule is
nearly cylindrical through the rear half or more of the contact
surface, no facing is necessary, as a rule, in the rear part of the
aparejo, although conformation may require it exceptionally.
86 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
Care of the Harness.
287. The leather parts of the harness should be exposed to
the sun as little as possible and should be cleaned whenever
dirt, grit, or dust has collected on them or when they have be-
come saturated with the sweat of the animal. The parts should
be separated and each sponged with a lather of castile soap and
warm water. They should then be rubbed nearly dry and a
lather of Crown soap and warm water should be applied. Ex-
cess of moisture in this later should be permitted to evaporate
in a shaded place. This treatment frequently applied is suffi-
cient, but if the leather has become harsh and dry, its dressed
side should be lightly coated with neatsfoot oil after the castile
lather and allowed to dry before the Crown soap lather is ap-
plied, the latter removing surplus oil. Polishing of the leather
parts should not be permitted, as it leads to the surreptitious
use of commercial materials that are often detrimental to the
life of the leather.
Leather is injured by exposure to the sun, by water, and by
the use of too much Crown soap or of common commercial soaps.
In proper condition it is clean, soft, smooth, pliable, and free
from stains.
Immediately after the harness is removed from the animal,
canvas parts should be scraped free from all adhering sub-
stances with a dull but smooth-edged knife. Especially constant
attention must be given to the cleanliness and pliability of the
canvas side of the corona and crupper and to the dock piece.
Woolen parts and hair cine-lias should be rubbed between the
hands or hung up and beaten with switches or wands to remove
dust, mud, and hairs and to make them soft and pliable. They
should be exposed frequently to the sun, completely unfolded,
and blankets should be occasionally washed in tepid water.
Metal parts must be kept free from rust, dirt, sweat, and
hair. Those issued with coats of paint or lacquer are to be
maintained in that condition. Bright parts should be polished.
The tongues, rollers, and keepers of buckles must work freely,
to which end the straps must be unbuckled in cleaning.
To Gather the Mule.
288. The packer raises his right hand, to attract the atten-
tion of the mule, collect him and prepare him to move.
THE SECTION MOUNTED. 87
Management of the Led Mule.
289. The led pack mule is managed by the leading reins or
halter. By quiet and gentle treatment he must be taught to
work and to effect changes of gait and direction evenly. He
should not be turned short, but on the arc of a circle of 1 yard
radius. He should be led with a loose rein, urged on, if he lags,
by the driver in rear. He should not be threatened by his
packer. The mule must always be gathered before moving
from a halt, before halting, and before changing gait or direc-
tion.
To Dismiss the Packer.
290. The instructor may conduct the packers in column into
the stable and halt the column so that each driver is opposite
his stall ; or he may first form the drivers in line in the vicinity
of the stable or park, and command: 1. By the right (left), 2.
FILE OFF. In the latter case the packers file off in succession,
as explained in The Soldier Mounted, and halt when opposite
their stalls or the place designated for unharnessing.
291. The instructor commands: UNHARNESS.
The harness is removed, cleaned, and properly put in place;
the mules rubbed down and cared for. Having satisfied him-
self by inspection that these duties have been properly per-
formed and that all the precautions required on return from
exercise have been observed, the instructor causes the harness
to be covered, orders the men to fall in, marches them to the
company parade ground, and dismisses them.
292. The mules assigned to the transportation of a wireless
pack set are designated respectively (1) generator mule, (2)
chest mule, (3) mast mule, (4) kit mule.
CHAPTER IV. THE SECTION MOUNTED.
The Wire Section.
293. The wire section is normally composed of 13 mounted
men formed in column of fours and the wire cart and its driver.
294. The chief of section is on the right of the leading four
and the cart is 2 yards in rear of the mounted men. When the
88 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
section is acting alone the chief of section may go where his
services are most needed.
295. The fours are formed from right to left, as follows:
No. 1, the lineman ; No. 2, the messenger ; No. 3, the horse
holder; No. 4, the operator.
296. The section is maneuvered as prescribed for the com-
pany mounted and by similar commands.
To Open Station and Move Off.
297. To open station and move to the front from a halt:
OPEN STATION. At this command the linemen of the first and
second fours, the messenger of the first four, and the chief of
section turn out of the column, to the right, the horse holder
and operator of the first four turn out of the column to the left,
the two linemen, remaining mounted, prepare to follow the reel
cart and lay out the wire, the lineman of the second four in
front. The remaining men of the first four all move to the rear
of the cart and dismount, except the horse holder, to whom the
horses are turned over. The messenger unties the wire from the
cart and pulls off enough slack and holds it or makes it fast to
some convenient anchor. The operator prepares his buzzer,
connectors, and ground rod, and opens the station in the loca-
tion indicated.
When the end of the wire has been removed from the cart,
the messenger commands : DRIVE ON, at which the cart, preceded
by the men of the second and third fours, except the lineman of
the second four, moves out over the indicated route, at first
slowly, in order not to break the wire. The two linemen follow
the cart attending the wire until the second station is opened,
when the lineman of the first four returns back over the line to
his station. His place is taken on the line work by the lineman
of the second four, who is replaced by the lineman of the third
four.
298. The manipulation of the machinery of the wire cart for
handling the wire will be a part of the duty of the cart driver,
unless an operator be placed on the cart, in which case the lat-
ter may handle the clutch, etc. The reel must always be stopped
before a march to the rear is taken up.
299. The chief of section rides near the cart, in order to
supervise the laying of the line.
THE SECTION MOUNTED. 89
300. If the section is in march, it is halted before giving the
command for opening station.
301. As each station is established the operator will call up
the initial station.
To Recover the Wire.
302. 1. Close station, 2. REEL UP. At the first command the
lineman of the station immediately starts back over the line,
laying out the wire in a convenient place for recovery. The
operator calls up " all stations " on his line, sends G. B., and
signs his station call, cuts out his buzzer, and mounts. The
horse holder now mounts and, if this is the third station, at-
tends the loop, using the spare pike which is lashed to the pole
of the wire cart ; otherwise one of the linemen present attends
the loop. The messenger takes the hand guard from the cart
and feeds the wire upon the reel.
At the second command the wire cart moves off back over the
line, reeling up the wire. As the loop approaches the cart the
man attending it will call out clutch, when the driver will throw
out the clutch in order to allow the loop to drop back.
303. Intermediate stations are closed by the command close
station, and when the cart approaches the members of these
stations take charge of the work of recovering the line back to
the next station.
304. Members of the section not engaged in laying out or
recovering the line ride in front of the cart. This rule is gen-
eral.
305. As the cart approaches the end of the line an increased
gait will be taken to gain sufficient momentum to reel up the
slack. When all the wire is on the reel the section is re-formed
in its proper place.
The Pack Wireless Section.
306. The pack wireless section is normally composed of 10
mounted men and 4 pack mules.
307. The men, except the chief of section, are numbered from
1 to 9. The mules are designated, respectively, as the " gener-
ator mule," the " chest mule," the " mast mule," and the " kit
mule." Each mule is led by one of the men, and the section
90 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
is formed in column of twos, the led mules being considered
as one of the set of twos.
308. The chief of section is on the right of the leading two,
composed of Nos. 1 and 2, No. 1 on the right. These are fol-
lowed by Nos. 3 and 4, and then by Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8, leading,
respectively, the mules carrying the generator, the chests, the
masts, and the kit in order from front to rear, the mules on the
right. No. 9 rides in the rear, and it is his duty to observe
the packs and to keep up any lagging mule.
309. It is the duty of all men, so far as they may be able, in
addition to leading their own mules, to urge forward the mule
immediately in front.
310. When the section is acting alone, the chief of section
may go where his services are most needed.
311. The section is maneuvered as prescribed for the com-
pany mounted, and by similar commands.
3 12. When the section is acting alone, it may when necessary
march in column of files, in which case each man leading a
mule will ride in front of his mule.
To Open Station.
313. 1. Open station, 2. DISMOUNT. At the command open
station, Nos. 3, 4, and 9 ride left front into line on No. 2; No. 5
stands fast, and Nos. G and 7 lead their mules left front into
line on No. 5 ; No. 8 leads his mule by the left front, in front of
and opposite the center of the line of mounted men. At the
command dismount, the section is dismounted and the chief of
section and Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 9 turn their horses over to No. 8,
and proceed to unpack the mules (except the kit mule). Nos.
5, 6, and 7, holding their mules in position, move their horses
out of the way. Nos. 1 and 2 unpack the generator, the chief
of section and No. 9 the chests, and Nos. 3 and 4 the antenna
bags and mast, which are placed on the ground in rear of their
mules; Nos. 5, 6, and 7 then lead off their horses and mules
and turn them over to No. 8. As soon as the mules are un-
packed No. 2 removes the cover from the generator, Nos. 3 and 4
take the contents from the bags, No. 4 takes out the counter-
poise and places the pins or pegs for anchoring the antenna
on the ground in front of the chest, No. 3 fixes the insulator
THE SECTION MOUNTED. 91
with antenna attached into the top joint of the mast, which
No. 1 holds on the ground in front of the chest; Nos. 1 and 3
then unloop and straighten out the antenna cords, placing them
on the ground. No. 9 will now step on the chest and hold the
joint of the mast in position, while Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 take up
the antenna reels and pins and run out the antenna in the
directions indicated by the chief of section. As soon as the
antenna and the rope attached have been unreeled, the antenna
men face in the direction of the mast and watch the chief
of section for signals. When the antenna is paid out, No. 9
will raise the mast hand over hand, the other sections being
placed underneath by No. 7. . While the mast is being raised
Nos. 5 and 6 set up the generator or batteries and untie and
pay out the counterpoise, securing its center to the generator
or anything to hold it in place. Nos. 7 and 9 connect up the
instrument chests and the generator or batteries.
When the mast is up, the chief of section may command tie in,
when the antenna men will secure the rope attached to the
antenna to the pins which they will drive into the ground.
As soon as the antenna is secured the antenna men will
assist in laying out the counterpoise.
314. The chief of section will then detail an operator, one or
two messengers as needed, men to turn the generator, and
guards to protect the antenna from being run into and injured.
The latter will also see that the antenna pins and cord do not
become insecure.
To Close Station.
315. The station is closed, taken down, and packed in a simi-
lar manner at the command close station, each man handling and
packing the same equipment as in unpacking and opening sta-
tion. When the mules are packed and the men are all mounted,
the chief of section commands fall in, when the normal forma-
tion in column is resumed.
316. Each man, having a permanent assignment of duty, soon
learns to do his part quickly, and after the men have become
proficient in handling the equipment the entire operation of
unpacking and opening station or packing and closing station
may be effected by the command open (or close) station.
92 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
The Wagon Wireless Section.
317. The wagon wireless section is normally composed of 18
mounted men, the wagoner and engineer, who ride on the wagon,
and one wagon wireless set, drawn by 4 mules.
3 18. The mounted men are formed in column of fours, except
one man who rides in rear of the wagon. At drills and cere-
monies he will ride on the left of the leading team.
319. The chief of section is to the right of the leading four
and the wagon is 2 yards in rear of the mounted men. When
the section is acting alone the chief of section may go where
his services are most needed.
320. In forming fours a noncommissioned officer will be No.
1 of the leading four, and the horse holders will be No. 4 of
the leading four and the third four.
321. The wagon wireless set consists, briefly, of a pintle-type
wagon, drawn by 4 mules. The telegraph instruments are
attached to the front element, and the engine and dynamo are
attached to the rear element, and electrically connected with the
instruments by cable. On the rear vehicle are also carried the
mast, consisting of 10 sections 8 feet in length; the antenna,
which has nine cords, one of which is the connecting cord ; two
sets of guy ropes, four to each set; and the rubber insulated
wire counterpoise, consisting of eight branches.
322. The section is maneuvered as prescribed for the com-
pany mounted, and by similar commands.
323. The mounted men, except the chief of section, are num-
bered from 1 to 17 for the purpose of prescribing their duties
in opening and closing station : Thus, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 are
antenna men, Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8 are guy men, Nos. 9 and 10
(usually noncommissioned officers) direct the antenna men and
guy men during the erection of the mast, Nos. 11, 12, and 13
assemble and raise the mast, Nos. 14 and 15 lay out the
counterpoise and assist the engineer, and Nos. 16 and 17 are
horse holders.
To Open Station.
324. The section will always be halted before the command
open station is given.
325. At this command the wagoner unhitches his team. The
chief of section moves the mounted men a sufficient distance to
THE SECTION MOUNTED. 93
be out of the way of the antenna and guy ropes when the mast
is raised and dismounts them. The horses are turned over to
the horse holders (Nos. 16 and 17), and the remaining men pro-
ceed to unpack the wagon, each man assisting in unpacking
and making ready that part jof the equipment which it is his
duty to handle in establishing the station i. e., Nos. 1, 2, 3, and
4 unpack the antenna and pins or stakes and pay out the
antenna under direction of the chief of section; Nos. 5, 6, 7,
and 8 do the same with the two sets of guy ropes and pins;
Nos. 11 and 12 take position on top of the front element of the
wagon, prepared to raise the mast; Nos. 9 and 10, assisted by
No. 13, unpack the sections of the mast and place them on the
ground, convenient to the point at which the mast is to be
raised ; Nos. 14 and 15 unpack the counterpoise and place it in
position.
As soon as the top joint of the mast is unloaded, No. 13
places the top insulator (with antenna attached) in the top of
the joint and raises it vertically to Nos. 11 and 12. He then
places the remaining joints in place, and assists Nos. 11 and 12,
who raise the mast hand over hand. The five smaller joints
form the upper part of the mast. No. 13 also places the guy
rings in place at the top of the fourth and seventh sections. As
the mast is being raised the antenna and guy men, standing
facing it, will keep it vertical by skillful handling of the an-
tenna and guys, under direction of Nos. 9 and 10. No. 1 should
be in rear of the wagon, with Nos. 2, 3, and 4, in sequence to
his left, in a circle around the mast. This will bring No. 3
opposite No. 1, and No. 4 opposite No. 2. Each man holds two
adjacent antenna cords, and carries a pin. The guy men, each
with an upper and a lower guy rope and a pin, take position, in
a corresponding manner, in a smaller circle around the mast,
No. 5 being between No. 1 and the mast. This will bring No. 7
opposite No. 5, and No. 8 opposite No. 6. No. 9 will direct Nos.
1, 3, 5, and 7, and No. 10 will direct Nos. 2, 4, 6, and 8. When
it is desired that an antenna or guy be pulled out the command
out will be used. When it should be slacked off the command in
will be used. Thus, if No. 3 is holding his antenna too slack,
No. 9 commands: No. 3, OUT. The guy ropes which each man
holds are referred to, respectively, as upper and lower. When the
mast is up the chief of section commands tie in. At this com-
mand the guy men secure the guys to pins driven into the
94 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
ground with the assistance of the counterpoise men with ham-
mers. Antenna men secure the proper antenna cord to a pin
driven into the ground and then secure the remaining antenna
cords in a similar manner midway between those first placed.
In doing this all move to the right from the antenna cord first
secured. If hammers are necessary in driving the pins, they
will hold the antenna cords until assisted by the counterpoise
men or guy men.
As soon as the command tie in is given, No. 9 makes the proper
connection for the antenna and counterpoise, while No. 10 super-
vises the tying in and sees that cords and ropes are kept taut.
326. As soon as the wagoner starts to unhitch his team, the
engineer will see that there is sufficient gasoline in the tank,
oil in the cups, water in the proper receptacles (if the engine
is water cooled), and connect the dynamo to the instrument
by means of the cable and generally make ready to start the
engine and dynamo.
327. When the mast is up, the chief of section details the
operators (usually either No. 9 or No. 10 for the first relief),
messengers, and guards for the antenna and guys, and makes
such disposition of the remaining men as the situation demands.
If the station is to be maintained open any length of time, he
also directs that the picket line be established or the horses
otherwise disposed of.
The wagoner takes care of his team.
To Close Station.
328. At the command close station, the operator removes the
antenna and counterpoise connections, the guy men take up
the pins and hold the guys, each antenna man first takes up the
pin and frees the end of the antenna cord which he last secured
and turns it loose, then proceeds to his other antenna cord,
pulls up the pin, and holds the cord w r hile the mast is being
lowered. The mast is lowered by the same men in the same
positions as when being raised. Nos. 9 and 10 direct the an-
tenna and guy men. The counterpoise men recover the counter-
poise; the engineer shuts off all valves, the wagoner brings his
team close to wagon, and, when the mast is down, hitches it to
the wagon. All men assist in packing the equipment which they
THE COMPANY MOUNTED. 95
unpacked. When all the apparatus has been securely packed
the chief of section commands stand to horse, when all men
proceed to their horses and obey this command. The men are
then mounted and the section formed by the appropriate com-
mands.
329. In opening and closing station, all men who have fin-
ished the duty herein assigned to them may be directed by the
chief of section to perform such other duties as may be
necessary,
CHAPTER V. THE COMPANY MOUNTED.
330. The special object of this instruction is the training of
the personnel of the company with a view to mobility, either as
separate units of the company or the company as a whole. The
company should be so trained that the drill-ground maneuvers
may be executed with a certain degree of accuracy, and so that
in the field a complete unit to perform the desired duty can be
detached by command without halting the column or inter-
rupting in any way the march.
331. Much of the instruction can be advantageously done in
platoon and section. The captain completes the training of the
company as a whole.
The captain should require the section mounted and the platoon
mounted, properly manned, horsed, and equipped, to be instructed
by their chiefs in accordance with the principles prescribed for
The Company Mounted. In fact, much of the instruction in
signaling, either mounted or dismounted, can be conducted ad-
vantageously in this manner.
General Provisions.
332. The saber will not be used except at ceremonies. When
the captain draws saber the other officers will also draw saber.
When mounted, the saber is habitually attached to the left side
of the saddle. On dismounting, for duties connected with sig-
naling, it is not removed from the saddle.
333. The rests are executed and attention resumed according
to the principles already explained.
96 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
Organization of the Company.
334. The field company is normally organized into six sec-
tions, consisting of four wire sections and two pack wireless
sections, but the drill is suitable for any number of sections.
335. A field wireless company is normally organized into six
sections, consisting of four pack wireless sections and two
wagon wireless sections.
336. For drill, the company may be formed into platoons of
two sections each. The two wireless sections of the field com-
pany will form one platoon, which will normally constitute the
ieft platoon of the company in order in line or the rear platoon
in order in section column. The two wagon sections of the field
wireless company will form one platoon, which will constitute
the left platoon in line or the rear platoon in column. In the
field or on the march the remainder of the combat train will
form a fourth platoon under command of the supply sergeant.
Duties of Individuals.
337. The captain commands the company, and is responsible
for its training and efficiency.
The lieutenants command platoons, and will be assigned to
such duties as the captain may deem necessary.
The master signal electricians are responsible to the captain
for the condition of the technical equipment of the company.
The first sergeant is the assistant of the captain, and is re-
sponsible to him for the general good order, police, and dis-
cipline of the company. In action he remains with the captain
and under his immediate orders.
The supply sergeant is responsible to the captain for the care
and preservation of the materiel not issued to the sections.
The stable sergeant is responsible to the captain for the gen-
eral care of the public animals assigned to the company, and the
good order and police of the stables and picket lines, etc.
The mechanics, under the orders of the supply sergeant, are
responsible for the repair of the materiel pertaining to the com-
pany.
Chiefs of sections command the sections and will be held
responsible to the captain for the condition of their equipment
and the training and efficiency of their sections.
THE COMPANY MOUNTED. 97
The drivers and packers are directly responsible to their
chiefs of sections for their animals, harness, and equipment.
They will report at once to their chief of section any injury to
animals or materiel.
The operators are responsible for the serviceable condition of
their instruments and will report at once to their chiefs of
sections any need of repairs.
The linemen are responsible for maintaining the section lines
intact. They will carry the necessary equipment, and will
report to the chief of section at once if their materiel is not,
in their possession.
Messengers are responsible for the delivery of all messages,
no matter what the conditions.
Formation of the Company and Posts of Individuals.
338. The habitual formations are: The order in section col-
umn, the order in line, and the order in platoon column.
339. The order in section column is that in which the sections
of the company follow each other in the order, or the reverse
order, of their numbers, from front to rear. The distance be-
tween the mounted men and carts in a section and between
sections is 2 yards.
If the sections of each platoon are abreast, the formation is
called the order in platoon column.
340. The order in line. The sections of the company are
formed abreast of each other in the order, or the reverse order,
of their numbers from right to left. The interval between the
sections is that 'which would result from the sections moving
from the order in section column by the flank.
341. In platoon column the distance between two sections is
that which would result from wheeling the platoons from the
order in line to the order in platoon column, and the interval
between the sections is the same as in the order in line.
Posts of Individuals.
342. The captain in order in line is 8 yards in front of the
company, opposite the center. In order in section column he is
opposite the center of the column and 16 yards from the flank.
82940 11 7
98 . MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
In order in platoon column the captain, except at ceremonies,
is posted opposite the leading section of the center platoon and
16 yards from its flank. In column the captain is on the left
when the first section leads and on the right when the column
is reversed.
The chiefs of platoons. In order in line they are posted in
line with the leading fours of their platoons and midway be-
tween their two sections. In order in section column they are
4 yards from the center of their respective platoons and on
the same side as the captain. In order in platoon column they
are posted as in order in line.
The master signal electricians are posted in all formations oppo-
site the centers of the first and third platoons, their positions
corresponding to that of the first sergeant.
The first sergeant. The first sergeant is posted in order in
line 4 yards in rear of the center platoon. In order in section
column and in platoon column he is on the flank opposite the
captain and 4 yards from the center of the center platoon.
The chiefs of sections are posted to the right of the front rank
of their sections.
The guidon in line and in platoon column is abreast of the
front rank of the company and 2 yards from the flank toward
which the guide has been announced. In section column he is
abreast of and 2 yards from the leading chief of section.
The supply and stable sergeants, when present with the com-
pany mounted, are posted between the master signal electricians
and conform to the movements prescribed for them.
The trumpeters follow 2 yards in rear of the captain.
343. The wire carts are ordinarily arranged in park in
order in line; the sections arranged from right to left in the
order of their numbers. The aparejos are arranged on a line j
with the front of the poles of the carts. The instrument wagons
and other transportation may be arranged in a similar manner
16 yards in rear, or the whole may be arranged in line, as cir-
cumstances permit. The intervals between carts and wagons
are normally the same as when the company is in the order in
line. The picket line is usually mounted on the carts and
wagons, and in the pack wireless sections on the kit mules for
bivouac or temporary camp. The animals of the sections are
always tied on the line between the carts or wagons in the order
of their sections.
THE COMPANY MOUNTED. 99
To Form the Company Mounted.
344. The company is formed dismounted and marched to the
stables by the first sergeant, where he commands by section,
FALL OUT. The drivers then harness their teams and the men
saddle their horses, under the direction of the chief of section.
The latter then causes the wire cart of his section to be hitched
up, verifies and makes an inspection of his section, causes it to
mount, and reports the result to his chief of platoon. The chiefs
of platoons then make an inspection of their platoons, after
which the company is formed under the direction of the senior
chief of platoon and brought to rest. On the arrival of the
company commander the company is brought to attention by the
senior chief of platoon. The captain then commands report.
The chiefs of platoons then report in the order of rank the
result of the verifications and inspections.
345. The master signal electricians, the supply and stable
sergeants, if present, and the guidon, take their posts when the
company is formed. The trumpeters report to the captain at
such time and place as he may direct. The chiefs of platoons
join their platoons at the stable or picket line, and superintend
the formation of their platoons.
To Dismiss the Company.
346. The captain commands: Dismiss the company.
The chiefs of platoons and the master signal electricians fall
out. The company is returned to the stables or picket line by
the first sergeant, who then commands: By sect ion, FALL OUT.
The chiefs of sections then supervise the placing of the trans-
portation under shelter or in park ; the horses in the stable or on
the picket line; and see that horse equipment and harness has
been properly put away, and that all equipment has been prop-
erly disposed.
347. The section column is the habitual column of route. The
mounted men of the wire sections may, when conditions require
it, be formed in column of twos instead of column of fours. Be-
ing in march, route order or at ease are executed according to
the principles already prescribed. Sabers are returned if
drawn. To resume attention the captain commands: Company,
ATTENTION.
100 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
The captain marches 8 yards in front of the leading element,
followed at 2 yards distance by the trumpeters and guidon, the
latter on the right; the chiefs of platoons usually march near
the rear of their platoons, but they and the chiefs of sections
may go wherever their presence is necessary; the file closers
close in on the column.
348. To avoid dust, the captain may direct the officers and
file closers to march on the windward side.
Constant attention should be given by each officer and chief
of section in order to insure the proper handling of teams and
mounts and the adjustment of equipment and harness. They
should see that no horse is overheated and that each team
horse does his share of work, that distance is preserved, and
that no men or carriages move at a faster gait than that
ordered.
No practice is more fatiguing to men and injurious to horses
than the alternate trotting and walking so often seen at the
rear of a column.
At halts on slopes, vehicles should be turned at right angles
to the road, so that the horses may be eased.
Commands and Signals.
349. Commands are given by the captain, either verbally, by
trumpet signals, or by signals made by the arm. When verbal
commands are given by the captain they should be supple-
mented by the appropriate trumpet or arm signals.
350. Chiefs of platoons repeat the commands of the captain,
or give appropriate commands to their platoons in time to in-
sure the proper execution of the movement. The chiefs of
platoons ordinarily give their commands verbally, supple-
mented, if necessary, by the appropriate arm signal, and see to
it that the commands 'of the captain are understood and cor-
rectly executed by their platoons. If the chief of a platoon
does not hear a command, he governs himself by what he sees
executed by the adjoining platoon.
351. Chiefs of sections repeat the commands of the chiefs of
platoons or give appropriate commands to their sections in
time to insure the proper execution of the movement. Chiefs
of sections ordinarily give their commands by signals with the
THE COMPANY MOUNTED. 101
arm, supplemented, if necessary, by verbal commands, and see
to it that the command is understood and correctly executed.
Arm Signals.
352. Signals are ordinarily made with the right arm, but
may be made with the left arm when convenient. If the saber
is in the hand, the signals are made in a manner similar to
that prescribed for the arm.
353. Ordinarily, before making a signal for the execution of
a movement, the captain places himself where he can be seen by
the company, generally with his horse facing in the same direc-
tion as the horses of the company, and commands or signals
attention, or causes it to be sounded on the bugle. The captain
may signal attention by a long blast on a whistle. The signals
prescribed for the different movements are the preparatory sig-
nals; for the signal of execution the arm is extended vertically
and then lowered quickly to the side. If the movement involves
a change in the direction of march, the captain moves his horse
in the new direction on making the preparatory signal.
Preparatory Signals.
354. Attention. Extend the arm vertically and move it slowly
back and forth from right to left.
Forward. Extend the arm vertically and lower it to the front
until horizontal.
By the right (left) flank. Extend the arm vertically and lower
it to the right (left) until horizontal.
Right (left) about. Extend the arm vertically and describe
slowly a large horizontal circle with the hand ; then extend the
arm to the left (right) and describe a horizontal arc to front
and right (left).
Right (left) oblique. Extend the arm obliquely upward to the
right (left) and front, and then lower the arm, describing a
vertical circle on the right (left) side of the horse.
To increase the gait. Carry the hand to the shoulder, forearm
vertical; extend the arm vertically from this position and re-
peat several times.
To decrease the gait. Hold the arm horizontally above and
in front of the forehead.
102 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
To indicate an increased or decreased gait for a maneuver,
the appropriate signal is made just after the preparatory signal
for the maneuver.
To halt. Extend the arm vertically and hold it there until the
signal is obeyed.
To change direction to the right (left). Extend the arm ver-
tically; lower it to the left (right) until horizontal and describe
a horizontal arc to the front and right (left).
Right (left) by section. Point at the right (left) section and
signal forward.
Right (left) front into line. Extend the arm vertically and
describe several large vertical circles on the right (left) side
of the horse.
Maneuvers of the Company.
355. The guide of a section is the section commander. Chiefs
of sections supervise the gait and direction of march of their
sections. In section column, the guide of the leading section is
the guide of the company.
356. The guide of the company in line is the guide of the
right or left section.
357. During an oblique march the guide of the company is,
without indication, the guide of the leading section on the side
to which the oblique is made.
358. The guidon always posts himself as prescribed in para-
graph 342. Should the guide be changed, he hastens to his new
post, except that he does not change post during an oblique
movement. With this exception, the guide is always toward
the guidon.
Gaits.
359. In changes of formation, the section which establishes
the new direction and rate of march will be termed the direct-
ing section.
360. The following rules govern the gaits during changes of
formation :
361. Rule No. 1: When a change of formation requires cer-
tain sections to gain ground so as to reach specified positions
abreast of the directing section, the captain may or may not
announce an increased gait for the movement. If he announces
THE COMPANY MOUNTED. 103
an increased gait, the directing section maintains its gait; the
other sections move at the gait announced until they have
reached their new position, when they take the gait of the di-
recting section.
If the captain does not announce an increased gait, the direct-
ing section reduces its gait one degree ; the others maintain their
gait until they reach their new positions, when they take the
gait of the directing section. If the movement is executed from
a halt or while marching at a walk, and an increase of gait is
not ordered, the directing section advances toward the front of
the new formation and halts at the command of the captain.
Rule No. 2: When a change of formation requires the directing
section to gain ground in order to precede the other sections,
the captain may or may not announce an increased gait for the
movement. If he announces an increased gait, the directing
section takes the increased gait at once, the other sections take
it up so as to follow the movement in their proper order.
If the captain does not announce an increased gait, the direct-
ing section maintains its gait, the others reduce the gait one
degree, and take the gait of the directing section in time to
follow the movement in their proper order. If the movement is
executed from a halt or while marching at a walk and an in-
crease of gait is not ordered, the directing section moves at a
walk, the others remain halted or halt and take up the gait of
the directing section as before explained.
Reducing gait one degree is to be understood as passing from
the gallop to the trot, from the trot to the walk, or from the
walk to the halt. Increasing the gait one degree is the reverse
of this.
To Align the Company.
362. The company being at a halt.
If the section on the side toward which the alignment is to
be made is not in proper position, the captain establishes it
in the position desired, and commands : 1. Right (left), 2. DRESS,
3. FRONT. At the command dress the other sections move for-
ward or backward, the chiefs of sections aligning themselves;
the men and drivers turn their heads to the right and dress on
their corresponding elements in the section on their right. The
captain places himself on the right of the leading element of
the right section, facins to the left. He quickly establishes the
104 MOUNTED INSTKTJCTION.
leading element of the next section to arrive on the line, and
superintends the alignment of the other sections as they arrive
on the line. The captain then commands front, and takes his
post.
To March to the Front.
363. 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.
Executed simultaneously by all the sections moving straight
to the front, taking care to maintain their proper relative posi-
tions in the formation.
To Halt.
364. 1. Company, 2. HALT.
Executed by all sections stopping simultaneously, but not
suddenly.
To March by the Flank.
365. 1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH.
Executed simultaneously by all the sections executing column
right, as prescribed in paragraph 224, the carts following in rear
of the mounted men.
366. If the company is in line, with closed intervals, the
following modifications apply: The movement is successive;
the section on the indicated flank begins the movement by exe-
cuting column right ; the others take it up in turn so as to fol-
low, at the proper distance, in the track of the sections which
preceded them. If executed while marching, all the sections,
except the one on the indicated flank, halt and then resume the
march so as to follow at the proper distance in the column.
To March to the Rear.
367. 1. Right (left) about; 2. MARCH.
Executed simultaneously by all sections moving to the right
and rear over half a circle with a radius of 4 yards, taking care
to quickly track the section preceding them in the new forma-
tion, if the company was in column at the command, or to
promptly take up the announced guide if it was in line.
368. If the company is in line with closed intervals, the fol-
lowing modifications apply; The captain first commands: 1.
THE COMPANY MOUNTED. 105
Right sections forward, 2. MARCH. The right section of each
platoon moves forward so as to clear the left section. If the
captain orders an increased gait for the maneuver the right
sections take the gait indicated; if an increased gait is not or-
dered the left sections reduce the gait one degree, or, if halted,
they remain halted. As soon as the right sections are clear of
the left sections the captain gives the command for the about,
which is executed by all the sections at the gait of the right
sections. On the completion of the about the sections in real-
increase the gait so as to move up to their positions in line.
Being in Line or Column, to March Obliquely.
369. 1. Sections, 2. Column half right (left), 3. MARCH.
All the sections execute column half right simultaneously, as
previously described. The sections move on parallel lines. The
guide of each section takes care to align himself on the guide
of the section toward which the movement is made* To resume
the original direction, the command will be: 1. Sections, 2.
Column half left (right), 3. MARCH.
To Change Direction.
370. Being in section column: 1. Column right (left), 2.
MARCH.
The leading section executes column right, as explained in
paragraph 224 ; the sections in rear follow the leading section
and turn on the same ground.
Column half right (half left) is similarly executed, except that
the turn is only one-eighth of a circle.
371. Being in line: 1. Company right (left) turn, 2. MARCH,
3. Guide right (left), or 3. Company, 4. HALT. The pivot section
executes column right. The other sections increase the gait
one degree, preserving their intervals from the pivot section
and take the gait of the latter on arriving abreast of it.
Company right half (left half) turn is similarly executed, ex-
cept that the pivot section executes column half right.
If the company is marching at a gallop, the pivot section
will take the canter at the command march; the other sections
will take the canter when abreast of the directing section.
When all of the sections are in line, the captain commands:
1. Gallop, 2. MARCH, 3. GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT).
106 MOUNTED INSTBUCTION.
To Close or Extend Intervals in Line.
372. 1. On (such) section , 2. Close (extend) intervals, 3.
MARCH.
The normal closed interval is 8 yards. If the captain wishes
any other interval than the normal closed or normal interval to
be taken, he announces the interval before giving the second
command; for example: 1. On first sect/on, 2. To 20 yards,
3. Extend intervals, 4. MARCH.
The indicated section moves straight to the front, the other
sections incline toward or away from the indicated section and
move to the front when at the proper interval. Rule No. 1
governs the gait.
To Form Section Column to the Front from Line.
373. 1. Right (left) by section, 2. MARCH.
The right section moves straight to the front. The other
sections, in turn, move by the right flank and follow in the
column at 2 yards distance. Rule 2, paragraph 361, governs
the gait.
To Form Line from Section Column.
374. To the front: 1. Right (left) front into line, 2. MARCH.
The leading section moves straight to the front. Each sec-
tion in rear executes column half right until opposite its place
in line, when it executes column half left, moves to the front,
and takes its place on the line. Rule No. 1, paragraph 361,
governs the gait.
375. On the right (left): 1. On right (left) into line, 2.
MARCH.
The leading section executes column right and then moves
straight to the front in the new direction ; the other sections
move forward beyond the preceding sections, and successively
execute column right when by so doing they will be opposite
their positions in line with proper intervals, and then move
forward until abreast of the leading section. When an in-
creased gait is ordered, all of the sections will take it, but the
leading section will resume the original gait when it has turned
out of column. If moving at a trot or gallop and no increased
THE COMPANY MOUNTED. 107
gait is ordered, the leading section, after completing the turn,
will decrease its gait one degree. As here modified, Rule No. 1,
paragraph 361, for gaits applies.
376. To form line at closed intervals the captain commands:
At closed intervals, before giving the prescribed commands for
forming line; the company is then formed with 8 yards inter-
vals instead of the normal intervals.
377. To form the mounted men of the section in line. This
will always be done to the left.
1. Sections, 2. Left front into line, 3. MARCH, 4. Sections HALT,
or, 4. GUIDE RIGHT.
In the wire and wagon wireless sections this will be executed
as prescribed in paragraph 226, The Soldier Mounted, for
forming left front into line from column of fours.
The cart closes up to 4 yards in rear of the right four.
In the pack wireless sections, this will be executed by forming
two lines, 4 yards apart, the first being composed of the men not
leading mules, the second being composed of the pack mules
and their leaders. Each line is formed in a manner similar to
that described in paragraph 226, The Soldier Mounted.
To Re-form the Sections in the Normal Formation.
378. 1. Sections, 2. Right by fours, 3. MARCH, 4. GUIDE RIGHT
(LEFT).
The right four of each section moves straight to the front;
the other fours successively oblique to the right front so as to
follow the leading four at the proper distance. The cart follows
the rear four at 2 yards distance.
Rule 2, paragraph 361, governs the gaits.
To Form the Mounted Men in Column of Twos or Files.
379. 1. By twos (or files), 2. MARCH.
Executed by each section as indicated in The Soldier Mounted.
If in section column, this movement will be a successive one,
throughout the column.
To Re-form the Mounted Men in Column of Fours.
380. 1. Form fours, 2. MARCH.
Executed by each section in a manner similar to that pre-
scribed in The Soldier Mounted.
108 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
To Form Platoon Column From Section Column.
881. 1. Platoons, 2. Right (left) front into line, 3. MARCH.
The leading section of each platoon moves straight to the
front. The rear section executes column half right and then
column half left, when by so doing it will have its normal inter-
val from the leading section.
Rule No. 1, paragraph 361, governs the gaits.
To Form Section Column From Platoon Column.
382. 1. Left (right) by section, 2. MARCH.
The left sections of the platoons move straight to the front.
The right sections execute column half left and then column
half right, and follow in the rear of the leading sections.
Rule No. 2 governs the gaits.
Being in Line, to Form Platoon Column, to the Right (or Left).
383. 1. Platoons, 2. Right (left) turn, 3. MARCH, 4. GUIDE
(RIGHT or LEFT), or, 4. Company, 5. HALT.
The right section of each platoon executes column right. The
other sections increase the gait one degree, preserving their
interval from the right section, and take the gait of the latter
on arriving abreast of it.
Being in Platoon Column, to Form Line to the Left (or Right).
384. 1. Platoons, 2. Left (right) turn, 3. MARCH, 4. GUIDE
(RIGHT or LEFT), or, 4. Company, 5. HALT.
Executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph.
CHAPTER VI. THE BATTALION MOUNTED.
Organization and Formation of the Battalion.
385. A field battalion of the Signal Corps may consist of two
or three field companies and of the authorized staff and non-
commissioned staff. It is commanded by a major.
THE BATTALION MOUNTED. 109
386. The field staff and noncommissioned staff, etc., of a bat-
talion are as follows :
One major commands the battalion.
One adjutant (captain).
One supply officer, Quartermaster, and commissary (captain).
One sergeant major, assistant to adjutant (master signal
electrician).
One supply sergeant, assistant to supply officer (first-class
sergeant).
Two color sergeants (sergeants).
Three privates, orderlies (one of whom shall be a trumpeter).
387. The normal formations of the battalion are: The order
in line, order in section column, and order in platoon column.
The individual companies are formed as in paragraphs 338-
340. In each case the formation of the battalion is analogous
thereto.
388. In the order in line the interval between companies is
twice the interval between sections. The distance between
companies in order in section column is section distance. The
distance between companies in order in platoon column is platoon
distance.
389. If the battalion is formed in column, with its companies
each formed in the order in line, the formation is called a col-
umn of companies. The distance between companies is equal to
the company front, when at full distance; it is section distance
when at closed distance. When the battalion is in column of
companies at closed distances, it is said to be closed in mass.
390. At formations of the battalion the companies habitually
take their places from right to left in line and from front to
rear in column, in the order of rank of their captains.
Companies whose captains are absent take their places in
line or column according to the relative rank of the officers
present in command of them. A company whose captain is
absent for a few days only retains its place, according to the
rank of the captain, unless otherwise ordered by. the major.
After the formation of the battalion no cognizance is taken
of the relative order of the companies. On marches the major
ordinarily varies from day to day the relative order of the com-
panies in column.
110 MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.
TO FORM THE BATTALION.
Posts of Individuals.
391. At ceremonies, the major is 30 yards in front of his
battalion, opposite the center. On other occasions he places
himself where he can most readily observe and direct his bat-
talion. The commissioned staff is posted 2 yards in rear of the
major, in order of rank from right to left ; the noncommis-
sioned staff and the trumpeter, similarly formed, 2 yards in
rear of the commissioned staff.
392. To form the battalion in line, the adjutant causes ad-
jutant's call to be sounded; the adjutant and sergeant major
proceed to the selected ground and post themselves facing each
other a few yards outside the points where the right and left
of the right company of the battalion are to rest.
The companies approach the line from the rear and are posted
in succession from right to left by their captains, so that the
front rank will be on the line established by the adjutant and
sergeant major. After halting his company, each captain
aligns it toward the right, as prescribed in paragraph 362.
The battalion in line is formed on the same principle as the
company, in the line the interval between companies being 6
yards.
When the company that arrives first on the line has been
established, the sergeant major joins the battalion noncommis-
sioned staff.
The line being formed, the major and his staff take post, fac-
ing the center of the battalion. The adjutant then moves at a
trot or gallop by the shortest line to a point midway between
the major and the center of the battalion, halts, facing the
major, salutes with the right hand, and reports: Sir, the bat-
talion is formed.
The major returns the salute with the right hand.
The adjutant then takes his post with the battalion staff.
393. The battalion may also be assembled in any other con-
venient formation. In such cases, as soon as the last company
has taken its place the adjutant joins the major and reports
to him that the battalion is formed.
394. Officers draw and return saber with the major. At cere-
monies, sabers are habitually drawn; at other times, they are
drawn or kept in. the scabbard at the discretion of the major.
THE BATTALION MOUNTED. Ill
395. To align the battalion. To effect a general alignment the
major causes one of the flank companies to be established in the
desired position, and commands: 1. By company, 2. Right (left),
3. DRESS.
Each captain in turn, commencing with the company first
posted, aligns his company toward the flank designated, and
commands front when the alignment is complete.
The captain of the company first established superintends the
alignment from the flank of his company nearest the point of
rest. The captains of the other companies superintend the
alignment from the flank of their companies farthest from the
point of rest.
396. To dismiss the battalion. The major commands : Dismiss
your companies, or sends appropriate instructions to the captains.
Each captain marches his company to its park and dismisses it.
Maneuvers of the Battalion.
397. Formal maneuvers of the battalion are of limited appli-
cation.
For passing from one formation to another, and for the simple
evolutions requisite for ceremonies and the ordinary incidents
of service, the battalion is maneuvered in accordance with the
principles heretofore prescribed for a single company and by
similar commands. In the case of simultaneous movements,
such as marching to the front, to the flank, to the rear, obliquely,
etc., the command or signal of execution of the major is im-
mediately repeated by the captains and simultaneously exe-
cuted by the companies. In the case of successive movements,
the captains maneuver their companies so as to cause them to
assume their proper positions by the shortest route and in
conformity with the principles of the rules of gaits.
398. The commands of the major are transmitted by order-
lies or given by arm, saber, or trumpet signals, or by word of
mouth. The captains habitually repeat the commands of the
major, or give such commands as may be necessary to insure
the execution of the movement. Their commands are given
by arm or saber signal, or by word of mouth. The whistle, and
not the trumpet, is habitually used to attract attention to the
signals of the captain during the evolutions of the battalion.
PART IV.
CARES OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
CHAPTER I. TRAINING OF HORSES.
399. Skeleton of the Horse.
PI. 19, Par. 399.
A. Molar teeth.
5, 5, Lumbar vertebrae.
26, Inner small ineta-
B II, Canine or tush.
6, 6, Sacrum.
carpal bone.
C I, Incisors.
7, 7, Coccygeal verte-
27, 28, Sesamoid bones.
K, Atlas.
brae.
L'9, Os suffraginis.
(J. Orbit.
8, Sternum.
80, Os corona?.
M. Cariniform carti-
9, 9, True ribs.
31, Os pedis.
lage.
10, 10, Cartilages o f
32, Wing of the pedal
N, Ensiform cartilage.
true ribs.
bone.
O, Coracoid process of
11, 11, False ribs.
33, 34, 35, 36, Os in-
scapula.
12, 12, Cartilages o f
nominatum.
P, Spine.
false ribs.
37, Femur.
Q, Cartilage.
13, Scapula.
38, Tibia.
R, Trochanter major.
14, Humerus.
39, Os calcis.
S, Subtrochant e r i a n
15, Radius.
40, Astragalus.
crest.
16, Elbow.
41, 42, 43, 44, Tarsal
T, Trochlea.
17, Os pisiforme.
bones.
U, External condyle.
18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
45, Large metatarsal
V, Patella.
Carpal bones.
bone.
W, Hock joint.
24, Large rnetacarpal
46, Outer small metp-
1, Cranium.
bone.
tarsal bone.
l_', Lower jaw.
25, Outer small meta-
47, Inner small meta-
3, Cervical vertebra?.
carpal bone.
tarsal bone.
4, 4, Dorsal vertebra?.
112
TRAINING OF HORSES.
400. Points of the Horse.
113
Head.
1, Muzzle.
2, Nostril.
3, Forehead.
4, Jaw.
5, Poll.
Neck.
6, 6, Crest.
7, Throttle or wind-
pipe.
Fore quarter.
8, 8, Shoulder blade.
9, Point of shoulder.
10, Bosom or breast.
11, 11, True arm.
12, Elbow.
13, Fore arm (arm).
14, Knee.
15, Cannon bone.
82940 11
PI. 20, Par. 400.
16, Back sinew.
17, Fetlock or pastern
joint.
18, Coronet.
19, Hoof or foot.
20, Heel.
Body or Middle piece.
21, Withers.
22, Back.
23, 23, Ribs (forming
together the bar-
rel or chest).
24, 24, The circumfer-
ence of the chest
at this point,
called the girth.
25, The loins.
26, The croup.
27, The hip.
28, The flank.
29, Sheath.
30, The root of the
dock or tail.
Hind quarter.
31, The hip joint,
round, or whirl
bone.
32, The stifle joint.
33, 33, Lower thigh or
gaskin.
34, The quarters.
35, The hock.
36, The point of the
hock.
37, The curb place.
38, The cannon bone.
39, The back sinew.
40, Pastern or fetlock
joint.
41, Coronet.
42, Hoof or foot.
43, Heel.
44, Spavin place.
114 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
401. Signal Corps officers should make themselves thoroughly
acquainted with the natural history and structure of the horse,
and what effects different modes of treatment, changes of diet,
etc., have on his system and powers of endurance. An officer
deficient in such knowledge will either have his company con-
stantly lacking in efficiency and reliability, or else make it
necessary to expend a large amount to keep him supplied with
remounts. Officers should also make themselves acquainted
with the best methods of breaking and training horses.
All Signal Corps officers should be familiar with the diseases
that are commonly met with in horses; they should know their
symptoms, mode of treatment, what to do in emergencies, and
have a good knowledge of the effects produced by the medicines
supplied to the company.
It is the duty of the company commander to instruct his offi-
cers in these things, as they are a very important part of the
knowledge that should be possessed by every Signal Corps
officer.
402. The horse is considered as an animal of a single idea,
and that he has no reasoning faculties beyond the limits of his
experience, and consequently we reason with him by acts alone,
his natural movement being away from that which hurts him
or excites his fear. Early impressions are seldom forgotten,
and it is important that each move be correctly begun. In
^familiarizing him with objects that excite his fear, the horse
should be allowed to smell or touch them with his nostrils, for
in a certain sense they are to him what the fingers are to man.
Invariable rules can not be laid down for the proper training
of all horses, as it will be found that each horse requires special
treatment.
403. Horses are trained by the best horsemen, under the
supervision of an officer or noncommissioned officer ; and the
men employed in this part of the horse's education are selected
for their natural fondness for animals as well as for their
patience, coolness, and intelligence.
The horse is made gentle and obedient, and his powers and
qualities are best developed by patience, kindness, encourage-
ment, and fearlessness; punishment is resorted to only when
necessary, and then only administered after the commission of
the offense, that he may know why he is punished. No punish-
ment should ever be administered to the horse in anger. Under
TRAINING OF HORSES. 115
harsh treatment he will become timid, then sullen, and at length
iolent and unmanageable.
Restlessness and impatience frequently arise from exuberance
of spirits or playfulness, which must be carefully distinguished
from that which arises from viciousness and timidity. When
restless, the horse should be handled quietly until he becomes
calm ; when submissive after punishment, he should be treated
kindly.
As one horse is apt to be governed by the actions of another,
trained horses that are indifferent to such sounds should be
nterspersed among the new ones when accustoming them to
firing, beating of drums, etc.
The first object to be attained in training the horse is to
gain his confidence and render him gentle and tractable. For
;his purpose, all proper means must be employed, such as feed-
ng, handling, patting him, taking up his feet, etc., and the
practice of the longe.
When the horse will quietly allow his feet to be handled and
if ted, the man should practice gently tapping them to accus-
tom him to the action of shoeing.
The man must endeavor to discover the horse's natural incli-
nations and to gain a knowledge of his abilities, that he may
know how to take advantage of these qualities.
Every action of the man should tend to induce full confidence
:hat no harm is intended and nothing but kind treatment is to
be expected.
When new horses are first placed in stalls, the men approach
them quietly, and always take care to speak to them before
entering the stall; they should be carefully fed and gradually
accustomed to the Government forage ration; as many of them
will be entirely unused to eating oats, corn, or barley, great
care must be taken or serious trouble may follow. By com-
mencing with the coarser part of the ration, consisting of hay
and bran, and, where possible, crushing or grinding the grain,
the horse will gradually be brought to the habit of eating the
service ration without injury.
From their arrival, the horses should be exercised one or two
hours daily in the open air. For this purpose the new horse
will be equipped with the halter only, and led by the man
mounted on a trained horse. After a few days, a bit may be
116 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
placed in the youug horse's mouth, aiid the reins tied loosel;
and thrown over his neck.
Bridling.
404. A plain snaffle bridle should at first be used and put i
with care and gentleness. If the horse resists, no violenc
should be used. He should be turned round in his stall and th
instructor should take the end of the halter while the mai
quiets and encourages the horse. By careful treatment he wil
soon become accustomed to the sight of the bit and will allo\
it to be placed in his mouth. The reins will be tied so as t
hang loosely on the neck.
The Cavesson and Longe/ng.
405. The cavesson is a light halter with the brow bane
throatlatch, and cheek pieces like the bridle headstall, and ha
a noseband that may be adjusted with a buckle; there is als
a running ring on the chin strap for the longe. The longein;
strap is from 20 to 30 feet long. The lariat may be used.
The cavesson is put on after the snaffle has been fitted; th
noseband should be placed about 3 inches above the nostrils, s
as to not affect the breathing; it should act both as a noseban<
and curb, and be over the snaffle. It must not be buckled s<
tightly as to make the horse uneasy.
The first lesson to be taught a young horse is to go forward
Until he does this freely, nothing else should be required of hiir
The practice of the longe is to supple and teach the horse th
free and proper use of his legs. It thus aids in forming hi
gaits and in fitting him for the mounted service.
The lesson should be begun on a circle from I'o to 20 feet ii
diameter. As horses are usually fed, watered, saddled, and le
from the near side, they are inclined to lead better from tha
than the off side. It will therefore generally be found neces
sary to give two lessons on the right to one on the left.
If a horse hesitates or stands still when he is ordered t
move on, he should be encouraged, as such hesitation oftene
comes from fear or ignorance as to what is required of hie
than from obstinacy or other vice.
TRAINING OF HORSES. 117
The horse is first led several times around the circle at a
walk. A man with a whip follows at a short distance and
shows the whip occasionally when the horse hangs hack; if
this does not produce the desired effect, he should strike the
ground in rear of the horse or touch him lightly with the whip
until he obeys. When he moves freely at the walk, the man
holding the longe should gently urge him to trot, and gradually
lengthen the rein so that the horse may scarcely notice it; he
should continue to go round the circle at an active pace, nearly
opposite the horse's shoulder, so as to keep him out and urge
him forward.
If the horse takes kindly to this lesson, the man holding the
longe may lengthen it by degrees until he has only to turn in the
same spot, the man with the whip being careful to keep the
horse out of the line of the circle.
When the horse breaks his pace or plunges, the rein should
be shaken horizontally without jerking until he returns to the
trot.
The man holding the lougeing rein should have a light and
easy hand. For the first two or three days the horse must not
be urged too much; if he goes gently, without jumping or re-
sisting, enough is accomplished. He should be longed to the
right, left, and right again, changing from the trot to the walk
and back again in each case. He should be frequently halted
by gently feeling the rein and speaking to him ; and at the con-
clusion of each lesson the rein should be carefully shortened
and gathered up in the hand, and the horse brought to the
center of the circle and caressed before being dismissed.
After a few days of the above practice, the horse may be
urged a little more in the trot, but great care is requisite to
teach him to use his limbs without straining them. Much harm
may be done in this instruction by a sudden jerk or a too forci-
ble pull on the longe.
Care must be taken that the lessons are not made so long as
to fatigue or fret the horse, being gradually increased in length
as the instruction progresses. The man holding the longeing;
rein should take it short in one hand, at the same time patting
and rubbing the horse about the head and neck with the other ;
he should then try to bend the horse's neck a little to the right
and to the left by means of the longeing rein ; the bend should
be in the very poll of the neck, and should be cautiously re-
118 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE BITTY, ETC.
peated at the end of each lesson until the horse responds easily ;
this will greatly facilitate the future instruction. The longe is
used to instruct the new horses, especially if timid, to jump the
bar and ditch.
406. The running rein is of great value in teaching a horse
to keep his head in a proper position, and affords valuable aid
in his first handling. If judiciously used, it saves the rider
a great deal of trouble and the horse much ill-usage, and sim-
plifies the subject of " bits and bitting." It is especially useful
in controlling horses that are inclined to bolt.
It should act directly on the snaffle bit itself, and is wholly
independent of the reins.
The running rein consists of three parts the chin strap, rein,
and martingale.
The chin strap, about 6 to 8 inches long, on which is suspended
a loose ring, is fastened to both snaffle-bit rings.
The martingale has only one ring; the loop through which
the girth passes is made adjustable by a buckle. The martin-
gale is so adjusted that when taut the ring will be on a level
with the points of the horse's shoulders.
The rein is about 8 feet long; one end is buckled into the
near pommel ring ; the free end is then passed through the mar-
tingale ring from rear to front, thence through the chin-strap
ring from left to right, thence through the martingale ring from
front to rear and is held in the rider's right hand.
A pull on this rein will act directly on the mouthpiece, draw-
ing it back and somewhat downward toward the horse's breast-
bone.
407. Before commencing the bending lessons, it is well to
give the horse a preparatory one in obedience to make him
sensible of the power man has over him. This first act of
submission will prove of great service, and gives the man such
ascendency as to prevent the horse at the outset from resisting
the means employed to bring him under control.
Go up to the horse, pat him on the neck, and speak to him ;
then take the reins off the horse's neck and h'old them at a few
inches from the rings of the bit with the left hand; take such
position as to offer as much resistance as possible to the horse,
should he attempt to break away; hold the whip in the right
hand, with the point down ; raise the whip quietly and tap
the horse on the breast; the horse naturally tries to move
TRAINING OF HORSES. 119
back to avoid the whip ; follow the horse, at the same time
pulling against him, and continuing the use of the whip ; be
careful to show no sign of anger nor of yielding. The horse,
tired of trying ineffectually to avoid the whip soon ceases to
pull, and moves forward; then drop the point of the whip and
make much of him. This repeated once or twice usually proves
sufficient. The horse, having found how to avoid the punish-
ment, no longer waits for the application of the whip, but an-
ticipates it by moving up at a gesture.
408. Bending lessons should be given each day, so long as
the snaffle bit is used alone; but the exercise should be varied,
so that the horse may not become fatigued or disgusted.
The horse's balance and his lightness in hand depend on the
proper carriage of his head and neck.
A young horse Usually tries to resist the bit, either by bend-
ing his neck to one side, by setting his jaw against the bit, or
by carrying his nose too high or too low.
The bending lessons serve to make the horse conform to the
movements of the reins, and yield to the pressure of the bit.
During the lessons, the horse must never be hurried.
409. To bend to the right. Take a position on the near side
of the horse in front of his shoulder and facing toward his neck ;
take the off rein close against the bit in the right hand, the
near rein in the same way in the left hand, the thumbs toward
each other, the little fingers outward; bring the right hand
toward the body, and at the same time extend the left arm so
as to turn the horse's head to the right.
The force employed must be gradual and proportioned to the
resistance met with, and care must be taken not to bring the
horse's nose too close to his chest. If the horse moves back-
ward, continue the pressure until, finding it impossible to avoid
the restraint imposed by the bit, he stands still and yields to it.
When the bend is complete, the horse holds his head without
any restraint and champs the bit; then make much of him and
let him resume his natural position by degrees, without throw-
ing his head around hurriedly.
A horse, as a rule, champs the bit when he ceases to resist.
The horse's neck is bent to the left in a similar manner, the
man standing on the off side.
410. To arch the neck. Being on the near side of the horse:
Cross the reins behind the horse's jaw, taking the near rein in
120 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
the right hand, the off rein in the left, at about 6 inches from
the rings, and draw them across each other till the horse gives
way to the pressure and brings his nose in. Prevent the horse
from raising his head by lowering the hands. When the horse
gives way to the cross pressure of the reins, ease the hand and
make much of him.
411. To lower the head. Being mounted: Take the right rein
in the right hand, the left rein in the left, and feel lightly the
mouth of the horse; then, holding the hands low, play with the
bit, gently drawing in the reins as the horse drops his nose.
When the horse, opening his mouth, yields the lower jaw to the
bit and brings in his head so that the face is vertical, release
the tension of the reins and caress the horse for his obedience.
By degrees the horse can be taught to depress the head to any
extent.
412. To elevate the head. Being mounted : Hold the reins
separately, as prescribed above, and with arms extended for-
ward, make light pulls upward upon the reins; when the horse
has obeyed, lower the hands so that the horse can lower his
muzzle, and then quietly demand that the face of the animal
shall be brought into the vertical position.
413. To carry the head to the right. Being mounted: Hold
the reins as previously prescribed, and drawing the right rein
toward the body, carry the head of the horse a little to the
right, using the left hand to measure the effect of the right, to
keep the face of the horse vertical, and to aid in keeping the
jaw pliant. The rider should be satisfied with slow progress,
but in time the head should be brought round so that the face,
with the nose down, shall look to the rear. By this exercise the
head and neck are suppled and made submissive. After the
head has been carried to the right, the left hand, supported by
the right, will carry the head to the front, and the vertical posi-
tion of the head be demanded by a play of both reins. In a
similar manner the head will be carried to the left.
414. After the horse has submitted quietly to this instruc-
tion, he will be required to move forward.
For this purpose the rider takes the snaffle rein in each hand
and feels lightly the horse's mouth; the man with the longe
leads the horse forward and longes him first to the left and
then to the right, at a walk ; if the horse shows any disposi-
TRAINING OF HORSES. 121
tion to kick or plunge, the longe is shaken lightly to engage his
attention.
After a short lesson the rider dismounts, the horse is petted
and dismissed.
These lessons are continued until the horse can be made to
go forward, to the right and left, to halt, and rein back by
application of the aids.
Breaking in the Young Horse to Harness.
415. The harness should be put on the horse in the stable
with caution, and at first without traces, so that in the event of
the horse jumping about they will not hang around his legs and
frighten him. The horse should then be fed in his harness, and
after standing for some hours, be walked about in it.
When the horse has thus been fed and walked about and has
become reconciled to the harness, the traces should be attached
and a rope tied to the rear end of each ; a man then takes the
ends of the ropes and the horse is walked about, the man hold-
ing the ropes taking care that the traces do not rub against
the sides of the horse in the beginning, but accustom him to
them gradually.
When the horse has become accustomed to the pressure of
the collar and traces he may be then hitched in with a steady
horse. At first the utmost caution should be observed, and a
foreleg held up, if necessary, while the traces are being fas-
tened, and no noise or shouting should be permitted. After
being hitched in, the horse should be permitted to stand still
for some minutes before the carriage is started, and it should
be put in motion by the other horses. The horse should be left
to himself and not be required to draw at first ; all that should
be demanded of him is to move forward quietly.
To Accustom the Horse to the Report of Firearms.
416. This part of the horse's education should not be com-
menced until he has become so familiar with the bridle, etc.,
that he makes no resistance when they are applied. He is
then shown the pistol, allowed to smell it, made familiar with
the sound of the cocking and the falling of the hammer, the
man at the same time talking to and caressing him to allay his
122 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
fears. A blank cartridge is fired some distance from him.
The horse will be startled, but his fears will be dispelled by
kind words and caresses. The horse's fears having been
quieted, other shots will be fired nearer and rearer to him,
observing the same caution.
Great care should be exercised that the pistol be not dis-
charged too near the horse's ears, nor so close to him that the
powder will burn him; a horse once injured in this way will
nearly always be nervous while firing is going on.
This lesson is repeated several times, until the horse no
longer flinches materially, nor struggles after a shot is fired.
417. Horses that shy, etc., may be treated in this way : Tie a
rope with a slipknot around the body over the loins, the knot
under the belly ; the free end of the rope is passed under the
horse between his forelegs and carried up through the halter
ring and made fast to a suspended rope, sustained in place by
guy ropes to prevent too much lateral motion.
The horse being thus secured, such articles as robes, blankets,
etc., of which he may have shown fear, are brought into his
sight, and he is encouraged to smell or touch them. Pistol
firing, etc., is practiced until he ceases to show signs of alarm.
The object in having a rope suspended is to prevent the horse
from hurting himself and yet allow him freedom to move his
haunches. The picket rope, if high enough, will do.
To Break the Horse of Kicking.
418. The horse is thrown and one end of each of two long
straps is made fast to the bit rings; the other ends are passed
through rings on the leather surcingle and secured to the hind
pasterns. When thus secured, all means should be resorted to
in order to make the horse kick, and this should be repeated
until he no longer struggles nor attempts to move his hind legs
under any provocation whatever.
Swimming Horses and Fording.
419. As it is often necessary for mounted troops to cross
streams by swimming, the exercise is important, as it gives
confidence to men and horses.
TRAINING OP HORSES. 123
The horses are at first equipped with the watering bridle and
are barebacked. The reins are on the horse's neck just in front
of the withers and knotted so that they will not hang low
enough to entangle the horse's feet, care being taken to have
them so placed as to permit the horse to push his nose well out
and to have entire freedom of the head. The horse should be
watered, but not too freely, before entering him into the stream.
The man mounts, rides into the stream, and when he gets
into deep water, drops reins, seizes a lock of the mane with the
upstream hand, allows his body to drift off quietly to the down-
stream side of the horse, and floats or swims flat on the water,
guiding the horse, when necessary, by splashing water against
his head, only using the reins when the splashing fails. When
the horse touches bottom at the landing, the man pulls himself
on the horse's back and takes the reins. The horse is easily
controlled when swimming; he is also easily confused. It is
therefore necessary that the man should be gentle and delib-
erate. The man must be cautioned that pulling on the reins
is apt to pull the horse over backward, and that when the
horse touches bottom he may begin to plunge.
The man will also be required to swim holding the horse's
tail, the horse towing him.
After the man and horse have gained confidence, the man
will be required to be seated on his horse, with or without
saddle, while swimming. The man's weight presses the horse
down and impedes his movements, and when saddled the man
should hold the knees well up to lessen the resistance, and
steady his seat by holding on the mane or the pommel of the
saddle.
With some horses, especially those that swim low, it is ad-
visable that the man sit behind the saddle to allow the fore-
quarters to float high.
The men will also be practiced in swimming the horses when
fully armed and equipped. The stirrups are crossed and se-
cured. The horse is guided by the reins. The men are in-
structed in crossing swift-running water to keep their eyes
fixed on the opposite bank.
When large, swift rivers are to be crossed, too hazardous
for all the horses to be ridden, the bridle reins are secured
to avoid the danger of their being caught by the horse's feet,
or by those of another horse swimming close to him; the stirrups
124 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
are crossed and secured; a trained horse is selected for a
leader and is ridden without saddle; all the horses are led
or driven to the approach and can generally be made to take
the water without much difficulty. The approach should be
selected at some distance above the landing. If practicable, a
few horses should be taken over and placed at the landing, and
some men stationed to receive the horses as they land.
If there be a pontoon bridge in the immediate vicinity, the
crossing should be below it.
When a horse is towed or led from a boat, he should be held
astern of the oars and on the downstream side or in the wake.
When a stream with a treacherous bottom is to be forded,
stakes or bushes should be placed so as to mark the limits of
the ford, or may be placed so as to mark the dangerous places
only.
When the stream is to be forded at night, lighted lanterns
should be fastened to the stakes and one displayed at the land-
ing or a fire built there.
When the stream has a swift current and the water is above
the horses bellies, the subdivisions should cross with as w T ide
n front as practicable, to permit a freer flow or prevent dam-
ming of the water, which might carry a horse off his feet ; but
in crossing a dangerous ford, the column of twos is less ob-
jectionable than the column of fours.
Mounted troops should generally cross streams above infantry
or so far below that the water will not be dammed against them.
CHAPTER II. DRAFT ANIMALS.
Care of Draft Animals in the Field.
420. Constant and intelligent supervision of adjustment of
the bearing parts of harness, packs, and saddles is productive of
better results than medication in keeping transportation ani-
mals in serviceable condition.
421. In preparing for the field it is well to bear in mind
that nearly all animals in a command lose flesh rapidly for the
first 10 days of a march, and that during this period the adjust-
ment of all parts of the harness, more especially the collars,
should be given close attention.
DRAFT ANIMALS. 125
422. If the march should happen to be a continuous and a
severe one, it may be noticed that about the sixteenth day, draft
animals appear suddenly to become very lean in the muscles of
the shoulders, back, abdomen, and croup. If a fair amount of
forage is available they quickly improve to a certain point,
where they remain stationary and continue to do hard work
without noticeable change under an intelligent system of water-
ing and feeding. They are now in working condition.
423. Water on the march whenever a good opportunity to do
so presents itself, never forgetting, however, that a warm ani-
mal should be watered but sparingly, and that such a watered
animal should not be allowed to remain stationary even for a
few minutes, as this induces laminitis (founder), due to con-
traction of the internal blood vessels by the cold water taken
and the consequent increase of blood pressure in the legs and
feet where it can not, while the animal is inactive, be taken care
of by the system. Laminitis (founder) is due to congestion of
the feet.
424. Feeding. Soon after reaching camp, offer a little hay.
Water before feeding grain when possible. Offer grain immedi-
ately after watering, and then place before the animals what
remains of the hay for that day. The morning watering must
of necessity be governed by circumstances. If absolutely sure
of water on the road, say one hour after breaking camp, it
would be a needless waste of time and energy to water immedi-
ately before or after the morning feed on the line.
425. Midday baiting. As little as 1 pound of grain per ani-
mal, taken for the daily allowance and given in charge to each
driver, fed at the noon halt, will have a wonderful effect for
good on the animals of a command. At this halt the careful
driver will add a few handfuls of grass, and at the same time
look over his collars and breeching with a view to their read-
justment.
426. Collars of steel, such as those furnished to artillery
commands, are preferable to leather for military use, when
properly adjusted and cleaned. When improperly adjusted
they are inferior to the leather article. Steel collars are ad-
justed by means of bolts and plates. Leather collars by means
of top straps and hames. When these methods will not pro-
duce the desired results, the use of collar pads must be resorted
126 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
to. Felt collar pads are not desirable, as they soon become stiff
and hard.
A collar should fit snugly to the sides of the neck without
compressing it, and its bearing surface should rest squarely on
the bed of muscles situated on the front of the shoulder. When
in position there should be a space between its lower part and
the windpipe sufficiently .large to comfortably admit the inser-
tion of the open hand, back up, as far as the wrist.
All collars should be furnished with a neck plate of zinc, for
the protection of the top of the neck against rubbing.
To prevent blistering of the top of the neck on hot, sunny
days, it will be found that a wet sponge or a wet piece of folded
gunny sack, properly secured to the top of the collar and wetted
at intervals, is effective.
The bearing surface of steel collars and neck plates should
be washed carefully soon after making camp. They should
never be scoured with sand or rubbed with an abrasive sub-
stance, for the reason that the steel beneath the zinc plating
may be thus exposed. The exposed steel rusts quickly, pits
rapidly from the action of the acid sweat, and acts as a rasp
would on the soft tissues with which it comes in continual con-
tact.
The bearing surface of leather collars should not be scraped
unless considered absolutely necessary to remove accumulated
dirt due to negligence. If scraped they should be boned smooth
and then slightly oiled. Leather collars may be easily cleaned
with a damp sponge. They should be thus cleaned each even-
ing. A careful man will not let his collars remain on the
ground over night, but will hang them on the pole, or put them
in some safe place where he will protect them from the rain
and the dust of the camp.
427. Necks and shoulders. On arrival in camp let collars
remain in position for about 15 minutes. Their weight on the
hot, tender skin affords sufficient pressure to prevent the forma-
tion of swellings so often observed after the collar is suddenly
removed. Normal circulation will establish itself gradually
under collar pressure alone, and the skin of the shoulders and
neck will regain its tone and elasticity.
After removal of the collar, bathe the shoulder and neck
with clean water; this to remove sand and dust that would
DRAFT ANIMALS. 127
I.
' otherwise remain in the hair, where it may not be reached by
the horse brush.
Salty water, or a weak solution of vinegar in water, when
i applied to the shoulders and neck, acts as a tonic to the jaded
skin.
Animals with narrow, lean shoulders should not be placed
in the collar. For these, if they must be harnessed, a breast
strap (Dutch collar) should be used.
When putting on a collar, see that the mane hangs naturally
beneath the neck plate. If the collar is a steel one, be careful
when snapping it in place that the skin of the upper part of
neck is not pinched between the neck plate and the collar itself.
If swellings appear on the shoulders, use massage to remove
them and in addition apply a cold-water pack during the night ;
; a wet sack properly adjusted and held in place will answer the
purpose. If a gall appears, do not grease it. Wash it with
water and soap, dry thoroughly, and apply a weak solution of
alum (one-half ounce to a pint of water) or a solution of aloes
in water (one-half ounce to the pint). If the animal must be
worked, use a chambered (cut-out) pad over the spot to remove
pressure. Greasy ointments serve as a trap for dust and sand.
428. Traces. Verify the length of traces frequently. Do
not depend on the chain links as a guide in hitching. Leather
traces stretch considerably in wet weather. A difference of
half an inch in the length of traces will cause trouble on the
shoulder of the shorter side. It is also liable to produce lame-
ness due to irritation of extensor muscles. If the point of at-
tachment of the trace to the collar should be too high, it will
cause a downward pull on top of neck, with its consequent irri-
tation. If too low, it will cause the collar to " ride," and nearly
all the pressure will be on the point of the shoulders and on
the windpipe.
The number of sore-shouldered draft animals in a command
on the march is an excellent standard by which to judge the
horsemanship of the personnel.
429. Breeching. The breeching should be fairly loose; oth-
erwise it is liable to chafe the quarters and to interfere with
the free play of the muscles. It should be taken up as the ani-
mals become thin.
Martingales should not fit too snugly, as they are very liable
to chafe the soft, thin skin of the under part of the body.
128 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
430. Yoke straps should be adjusted with a view to the
height of the pair. They should never be permitted to trespass
on the bearing surface of the collars.
431. Backstraps should be so adjusted as not to let the sad-
dles ride the withers, but at the same time there should not be
sufficient strain on them to cause the crupper to irritate the
under part of the tail.
432. Belly bands and cinchas should never be unduly tight-
ened, as they cause cinch sores near the elbow, and quarter-
strap sores beneath the ring shields.
When a cinch gall appears, remove the cause, keep the place
clean, and apply a solution of aloes or alum in water. Either of
these will stimulate the gall and deter insects from alighting on
the wound.
433. Bearing reins should be of such a length that the ani-
mals may have free use of the muscles of head and neck. Bear-
ing reins are not a necessity.
434. A driving bit should be smooth and jointed. It should
be so adjusted that it will not lift the corners of the mouth. If
placed too high in the mouth, the animal uses his molar teeth
to press against it, and gains for himself the reputation of a
hard-mouthed puller.
435. Beware of thread ends in collar pads and of knots in
headstalls, throatlatches, bellybands, cinchas, and surcingles,
and be careful that bucklQg are not turned toward the skin.
These readily produce irritations and abrasions, and are plain
evidence of negligence and carelessness on the part of the rider
or driver, as well as loose supervision on the part of those su-
perior in rank.
436. To keep his animals in the collar and off the lead line
should be the aim of each driver. This can be accomplished
with little trouble, barring accidents, if the harness is kept in
proper shape and fit, and necks and shoulders are kept clean.
CHAPTER III. DRIVING.
Double Harness.
437. Double harness is fitted exactly the same way as single,
except that the bellybands should be slightly looser.
438. Never pole too tightly, especially when the pole is a
heavy one, because if the pole chains are tight the weight of
DRAFT ANIMALS. 129
the pole will continually rest on the neck. On the other hand,
if the poling up is too lose the constant swaying will be a
source of irritation and danger to the team.
Coupling Reins.
439. The correct adjustment of the two short inside reins,
called coupling reins, requires great care. They should be so
fitted that an even pressure is brought to bear on both sides of
' the animals' mouths, and in such a way also that both animals
shall go straight and pull evenly on the traces For instance,
if the near horse carries his head to the near side, the coupling
rein on the off side should be taken up, when his head will be
straightened.
Supposing we have two animals apparently well matched,
but that the near one carries his head rather out to the front,
; and has a light mouth, while the off animal has a hard mouth,
i and carries his head close to his chest. Now to get this pair
to pull equally on the traces we must have the near animal's
rein considerably longer than those of the off animal. In this
case we should begin by letting out the off side coupling rein
and taking up the near side rein the same number of holes.
The reins will now be adjusted so as to permit the near horse
to hold his head well in front of the other, while the collars are
brought level.
The most general fault is coupling up both reins too tightly,
which makes the animals carry their heads in toward the pole,
instead of going straight, as they should do. To prevent ani-
.mals acquiring this habit, it is a good plan to change their
positions occasionally, instead of always driving them on the
same side of the pole.
It is a convenient plan to have more than one hole in the
billets for buckling the reins on the bits, so that an animal can
be pulled back or let out a hole or two on either side without
altering the coupling rein.
Ho/ding the Reins.
440. Place both reins in the left hand, the near rein over the
forefinger and the off rein under the middle finger. Thus you
have two fingers between the reins. The reason for this is that
82940 11 9
130 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
it gives much more scope for play of the wrist on the mouths
than if you only have one finger between the reins. The thumb
should point straight to the right, and the forefinger be held
well out, pointing to the right rear. This will keep the rein
close up to the knuckle, and the pair may be easily moved
across the road by turning the back of hand up or down ; up
for left turn, down for right turn.
441. Sit firmly but comfortably in your seat, body, erect,
without stiffness, and elbows close to side. Do not lean for-
ward. Now take the whip in the right hand, at the place where
it balances comfortably, and you are ready to start.
442. Bring the pair to attention by feeling their mouths
gently, and speak to them. If they do not respond, touch them
gently with the whip.
The moment they start drop the hand slightly; "jibbing" is
often caused by neglect of this precaution.
443. The elbows should be held close to the sides, with the
points almost touching the hips.
The wrist should be well bent, as by this means the driver
is enabled to keep a perfectly steady bearing on the mouths
without any jerking.
The forearms should be horizontal, and the fingers from 3 to
5 inches from the center of the body, with the knuckles to the
front.
The thumb should not be pressed down on the rein. The
fingers that should grip the reins are the three lower ones.
444. Never hit an animal while the right hand is holding a
rein, because if you try to cut him when you have the off rein
in the right hand, you must slack that rein off, and the pair is
apt to dash to the left.
445. Do not get into the habit of "jabbing" the pair with
the bits, and do not flap the reins on their backs to start them
or make them increase their pace.
Drive at a steady, even pace, as nothing tires a team so much
as to constantly change the rate of speed.
When it is necessary to pull up in a hurry the proper course
to pursue is to catch hold of the reins with the finger and
thumb of the right hand, just behind the left, and shortetn
them as much as necessary by pulling them through. This
is safer and more businesslike than elevating the hands, which
disturbs the seat.
DRAFT ANIMALS. 131
446. The driving gloves should be large and very comfort-
able. They should never be of a size to cramp the hand in the
slightest.
447. The right hand is known as the whip hand. It is gen-
erally used only for holding the whip, for assisting the left
hand, and for shortening the reins by pulling them through
from behind the rein hand.
Driving Four-in-Hand.
448. The driving of four animals as they should be driven is
an art that can only be learned by constant practice and study.
449. When driving, the body should be kept upright and
square to the front, but all stiffness should be avoided. The
driving seat should be about 3 or 4 inches higher at the back
than in front, so that the driver can sit well back \n a really
comfortable position. The ankles and knees should be just
touching each other, and the arms close to the sides. The
forearm should be about horizontal, and the left hand r as in
driving a pair, from 4 to 5 inches from the center of the body,
the back of the hand being turned toward the front, but in-
clined a little toward the team. The wrist should be bent
slightly toward the body, and on no account allowed to bend
the other way. This is far the best position for feeling the
mouths, as the wrist then acts like a spring, and an even pres-
sure can be maintained.
The driver should on no account be half standing, or merely
leaning against the seat, with unbent knees, as, in the event of
a wheeler falling or shying to the side, he will probably be
jerked off the wagon.
The Reins.
450. The best way of holding the reins is to have the near
lead over the left forefinger, the off lead between the forefinger
and the middle finger, the near wheel between the same and
under the off lead, and the off wheel between the middle and
third finger. The reins must be gripped firmly by the three
lower fingers of the left hand. The thumb should point to the
right, and the forefinger be held well out. The near lead-rein
should pass over or close to the knuckle of the forefinger and
not over the first or second joint.
132 CAEE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
Adjusting the Reins.
451. All four reins can be shortened, if much is required, by
pulling them through from behind, but it is generally quicker
and neater to hold the reins with right hand 2 or 3 inches in
front of left (the little and third fingers over the off-side reins
and the middle finger between the near-side reins), and then
slide the left hand up to the right. This movement is generally
required when going down hill.
Wheel Reins.
452. It is better to shorten these by pulling them through
from behind. This is necessary when going down hill, especially
when the wheelers are loosely poled up, so as to prevent the
singletrees from hitting the leaders' hind legs.
Lead Reins.
453. In order to shorten these, take out both the leaders with
the right hand (the third and little fingers over off, and first or
middle finger over near-side rein) ; they then can be passed
back to the left hand the required length by letting them slip
through the right hand the necessary amount. To lengthen
them, simply pull them through from the front.
Near-Lead Rein.
Either push through from the front, with the full of the right
hand over the rein, or take it right out of left hand and re-
place it the proper length.
Off -Lead Rein.
Push it through from the front.
Near-Wheel Rein.
This is the most difficult rein to keep in its right place and
to shorten. It is constantly slipping when the wheelers pull.
It appears to be the best plan to pull it through from behind.
DRAFT ANIMALS. 133
Off-Wheel Rein.
Push it through from the front with the right hand.
Crossing the Road.
454. To the left: Turn the left hand, knuckles upward, and
pass it across the body from left to right ; the team will incline
to the left, the reins on that side being shorter.
To the right: Pass the left hand down toward the left hip,
back of the hand to the front, with the knuckles of the fore-
finger downward, and that of the little finger uppermost. This
shortens the right-hand reins and causes the team to incline
in that direction. The whip can be applied to the off wheeler
in the first instance, or to the near one in the second, if they do
not cross rapidly enough.
Turning to the Left.
455. With the right hand seize the near-lead and wheel reins
under the lower fingers ; then either pull those reins up toward
the center of the body, which will shorten them, or allow the
left hand to go slightly to the front, which will slack off the
right reins, or, better still, combine these motions.
Turning to the Right.
456. Take hold of the off-lead and wheel reins with the
lower fingers of the right hand and treat them in the same
way as in using the left reins.
To Steady the Team.
457. In order to steady the animals or to ease the left hand,
the right may be placed in front of the other over all the four
reins, the third and little fingers being over the off reins and
the upper fingers over only one of the near reins.
The Whip.
458. The handle should rest in the palm of the right hand
and be kept firmly in its place by the action of the thumb
134 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
pressing against the base of the forefinger; the lower fingers
will then be left free to catch hold of the reins.
If, however, it is necessary to pull the reins through from
behind, tDe lower fingers must be tightened on the handle, so
as to allow the thumb and forefinger to be used.
Hold the whip at an angle of about 30 to the left front and
about 40 upward.
The thong ought to have three or four turns round the
handle.
The point of the thong should be just under the inside of the
thumb ; this will keep it from slipping. Hold the whip where it
will balance comfortably, the end of handle under the forearm,
the wrist well bent, and the elbow close to the side.
459. When the right hand is on the reins or using the whip,
it should be kept close to the left, the forearm being nearly
horizontal. It can then rest on the thigh and yet be ready for
any emergency.
460. The wheelers should be hit in front of the saddles, to
avoid making them kick. It is no use hitting the wheelers if
the leaders' reins are too long. In this case you must first
shorten up the wheelers' reins, and then use the whip on the
leaders; otherwise, as soon as the wheelers have jumped into
their collars, the leaders will again press forward and allow
the wheelers to hang back as before.
461. The proper hitting of the leaders with the whip can
only be acquired by constant practice when off the wagon. A
good whip can hit his leaders wherever he desires and with-
out the dangerous, flail-like swipes that some teamsters appear
to consider necessary.
To Start.
462. Feel all the animals' mouths, and, if necessary, give
them the word to go, dropping the hand to them at once until
the vehicle is fairly off. The wheelers ought to start the
wagon, and this can be effected by touching them with the
whip, if they require a hint. It is never safe to start without
having the whip in the right hand, ready for immediate use.
The whip is to the driver what the leg is to the rider, that is,,
it keeps the team up to their bits. As soon as the team is go-
ing straight, take the right hand off the reins, at the same time
keeping it close by, ready for any emergency.
DRAFT ANIMALS. 135
Pulling up.
463. When you want to pull up, shorten all the four reins by
passing the left hand up to the right, or else by pulling all the
four reins through from behind, as before explained ; then, hav-
ing the right forefinger on the near lead rein, the middle finger
on the near wheel, and the lower fingers of the right hand on
the off reins, pull both hands back toward the body, and if
necessary lean back a little.
Should the team be getting the better of yon, and you find
that you can not stop it, it will be found a great assistance to
place the right leg over all the four reins, as you may be able
to stop them by the extra power and leverage by the position
of the leg. Of course it is understood the brake has been
applied.
A Few Hints.
464. Always keep a steady pressure on the reins.
Never remove left hand from reins, even though the right
may be holding them in front, as it is very difficult to get the
left hand back into its place again with the reins in the right
places.
Lead reins should seldom be removed from left hand.
Grip the reins tightly with third and little fingers to prevent
their slipping.
Alter position of bits if the team pulls hard.
See to it that your wagon is always well greased.
Always take a pull at the team to steady it just before you
arrive at the crest of a hill, and begin to descend slowly, hold-
ing the leaders steady, and with just enough traction to keep
their singletrees from hitting them.
In crossing ruts and in turning corners be careful that the
leaders are out of draft; otherwise the pole may be snapped
off or the wheelers pulled down.
If, while going down a hill, and especially when near the
bottom, you find a wheeler slipping on his hocks, do not try to
pull him up, but drop the hand and allow the team to go a trifle
faster.
Rules of the Road.
465. Always keep to the right when meeting vehicles.
On a narrow road a loaded team has the right of way, and
it should be given ungrudgingly.
136 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
On overtaking a vehicle, pull out to the left and pass it at
a steady pace and without cracking your whip or coming in
too close.
When followed closely by another vehicle and both are at
a good pace, signal with your whip if you are about to slacken
your gait or change your direction.
When approaching a railroad crossing, bring your team to a
walk ; halt if necessary, but always look and listen.
Be courteous in observing the simple rules of the road; give
plenty of room to others, and do not forget that a smile or a
pleasant laugh will do more for you than a growl or a surly
remark. Horsemen, as a rule, possess good dispositions; meet
them, at least half way.
CHAPTER IY. CARE OF SADDLE ANIMALS.
466. Animals for riding purposes should be selected with a
view to the adaptability of their backs to the saddle.
467. The back of a saddle animal should be fairly short. A
short back sustains weight better than a long one. The withers
should not be high enough to be rubbed by the pommel arch
when the horse's condition is low. A broad, low withers is
objectionable for the reason that it is liable to be pinched by
the saddle bars. It also allows the saddle to drift to the front,
and, as a matter of course, the cincha will come in contact
with the elbow and lower breast muscles, where it is liable to
produce galls.
A short back with medium withers is rarely concave (sway
back) to any great extent. Such backs generally have well-
developed, well-rounded, deep chests, and properly proportioned
abdomens.
468. A thin, tucked-up belly is undesirable in a saddle ani-
mal, the reason being that the saddle has a tendency to drift to
the rear, no matter how tightly it may be cinched; then, too,
animals with tucked-up bellies are " poor keepers," and go to
pieces quickly in the field. On the other hand, " pot-bellied "
animals, as a rule, are narrow and flat in the chest ( " slab-
sided"), usually poor stayers, and are generally of a sluggish
disposition.
CARE OF SADDLE ANIMALS. 137
469. The problem in the field is to keep the back in good
condition. A sore back means a led horse, and for riding pur-
poses a useless one.
It is believed that with fair care in saddling, riding, and un-
saddling an animal of decent saddle conformation, a continuous
march of 2,000 miles and more, at the usual rate, with the pack
up, can be made without a gall. This supposes, of course, that
there is a sufficiency of forage to keep the animal in fair condi-
tion of flesh.
Blanket.
470. The blanket should, if possible, be kept dry and free
from sand, caked dandruff, and hairs. It should be frequently
shaken out and well switched, if necessary, lo retore its plia-
bility and remove dust and hair. In warm weather, when the
animal sweats freely, a fresh, clean bearing surface on the
blanket should be placed next to the back.
It is not a good plan to dry the sweat-soaked surface of a
folded blanket in the sun and put this dried surface next the
back the following morning. Such drying hardens the dandruff
mixed with sweat and dust that is always present, and makes
this part of the blanket rough and hard. It is preferable to
double the sweat-soaked folded blanket on itself, so it will
remain moist and soft.
To keep the back and saddle blanket clean and the latter free
from sweat, a piece of smooth canvas, slightly smaller than the
folded blanket, and placed next to the skin, will be found to
give satisfactory results. This piece of canvas should never be
washed, but should be allowed to become smooth and slick.
Before placing the blanket on the back, be sure that both
are free from sand and dust, and that the mane lies properly.
Place the blanket in position in such a manner that it will not
disturb the mane or ruffle the hair of saddle bed, and be sure
there are no wrinkles in any of its folds.
Saddle.
471. It is of importance that the saddle fit the rider as well
as the horse.
A saddle too large for the rider may not be objectionable,
if stirrups are of the proper length, but a saddle with too small
138 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
a seat causes the rider to place undue weight over the cantle
arch. This uneven distribution of weight causes the rear of
the bars to bore into the muscles of the posterior portion of
saddle bed and to induce " cantle sores," or so-called " kidney
sores."
A saddle too large for the animal may press on the thinly
covered ribs when he becomes low in flesh. Doubling the
blanket will not save him from the inevitable gall. As such a
saddle sits lower on the back as the animal's condition becomes
low, the pommel arch will, if withers are high, cause contusion
there, and may produce a fistula.
In selecting a saddle, secure one that will not be too large
for the animal when he becomes thin, and that will not be too
small in the seat to properly accommodate the rider.
Saddling.
472. There is no hard and fast rule for placing a saddle in
position on the back. The saddle place is determined by the
animal's conformation, and will sooner or later, during the
morning, take that place irrespective of tight cinching. On
backs of good saddle conformation, however, the saddle if too
tightly cinched may interfere with the free play of the shoulder
blades, when placed too far forward in the first instance, and
may remain for a sufficient length of time in this objectionable
position to cause lameness by the irritation of the muscles that
run from the upper part of shoulder to the bones of the arms.
The saddle should not be placed too far to the rear, for two
reasons: First, on most backs it causes it to tilt forward and
bore into the muscles back of the withers; second, this position
brings the cincha back on the " floating " ribs, where it will
compress them, thus interfering with the proper expansion of
the lungs.
The saddle being placed in the proper position, determined
by the conformation, and on the blanket, which should be with-
out the suspicion of a wrinkle, the rider should see to it that
all straps, buckles, and lashings are free of the bars, that the
bars rest only on the blanket, and that the pack on pommel
and cantle does not rest on the withers nor the back.
CARE OF SADDLE ANIMALS. 139
It should now be seen to that the quarter straps are evenly
adjusted, and that there are no wrinkles or rough places on the
ring safes.
Cinching.
473. The cincha should not be unduly tightened. Tight
cinching causes young animals to rear and even throw them-
selves. It induces local swellings and galls, by interfering with
the circulation, and it teaches all saddle animals to inflate the
lungs ("swell themselves") the moment they feel the touch of
the cincha. On cold mornings tight cinching causes even old
saddlers to buck.
Take up the cincha gently and draw it snugly, then secure it
temporarily. Adjust your stirrups and see that they are of
equal length. This can be judged by standing in front of the
animal and comparing one with the other. It will be found
that from the often repeated mounting and dismounting on the
near side the stirrup leather of that side will usually be found
longer than the other. Having adjusted things generally, re-
turn to the cincha and take up the slack that will now be found,
draw it snugly but not tightly, and secure it, being careful that
there are no wrinkles in the strap and that the cincha itself
does not encroach on the quarter strap ring shield. If it does,
either the cincha strap is too long on the off side or the cincha
is too long. In either event, make the necessary correction at
once, if possible. If this correction is not made soon, a gall
may be expected.
Unsaddling.
474. On arriving in camp and having dismounted, ease off
the cincha about 3 inches and change the bearing of the saddle
by moving it to rear or front at least an inch. Allow the saddle
to remain on the back for ten or twelve minutes, to enable the
almost bloodless skin beneath (caused by weight of yourself
and pack) and the tired saddle bed muscles to regain to some
extent their lost tone, while you busy yourself about the bridle
and halter, and the religious duty of closely examining the feet
for loose shoes, rocks, nails, bruises, thrush, and interfering
sores. Now remove the saddle, turn over the blanket, and let
that remain in place until the back has dried.
140 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
475. If any dry spots are noticed on the sweaty skin while
the blanket is being turned over, remember they are inflamma-
tions of the skin, produced by unequal distribution of weight,
and are liable to puff up later if not attended to. Mark their lo-
cation well, for you are close to the walking stage if you neglect
them. When the back is dry, remove the blanket and take care
of it. Massage well from front to rear the spots referred to,
bathe the saddle bed with clean water, dry it, and let the ani-
mal roll if he will. Should small swellings appear, however,
keep the blanket in place until a soaking wet gunny sack is
procured. Now remove the blanket, massage the swelling vigor-
ously, and put the wet folded gunny-sack pack over the back
and secure it there. Do not allow the animal to roll if it can
be avoided, and keep the pack wet during the night. In the
majority of cases the animal will be ready for careful saddling
in the morning.
476. should you have produced a gall, the place should be
bathed and disinfected with a creolin or carbolic-acid solution
(1 ounce to the quart of water), the spot protected from the
flies, cold-packed if necessary, and the animal led until nature
effects a cure. Close attention to cleanliness, disinfection, and
stimulation of the wound will hasten the process. Use a solu-
tion of aloes or alum in water (one-half ounce of either to a
pint of water) as a stimulant.
477. Even with very close attention to saddling, galls may
be produced if the rider is not a careful one.
Irrespective of the fit of the saddle and condition of blanket,
the things that cause galls and " bunches " most frequently
are carelessness in balancing and securing the pack, a loung-
ing, shifting seat, and a sloppy method of handling the reins,
inattention to proper cinching, unequal length of stirrups,
neglect of adjustment at the halts, the riding of a lame animal,
and the galloping of a leg-weary one.
Bitting.
478. Use a snaffle in preference to a curb, and adjust it so
that it will not elevate the corners of the lips. When a bit and
bridoon are used, let the bit hang somewhat lower than the
bridoon. Adjust the curb strap or chain properly, and be sure
that the animal is comfortably fitted.
CAEE OF PACK ANIMALS. 141
The inside of the lower jaw is often injured by ignorant
handling of the curb rein. These injuries appear above the
bridle teeth or " tusks " and present inflamed places that some-
times exhibit ulcers. Quite often the bone is splintered. Less
frequently the under part of the jaw, in the vicinity of the curb
groove, is bruised and perhaps fractured more or less com-
pletely.
Any of these conditions may be made manifest by the animal
" fighting the bit," " throwing the head," or rearing.
479. These injuries should be treated by putting the animal
on a snaffle at once and placing it high enough in the mouth to
avoid any pressure on the injured parts. If ulcers appear, wash
them out frequently with a saturated solution of boracic acid.
When the bone is splintered it is usually a serious matter, and
the parts should not be interfered with by the inexperienced.
CHAPTER V. CARE OF PACK ANIMALS.
480. The selection of a properly shaped pack animal for
use under the aparejo is a difficult one to the novice, but it can
be made with ease by one who has an intimate knowledge of the
conditions under which such an animal must serve.
481. The pack animal should be between 14 hands and 1 inch
and 15 hands in height. He should be of a chunky build, pos-
sessing a strong, fairly straight, well-shaped back. His withers
should not be high, nor sharp ; neither should they be low
enough to slope the back to the front, and his weight should be
in the neighborhood of 975 pounds.
Too small an animal will not " stand up " under the usual
pack load of 250 pounds.
Too tall an animah will be inconvenient to pack, as the cargo
must of necessity be elevated by one man on each side of him.
482. Having a pack animal of good conformation to begin
with, understanding the construction of the aparejo and being
familiar with the method of " setting up," " ribbing," and stuff-
ing it, and of breaking it in to a particular animal, it is be-
lieved that the withers, sides, belly, elbows, loins, and dock of
the animal to which a well-fitting aparejo pertains may be kept
free of " bunches " and galls under ordinary service conditions
in the field.
142 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
483. In an organization where the art of properly "ribbing,"
stuffing, and fitting an aparejo is more or less of a mystery, it is
only a question of a few days on the march, even with light
cargoes, until many of the pack animals will be unable to trans-
port a burden, on account of the quickly appearing galls, sores,
and " bunches " produced by faulty distribution of the sticks,
which may be either too large or too small. The wrong kind of
hay, or too much or too little of it may be used in the stuffing.
The aparejo itself may be too deep, too shallow, or too narrow.
484. Should the wrong kind of hay be used for stuffing pur-
poses it is apt to cake or wad in a day or two. Should too much
hay, even of the soft, crisp variety, be used, it will cause the
aparejo to flare or stand out and lose its grip on the body of the
animal. Should too little of the hay be introduced it will not
provide sufficient protection for the animal's ribs.
485. If the aparejo should be too deep, it will have a ten-
dency to wrap itself around the belly and cause belly sores.
Should it be too shallow it will ride too high, be defective in
grip and drift to the front or rear, depending on the kind of
trail traveled. Should the " ribbing " sticks be too stiff, or
taper in the wrong direction, they will not adapt themselves to
the shape of the animal's frame, and if too slender they will
lack spring enough to keep the weight off the ribs.
486. When the corona is neglected, or improperly scraped
and cleaned, it may cause irritation of the skin. The same is
true of the crupper.
487. The proper "ribbing," stuffing, and packing of the
aparejo is an art that can only be acquired during a long ap-
prenticeship. Throwing the " diamond " hitch, the sole stock in
trade of some men, is but a small part of the packer's art, and
may be learned in two lessons by even a dull intellect.
Keeping the animals on the trail day after day, each one
carrying his load, in good health and sound body, is a problem
for an expert packer.
488. In a supply pack train on the march the cargoes, as a
rule, decrease in w eight from day to day as rations, ammuni-
tion, and forage are expended, and this is taken advantage of
to favor weak or galled animals. In organizations where the
cargo is fixed by regulations, the weight is usually 235 pounds,
and is seldom reduced. It follows, as a matter of course, that
CAEE OF PACK ANIMALS. 143
the latter pack outfit, even though it may be small in numbers,
demands closer attention to the warding off of galls than the
former.
489. When an aparejo of the size suitable to the animal is
properly fitted to a particular animal, and by fitting is meant its
close adjustment to the animal's frame in the same manner as
a shoe of the proper size conforms to the inequalities of the
human foot when well broken in, never change it to another
with a view to packing unless absolutely necessary, and not even
then until it has been restuffed, perhaps reribbed, and thor-
oughly broken in to the new conformation. Neglect of these
precautions will be productive of serious mischief.
490. The disabling conditions, caused by the aparejo, to be
guarded against are bruised withers, galled elbows, belly sores,
crupper galls, and loin and back sores.
491. Contusion of withers is the result of undue height of
same, too narrow or too wide a collar arch, lack of sufficient
stuffing in front under arch, improperly balanced top load, de-
fective conformation of animal, and drifting of aparejo. Con-
tusion of withers is a serious matter. The pressure should be
removed at once, and the entire withers covered with a cold-
water pack. A folded gunny sack, kept well saturated with
water and secured in place, will produce good results in allay-
ing inflammation. If a fistula should form, usually indicated
by a running sore, the animal, as a rule, becomes unfit for pack
purposes thereafter.
492. Galled elbows are due to contact with the cincha. When
a properly adjusted cincha infringes on the elbow and produces
galls, it shows that the aparejo has been placed too far forward,
or that the animal's conformation is defective (" soldier toed").
Packers generally adjust the aparejo so that the cincha passes
about If inches behind points of elbow.
Treatment of elbow galls consists in freeing them of the irri-
tating cause and keeping them clean. They heal rapidly.
493. Crupper galls, in open country, indicate that the aparejo
is either too long or too short. If too long it will wrap around
the chest to some extent and develop a tendency to drift for-
ward, thus putting undue strain on the crupper. Should the
aparejo be too short it will be defective in body grip, and will
shift from side to side, especially with a top load. This sway-
144 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
ing will cause the crupper to act as a saw. Should a properly
fitting aparejo cause crupper galls, they may be traced to too
tight lacing of the latter, or by too much stuffing of the aparejo
in the boots. The overstuffing near the boots weakens the grip
on the body.
Treat crupper galls by proper adjustment of aparejo, thorough
cleaning of wounds, and the application of a solution of aloes
in water (one-half ounce to the pint). If these galls are severe,
wash, after cleaning and before applying the aloes, with a cre-
olin solution of 1 ounce to the quart of water.
494. Loin or kidney sores are due to the aparejo drifting to
the rear, an unusual condition except in hilly country; or to
placing it improperly on the back and holding it there by means
of the crupper, or by the unequal distribution of the cargo.
These kidney sores readily respond to treatment when the
cause is removed. A cold water padk (wet gunny sack) soon
relieves the inflammation.
495. Belly sores are the result of too tight cinching. The
fit of the aparejo has considerable influence on the cinching,
for should the aparejo flare at the boots from overstuffing, it
will not conform to the shape of the animal, and undue cinch-
ing will have to be resorted to to hold it in place. With very
tight cinching a patch of skin on the under part of the chest
may have its circulation entirely stopped; in such an event a
piece of dead skin may come away when the cinch is taken off
and leave a nasty wound. Proper size of aparejo and proper
"ribbing" and stuffing should be the preventive. Cleanliness,
disinfection, protection from dust and flies, and the application
of a weak solution of aloes or alum in water (one-half ounce
of either to the pint) will give good results in the line of treat-
ment.
496. Body sores, galls, and swellings, the most disabling of
all aparejo troubles, are caused by the following: Bad confor-
mation, unequal pressure, wrong " ribbing," careless stuffing,
imperfectly broken-in aparejo, aparejo too short, aparejo too
narrow, careless packing, overloading, and unwieldly top load.
497. Swellings are due to interference with the circulation
of the skin at the particular spot, for at that spot the extreme
pressure lowers the tone of the small blood vessels, which,
when pressure is suddenly released, become engorged with the
CAKE OF PACK ANIMALS. 145
constituents of the blood, and remain so engorged until the tone
is regained. If the tone should not be regained the swelling
will persist, the skin there will mummify and a sitfast or cal-
lous will form. Should the circulation be entirely stopped and
the small blood vessels become paralyzed, a patch of skin will
slough off (mortify) and leave an angry-looking wound more
or less deep.
Simple galls are due to rubbing or chafing of the part.
498. When putting on the aparejo, see to it that the corona
is right side front, clean and smooth, and that the aparejo
itself belongs to the animal on which it is put. A general rule
can not be laid down for packing and cinching, and experience
must be the teacher.
499. On reaching camp, remove the cargo in a leisurely man-
ner, relax the cincha, and allow the cinched aparejo to remain
in place for 15 minutes or so, until the circulation of the skin
of the back is restored to the normal and the parts under the
aparejo become gradually cool. When the aparejo is at length
removed, examine the back for swellings, and massage them
from front to rear, to cause them to disappear. Apply a cold
water pack, if necessary, and keep it wet and securely in
place.
500. Very often fairly large swellings may be reduced by
simply putting a dry blanket over the back and immediately
replacing the aparejo and cinching it snugly.
501. When a swelling persists, or when it is evident that
there is undue pressure on a particular spot, the aparejo should
be chambered on the bearing surface over that spot. Chamber-
ing consists in taking out the stuffing at the spot indicated, so
as to relieve the pressure. This chambering is done by insert-
ing the hand in the handhole and carefully withdrawing the
stuffing at the place selected. To accurately locate the place
where the chambering is needed, apply a little wet clay over
the swelling and then put on the bare aparejo and fit it into
its proper place and roll it slightly from near to off side. The
wet clay over the swelling will adhere to the leather and mark
the exact spot sought for.
502. It is the custom in some pack trains to " pack out " the
" bunches " by means of light loads. This treatment is effective
only when the small blood vessels have not entirely lost their
82940 11 10
146 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
tone. Where a sitfast or callous forms, or where a slough
takes place, there is no simple remedy to take the place of the
operation and energetic treatment indicated.
503. The pressure of the unpacked aparejo, massage, and
cold water packing are to be relied on when body " bunches "
appear.
In all cases, where practicable, relieve the suffering animal
from weight of cargo. A rest of 24 hours may restore him to
work.
Wounds of the back should be kept clean and protected from
dust and flies.
504. When it is not intended to carry loads, mules should
not be tightly cinched. A pack mule is best kept moving. At
halts of sufficient duration the loads should be removed. At
longer halts the cincha should be loosened, but only at sus-
tained halts should the mules be unharnessed.
CHAPTER VI. STABLE MANAGEMENT.
505. Foul air and dampness cause many of the diseases of
the horse, hence the importance and economy of spacious, clean,
dry, and well-ventilated stables. Ceilings should be 12 to 15
feet high, with large ventilators through the roof, and a window
or a side aperture in each stall, which should be placed well
above the horse's eyes. If possible, the building should have
no upper story or loft.
Double stalls should be not less than 9 feet wide by 10 feet
6 inches long, measured from the wall, and not less than 1,200
cubic feet of air space should be allowed to each horse in the
stable.
In stables with a loft, ventilation from the top is always in-
sufficient, and there must be side openings well above the
horses, so that the draft will pass over their heads.
These openings should not be closed, except on the windward
side, to keep out the rain or snow.
If the stable is partitioned off into single stalls, each stall
should be at least 5 feet in width, to permit the horse to lie
down without difficulty.
A picket line is established in the immediate vicinity of each
stable, the horses being tied to a manila or wire rope or chain
STABLE MANAGEMENT. 147
passed through the picket posts. There should be shallow
trenches behind the horses to carry off the rain, the ground on
which they stand having just enough slope to let water run into
the trenches, or there may be a single drain in the center along
the line of the posts. Constant attention must be given to
keeping the ground about the picket line in good order.
General Rules for Stable Management.
506. The following general rules are recommended:
The stable sergeant has immediate charge of the police and
sanitary condition of the stable, picket line, etc., and is the cus-
todian of the forage and stable property generally.
The stable is to be kept thoroughly policed, free from smells,
and, except portions of the stalls that horses can reach, should
be lime-washed. There must be no accumulation of manure or
foul litter inside, nor near the doors or windows without. The
feed boxes are washed from time to time and kept clean. The
ground about the picket line is swept daily, and all dung, etc.,
carried to the manure heap.
Except at night, when the horses are bedded down, no manure
or urine is to remain in the stalls; the stable police remove it
as it accumulates.
If practicable, all woodwork within the reach of the horses
and not protected with sheet iron or other metal, should be
painted with thin coal tar to prevent it being gnawed. The
same precaution may be followed with regard to troughs,
picket posts, and picket line. It should be thoroughly dried be-
fore putting horses near it.
Smoking in stables, or in their immediate vicinity, is pro-
hibited.
One or more lamps will be hung in each stable to burn during
the night.
The horses are stalled according to their sections ; their places
at the picket line will be in accordance with the same rule.
Over each horse's stall is placed the name of the horse under
the name of the man to whom assigned.
Clay is the best for earthen floors. Gravel or sandy earth
is not suitable.
The sloping of the floor of stalls from the manger to the heel-
post is injurious and uncomfortable for the animal, making
148 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
him stand in an unnatural position, with the forelegs higher than
the hind ones. When the earthen floors are level, the horse
will paw a hollow for his forefeet unless he can elevate his hind-
quarters by backing out of the stall.
Whenever horses go out of the stable, the windows of their
stalls are to be kept open, unless necessary to exclude rain or
snow, or when cold drafts affect the animals in contiguous or
opposite stalls.
Stable doors are never closed in daytime, except to keep out
wet or to exclude cold winds that blow on the horses. If the
doors be in a single piece, bars are put across the doorway ; if
divided into upper and lower halves, it will usually be sufficient
to open the upper part. At night the entrance to the stables
should be secured in such fnanner as will prevent the escape of
animals.
When circumstances permit, horses should be turned loose in
the corral during the daytime or herded under the charge of a
guard. When neither is practicable, they should, except in
very cold, windy weather, or in very hot weather where there
is no shade, stand most of the day at the picket line, as they
have better air and are less confined, while the stables become
drier and more healthful.
In ordinary climates, cavalry stables must be kept as cool as
possible. If the horses do not stand directly in the draft/ the
colder the stable the less will they suffer if called suddenly to
take the field. For the same reason, horses should never be
blanketed in the stable, except during very cold weather.
507. Horses require gentle treatment. Docile but bold horses
are apt to retaliate upon those who abuse them, while persistent
kindness often reclaims vicious animals.
A horse must never be kicked, or struck about the head.
At least two hours' exercise daily is necessary to the health
and good condition of horses. They should be marched a few
miles when cold weather, muddy ground, etc., prevent drill.
Horses' legs will be often hand-rubbed, particularly after
severe exercise, as this removes enlargement and relieves or
prevents stiffness.
The sheath will be washed out when necessary with warm
water and ca stile soap, and then dried with a cloth.
STABLE MANAGEMENT. 149
Sick Horses.
508. The horses on sick report are in charge of the stable
sergeant, who reports daily to the captain for instructions as
to their treatment.
The sick horses are inspected daily. The names of the horses
on sick report, and the treatment they receive, are recorded
daily in the sick book.
In treating sick horses, it is to be observed that very little medi-
cine is ordinarily required, and that unnecessary doses do a great
deal of harm.
If a horse sustains an injury, neglects his feed, refuses to
drink, or gives any evidence of sickness, it will be at once re-
ported.
No horse on sick report will be taken from the stable or
picket line for exercise or work without permission from proper
authority.
509. If there be at any time a suspicious discharge from one
or both nostrils of an animal, it must be immediately reported.
To prevent contagion to man or beast, an animal that shows
any decided symptom of glanders is to be isolated at once, and
confined or tied up in some locality where no other animal can
approach him.
510. A glandered horse should be killed as soon as possible.
The stall in which he stood is torn down and all the woodwork
burned and the ironwork disinfected, or otherwise it is closed,
and must remain empty until the rack, manger, and every part
of the iron and wood work, as also the vessels used in watering
and feeding, and his saddle and bit have been three or four
times thoroughly washed with a 5 per cent solution of carbolic
acid or a 1 to 1,000 solution of corrosive sublimate ; all parts
to which the latter has been applied should be thoroughly
scrubbed with hot water to remove all traces of the poisonous
salt. The application of a lime wash to all the stalls, after
complete disinfection, will be desirable. Small articles, such as
bits, etc., can be disinfected by keeping them immersed for a
half hour in boiling water. All articles of little value that have
been used with a glandered horse, such as halters, bridles,
horse cloths, saddlecloths, blankets, nosebags, currycombs,
brushes, etc., should be destroyed.
150 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
Stables occupied by infected or suspected horses should be
disinfected daily by washing exposed surfaces with a 5 per cent
solution of carbolic acid, and nosebags, halters, buckets used for
drinking water, etc., should be carefully washed with the same
solution or with boiling water.
511. Drugs and dressings sufficient, under ordinary condi-
tions of field service, for 100 animals for one month :
Boracic acid : 4 ounces, saturated solution, for disinfection of
wounds of eye and vicinity.
Carbolic acid: 16 ounces. A solution of 1 ounce to 1 quart
of water to disinfect wounds of body.
Alcohol : 1 quart ; 2 ounces in pint of water as a quick stimu-
lant.
Aloes: 20 ounces; 1 ounce as a cathartic; \ ounce to pint of
water stimulates wounds.
Alum: 4 ounces; \ ounce to pint of water acts as a nice stimu-
lant to wounds.
Ammonia, aromatic spirits of: 16 ounces; 2 ounces in pint of
water a quick stimulant.
Ammonia, solution of: 8 ounces; used to make liniments.
Paimabis Indica : 16 ounces ; % ounce to the dose in cases of
colic to relieve pain.
Pharcoal: 8 ounces; used to dust on exposed wounds.
Posmoline: 2 pounds; used to make ointments.
Pivolin: 1 pound; 1 ounce to quart of water as a disinfectant
for wounds.
Ether, nitrous: 16 ounces; 2 ounces in pint of water as a stimu-
lant.
Iodine crystals : 2 ounces, with which to make a saturated solu-
tion or tincture for application to sprains.
Popper sulphate: 1 ounce, to cut down granulations (proud
flesh).
Mercury, bichloride tablets : 1 ounce ; 1 tablet in pint of water
as a disinfectant for wounds.
Olive oil : 1 pint, with which to make liniments.
Turpentine: 1 pint, to make liniments.
Tar, oil of: 4 ounces, with which to make ointments.
DRESSINGS.
Absorbent cotton : \ pound, for eye pads.
Antiseptic gauze: 1 package, for dressing of wounds.
STABLE MANAGEMENT. 151
Oakum : 3 pounds, to be used in dressing wounds.
Red flannel bandages : 1 dozen.
White cotton bandages : 2 dozen.
Silk thread: % ounce.
Soap, ca stile: 1 pound.
Sponges: 4, small.
Adhesive plaster : 1 roll.
INSTRUMENTS, ETC.
1 farrier's case.
1 thermometer.
1 twitch.
1 drenching bottle.
4 small bottles and corks.
1 tin basin.
2 quart bottles and corks.
30 sheets tissue paper.
A liniment : Olive oil. 3 ounces ; turpentine, 2 ounces ; ammonia
(solution of), 2 ounces. Mix well. Apply with slight fric-
tion.
A stimulant : Aromatic spirits ammonia, 2 ounces ; alcohol, 1
ounce ; water, 16 ounces. Mix. Give as a draught.
A good dusting powder for wounds : Air-slaked lime, 16 ounces ;
powdered charcoal, 2 ounces. Mix. Dust on open wounds.
An ointment : Oil of tar, 1 ounce ; creolin, \ ounce ; cosmoline,
6 ounces. Mix.
512. The captain is responsible for the proper performance
of stable duty in his company.
A noncommissioned officer, designated as siable sergeant, or
corpora/, is detailed in each company to take immediate general
charge of the forage and stables. He is held responsible for
the proper policing and sanitary condition of the stable, picket
line, and ground pertaining to them. Two or more men, called
stab/e police, are detailed for the purpose of policing, removing
manure, feeding, etc., under the direction of the stable sergeant.
Usually horses are groomed twice daily, at morning and at
evening stables, under the supervision of the first sergeant and
a commissioned officer. Under special circumstances, it may be
advisable to groom only once a day.
The stable police, after grooming their own horses at morn-
ing stables, clean out the stalls and police the stable, under the
152 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DUTY, ETC.
direction of the stable sergeant. The bedding is taken up, that
which is much soiled being separated from the manure heap,
and the remainder put on the litter racks or spread upon the
ground to dry.
At or before evening stables the stable is policed, the bedding
is laid down and fresh straw spread on top of it ; the bed must
be soft and even, with the thickest part toward the manger;
where horses eat their bedding, the old litter should be placed
on top of the new straw.
Grooming.
513. The grooming is always done at the picket line, except
in stormy weather. Stable call is the first call or warning call
for stables, and precedes assembly by such interval as may be
prescribed. The roll having been called, the company is
marched to the horses or stable, and upon arrival there the first
sergeant commands, Commence grooming, by sections; fall out.
The horses are then tied on the picket line, if not already there,
and are groomed under the direction of the chiefs of sections.
Each man habitually grooms his own horse, except that the
horses of the first sergeant and master signal electricians may,
at the discretion of the company commander, be groomed by
the men of the section to which these horses are attached.
Drivers and wagoners groom the animals assigned to them.
For the purpose of proper supervision in grooming, feeding,
etc., the horses of the men not assigned to sections and other
supernumerary horses, will be attached to sections.
At stables each man examines his horse's feet. Horses re-
quiring shoeing are reported to the noncommissioned officer in
charge of the section, who notifies the stable sergeant.
Each horse should be groomed not less than 20 minutes, and
as much longer as may be necessary. When the horses of any
section are sufficiently groomed, the chief of section reports
that fact to the first sergeant. The section, at the discretion of
the company commander, may then lead in, and the horses will
be led to their stalls and properly secured under the supervision
of the chief of section. Should the officer wish to inspect the
horses of any section or of the whole company before they are
led in, he will notify the chief of section or the first sergeant,
who will then command : Cease grooming; stand to heel. When
all the horses have been groomed and led in, and the grooming
STABLE MANAGEMENT. 153
kits put away, the first sergeant will form the company, march
it to the company parade, and dismiss it.
If, when the horses are inspected, the officer finds any of them
not properly groomed, he will direct that these horses be left
at the picket line and groomed under the supervision of a non-
commissioned officer detailed for that purpose.
To Groom.
514. The horse's feet are first thoroughly cleaned with the
hoof pick. Then take the currycomb in the right hand, fingers
over back of comb ; begin at the near side at the upper part of
the neck, thence proceed to the chest, arms, shoulders, back,
belly, flank, loins, and croup in the order named. Then go to
the off side, taking the comb in the left hand, and proceed as
before.
The currycomb is applied gently and is used only to loosen
the scurf and matted hair ; it is not used on the legs from the
knees or hocks downward, except to carefully loosen dried mud.
Next, take the brush in the left hand and change the curry-
comb to the right; begin at the head and then the neck on the
near side, and proceed in the same order as in currying, brush-
ing also the parts not touched by the comb ; on the off side
take the brush in the right hand, the currycomb in the left.
The principal working of the brush should follow the direction
of the hair, but in places difficult to clean it may be necessary
to brush against it, finishing by leaving the hair smooth. After
every few strokes clean the brush of dust with the currycomb.
Having finished with the brush, rub or dust off the horse with
the grooming cloth, wipe out the eyes, ears, and nostrils, and
clean the dock. The skin under the flank and between the hind
quarters must be soft, clean, and free from dust.
Currycombs, cards, or common combs must never be applied
to the mane or tail ; the brush, fingers, and cloth are freely used
on both. Straw is used when the horse comes in wet from
exercise, rubbing against the hair until dry, from his hind quar-
ters up to his head. If very wet, very hot, or very cold, blanket
the horse, groom and hand-rub the legs; then remove the
blanket and groom the body.
Feeding.
515. In garrison it is recommended that grain be fed by the
stable sergeant, assisted by one or two members of the stable
154 CARE OF ANIMALS, STABLE DITTY, ETC.
guard or police at first call for reveille. The grain, in a box on
wheels, is rolled opposite the stalls, whence it is transferred to
the feeding boxes by allowance measures. Grain is fed again
at evening stables as in the morning, but not until the hay has
been distributed and the stable swept out and the dust thor-
oughly settled.
In camp or on the march grain is fed morning and evening.
The men are marched to the forage wagons or other grain de-
pository, where the noncommissioned officer in charge, with an
allowance measure, issues to each in turn.
The chiefs of sections then march their sections back to the
horses and command : Feed. Ordinarily one man of each sec-
tion will remain near the horses until they have done eating, to
adjust nose bags. Each man may be required to feed and groom
as soon as he has received his grain.
In garrison hay is usually fed in the evening, but when the
horses are kept in the stables during the entire day a portion
is fed in the morning. The dust must be well shaken out of
the hay before it is put in the mangers.
In camp hay is fed at the picket line morning, noon, and
evening; on the march, when the horses are grazed during the
day. in the evening only.
The use of bran once or twice a week is important for stable
horses. In spring or early summer they should be grazed.
Two and a half ounces of salt should be given each week,
preferably lumps of rock salt, secured in or near the manger.
When forage can not be obtained, grazing should be allowed
at every spare moment, both in camp and at halts on the march.
The daily allowance of oats, barley, or corn is 12 pounds to
each horse and 9 pounds to each mule; that of hay, 14 pounds
to each animal ; the allowance of straw for bedding is 100
pounds a month to each animal.
516. Good oats weigh about 40 pounds to the bushel; barley,
about 48 pounds; corn, about 56 pounds. Pressed hay weighs
about 11 pounds to the cubic foot.
The standard bushel in the United States contains 2,150.4
cubic inches. A cubic yard contains 21.69 bushels. A box 16
by 16.8 by 8 inches holds 1 bushel ; a box 8 by 8.4 by 8 inches
holds 1 peck ; a box 8 by 8 by 4.2 inches holds one-half peck, or
4 quarts.
STABLE MANAGEMENT. 155
Watering.
517. Horses must be watered quietly and without confusion;
the manner in which this duty is performed is often a good
test of the discipline of a mounted command.
Horses are to be led to and from water at a walk. At the
drinking place no horse should be hurried or have his head
jerked up from the water.
In the field or on the march the watering is from the most
convenient running water ; in garrison it is usually from troughs,
which should be cleaned each day. In warm weather water
drawn from a cold well or spring should stand long enough for
the chill to pass off.
The horses are watered under the immediate direction of the
chiefs of sections, but if they are liable to meet those of other
commands at the watering place a commissioned officer should
supervise this duty.
Horses should be watered before feeding or not until two
hours after feeding. Ordinarily they should be watered twice
a day ; in hot weather three times a day. In very cold weather
once a day, about noon, is sufficient. A horse will rarely drink
freely very early in the morning.
If a mounted command have to march a long distance without
water, so that it will be necessary to encamp en route, the
animals are fed, and denied water until just before starting,
when they are permitted to drink freely. The command
marches in the afternoon and does not encamp until it has ac-
complished at least half of the distance, and moves early next
morning to reach water.
Watering the horses on the march depends in a great meas-
ure upon the facilities to be had. If nothing is known as to
the country over which the day's march is to be made, water
call should be sounded shortly before leaving the camp and
every horse given an opportunity to drink. As many animals,
however, will not drink at an early hour, or until after exercis-
ing, the horses should be watered at the first opportunity. On
severe marches frequent watering is of great benefit.
The daily allowance of water for a horse at rest is about 6
gallons ; when at work, from 8 to 12 gallons ; for a man, 1 gal-
lon for all purposes. One gallon of fresh water weighs 8$
pounds, approximately 1 pint to 1 pound.
PART V.
TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
CHAPTER I. GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
518. The primary function of the Signal Corps is the trans-
mission of information and orders affecting tactical and. strate-
gical situations. This will be constantly kept in view in all
drill-ground and school training.
When by reason of the exposed nature of the duty assigned
to any signal detachment an escort becomes necessary, an
application therefor will be made to the proper authority.
519. A signal officer should seek to maintain the most in-
timate official relations with his commanding officer and the
latter's staff, and to be completely in his confidence, in order
to obtain the earliest possible information of all intended move-
ments and the probable course of events as far as can be fore-
seen. The prompt establishment of lines of information will
be greatly influenced by this cooperation.
520. In order that the condition of the equipment may be
such as to insure the efficient operation of all lines of informa-
tion at all times, the equipment will be frequently inspected,
under direction of the company commander.
521. Officers only will use the telephone on field lines, and
then only in such cases where the same ends could not be
attained by written messages. Operators are not permitted to
receive verbal messages for transmission. Operators when
directed otherwise by officers will, before obeying, respectfully
invite the officer's attention to this rule, and report the circum-
stance and the name of the officer to the signal officer in charge
of the line. Written messages may in case of necessity be
transmitted by telephone, and in all such cases the entire mes-
sage will be repeated back.
522. The company commander should secure such distribu-
tion of his company, whether in camp, on the march, or in
combat, as will meet every probable contingency that may arise.
Orders to his subordinates should contain all the information
relative to the commanders and organizations between which
156
GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 157
lines of information are to be established, the terrain over which
they are ordered to operate, the number and location of sta-
tions, and the equipment to be carried by them as may be
necessary to insure a thorough understanding of their mission.
The general principles and rules governing the composition and
forms of field orders as laid down in the Field Service Regu-
lations should be followed.
Field Lines.
523. The lines of information established and maintained by
field companies and battalions are tactical lines, and are gen-
erally designated field lines. They are intended to furnish a
quick, safe, and reliable means of transmitting information
and orders between the headquarters of the field army and the
divisions and auxiliary troops of which it is composed, and
within the divisions.
524. The means of transmission over such lines of informa-
ation may be electrical, as by wireless telegraph, buzzer, and
telephone, or visual, as with the heliograph, lantern, rockets,
etc., or by messenger.
Visual signaling will be used only when the nature of the
terrain or atmospheric conditions or lack of equipment pre-
clude the possibility of electrical signaling. The flag and helio-
graph are used for signaling during the day. At night the
acetylene lamp, rockets, and the Very pistol may be used, but
they will not be resorted to except upon the failure of electrical
signaling. The possibility of interception by the enemy and
the likelihood of disclosing our own position will cause this
class of signaling to be used with caution.
Messengers will be used when other methods have been found
impracticable or have suddenly failed.
525. Signal officers should be skilled in the use of the cipher,
so that they may assist officers in enciphering and deciphering
messages.
The advantages of sending messages in cipher, when there is
danger of their falling into the hands of the enemy, or when it
is desired to maintain secrecy in our own forces, should be
pointed out to all officers.
526. The commanding officer must be kept in communication
with such parts of his command as he considers necessary, at
all hazards.
158 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
527. Field lines between the headquarters of the field army
and the divisions should start from the headquarters of the
field army and move forward with the current. Similarly,,
lines to be established within the division should start from
division headquarters, although exceptional conditions may
sometimes make the reverse necessary.
528. The field lines connecting the various elements of a
field army form one system, which is controlled from field army
headquarters. The lines from the division commander to his
subordinates form a separate system, which is controlled from
division headquarters. Interference with any part of either
of these systems by others than those charged with their con-
trol may cause serious complications. Stations will therefore
not be closed or moved, nor will lines be discontinued without
directions from the source of control. When, under exceptional
c ire um stances, it becomes necessary to move or close a station
or discontinue a line, a brief report of the proposed action will
be made before the change is accomplished, when practicable;
otherwise a report of the circumstances will be made as soon
thereafter as practicable.
529. Whenever practicable, a reserve of equipment will be
kept on hand to provide for a sudden move of the headquarters
or other station. For this reason the company commander must
take every opportunity to reel up wire no longer used. This can
often be done as the action progresses or after a move of head-
quarters.
530. Brigade and subordinate commanders will ordinarily
provide their own internal communication.
53 1. Signal officers will endeavor to inform themselves of
the tactical situation and the plans of their commanding officer
before establishing a field line. Field lines should never be
established without an order from competent authority when
it is not impracticable to obtain such an order.
532. When a wire line is discontinued, every effort will be
made to recover the wire, and wire or material will not be
abandoned unless its recovery has become impracticable.
Buzzer wire will be used for short lines where it is imprac-
ticable or unsafe to lay a line with the wire cart, because such
lines are hard to see and easily broken.
533. When lines are laid within the zone of fire or observa-
tion of the enemy, the men laying the lines will take advantage
GENERAL PRINCIPLES,
159
of cover to conceal their position and movements. Sections
should not be placed in positions exposed to the enemy, nor, on
the other hand, in places where it will be difficult for those
for whose use the line is established to find them readily.
534. Messages transmitted over all lines of information will
be written on the prescribed message blank. The time and
place of sending and receiving will be accurately noted, and
messages will be numbered, checked, and recorded, and a carbon
copy thereof retained, in accordance with the regulations pre-
scribed therefor.
535. The following message blank is prescribed for the trans-
mission of messages in the field :
U. S. Army Field Message.
Communicated by buzzer, phone, tele-
graph, wireless, lantern, helio, flag,
cyclist, foot messenger, mounted mes-
senger.
Underscore means used.
No.
by.
Sent Time. Rec'd Time. Check.
by.
This space for signal operators only.
From (name of sending detachment
here).
At (location of sending detachment
here).
Date Hour No
To_
Received-
160 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
This blank is 4f by 6| inches, including the margin on the
left for binding. The back is ruled in squares and provided
with scales for use in making simple sketches explanatory of
the message. It is issued by the Signal Corps in blocks of 40
with duplicating sheets.
536. The regulation envelope is 3 by 5i inches, and is printed
as follows:
U. S. ARMY FIELD MESSAGE.
To No .,
(For signal o'perators only.)
When sent
Name of operator
When and by whom received.
This envelope will be returned to bearer.
537. Whether a message shall be sent by signaling or mes-
senger will be determined by the length of the message and the
distance to which it is to be sent.
538. Messages will be transmitted in the order of their filing.
When under exceptional circumstances an officer filing a mes-
sage considers it necessary for his message to have precedence
over messages previously filed, he will be informed by the opera-
tor of this general rule, and that it can only be violated by direc-
tion of the commanding officer for whose use the station has
been established.
539. The right to the use of the line between several oper-
ators shall be determined by the signal officer or operator in
charge of the central station.
540. In cases permitting of no delay whatever in the trans-
mission of a message, the use of the wire will be obtained by
means of the signal " 9."
CHAPTER II. INSTRUCTION IN GARRISON.
Genera/ Rules.
541. Instruction in The School of the Soldier, dismounted,
mounted, and in signaling, will be conducted simultaneously,
with the exception that telegraphy will not be taught until the
INSTRUCTION IN GARRISON.
161
recruit is proficient in the Myer code. Short drills in each will
be carried on to avoid undue fatigue.
542. Signaling instruction will include visual signaling, teleg-
raphy, the simple principles involved in construction, operation,
and repair of the electrical instruments used in the company,
with a complete training in Signal Corps field duties. Only
men capable of taking the advanced course in electricity will be
given it; and these with a view to promotion to first-class ser-
geants and master signal electricians.
The Signal Corps manuals will be used in company and post
schools; and for advanced work such additional textbooks in
electricity and aeronautics as may be prescribed by higher
authority.
543. All men excepting cooks and mechanics will be in-
structed in visual signaling, as far as practicable.
Such men as show adaptability for the work will be given a
course in wireless telegraphy.
Visual Signaling.
544. The recruit will first be taught the alphabet in the
Myer code, with numerals, abbreviations, and conventional sig-
nals, the correct positions of the flag, and the correct method of
setting up and adjusting the heliograph and lantern.
545. The Myer code, abbreviations, and conventional signals:
A
22
O .
21
B
2112
P...
1212
c
121
Q
1211
D
222
R
211
E
12
S ..
212
F
2221
T
2
G
. 2211
U
112
II
122
V
1222
I
.. . 1
W..
1121
J
1122
x
2122
K.
. 2121
Y
.. Ill
L
221
z
2222
M
1221
tion
1112
N...
11
NUMERALS.
3....
. 1112
4. . ...
2221
5
1122
ft
2211
7
J999 v
2111
9...
.. 1221 0...
., 2112
82940 11-
-11
162
TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
ABBREVIATIONS.
a after t the
b before u you
c can ur your
h have w word
n not wi with
r are y yes
CONVENTIONAL SIGNALS.
End of word 3
End of sentence 33
End of message 333
Numerals follow (or) numerals end xx3
Signature follows sig 3
Error 12 12 3
Acknowledgment, or " I understand " 22 22 3
Cease signaling 22 22 22 333
Cipher follows (or) cipher ends 2122 121 3
Wait a moment 1111 3
Repeat after (word) 121 121 3 22 3 (word)
Repeat last word 121 121 33
Repeat last message 121 121 121 333
Move a little to right 211 211 3
Move a little to left 221 221 3
Signal faster 22123
Visual Stations.
546. Signal parties should consist of four men, equipped with
the necessary visual signal equipment for the operation of one
station. The instructor indicates the point where the station
is to be established and the location of the station or stations
with which communication is to be conducted.
547. At the command open station, the signal equipment is
made ready for use.
One man is designated to record incoming messages and to
call off the words of the message being sent.
A second man manipulates the sending apparatus and reads
and calls off incoming messages for the recorder.
A third man watches the distant station for breaks.
A fourth man is horse holder and messenger.
The duties of each will be varied until all are familiar with
various duties.
548. The Myer code will always be used with the flag, and
the alphabet and conventional signals will be thoroughly mas-
INSTRUCTION IN GARRISON. 163
tered by means of wand drill before any effort is made to do out-
side work. This instruction will be conducted at such time and
in such schools as prescribed by the company commander or
higher authority.
549. The Morse code will be used with heliograph and lan-
tern. Instruction in the use of these will only be given. after
the recruit has made satisfactory progress with the buzzer.
550. Signal Corps Manual No. 6 will be used for further in-
struction in visual signaling.
551. The outside or field work will be conducted by sections,
which may be divided into convenient squads of four. Chiefs
of sections and their assistants will be the instructors. These
units lend themselves readily to the use of the flag, heliograph,
and lantern, as well as for convenience in camping.
Telegraphy.
552. The ability to telegrapll by means of the Morse code is
the most important qualification for men of the Signal Corps.
553. Instruction in telegraphy will be conducted in classes,
under the direction of the company commander, by competent
noncommissioned officers, and, when practicable, under the
personal supervision of a commissioned officer. In this instruc-
tion the buzzer will be used and the men will be classified
according to ability and progress. Instruction will of necessity
be conducted indoors until the operator is sufficiently advanced
to work to advantage on field lines, which should be indicated
by his ability to send and receive about 15 words per minute
under service conditions.
Such men as have no adaptability for operating, or such as
are not sufficiently educated, will not be given this instruction.
Instruction in telegraphy will not commence until the recruit
is tliorouglily familiar with "the Myer"cbde and flag signaling,
554. Instruments will be provided in barracks so that they
are accessible to the men at all times. The ambitious will make
rapid progress under such circumstances. The Morse code will
be exclusively used.
Opportunity will be given men to use typewriters when they
have progressed sufficiently.
555. The Morse code as used in the Signal Corps consists of
seven elements: (1) the dot; (2) the dash; (3) the long dash;
164
TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
(4) the ordinary space; (5) the letter space; (6) the word
space; aiid (7) the sentence space. It is important to remember
that the value of the spaces in the code is as great as that of
the dots and dashes. The complete code is shown in plates
21 and 22.
ALPHABET AND NUMERALS.
4
ts
sa
K
N
fill
T "
B
m
?
a
fill
-
D
#
i
.
Q
E
B
R
IB
t
G
a
a
i
L"-
W
i
T
, ,
H
a
HI
i
U i
8 IB *
. I
I
a
f
V
9
" 1
J
c:
B
.
-
1
Win
:4& O B
K
L
a
rt
II
SG
Y
M
c
e
R
2
z
556. The arbitrary unit of time in this code, which, when
written down becomes a unit of length, is technically termed
tlio dot. An appreciable time is required for the production of
signals by electricity, in the magnetization of the electromagnet,
and in the movement of clockwork. The formation of a dot,
INSTRUCTION IN GARRISON. 165
therefore, necessarily involves time. Assuming, therefore,
that
(1) The dot is the unit of time.
(2) The dash is equal to two dots.
(3) The long dash is equal to four dots.
(4) The ordinary space between the elements of a letter is
equal to one dot.
(5) The letter space is equal to two dots.
(6) The word space is equal to three dots.
(7) The sentence space is equal to six dots.
557. The recruit will first thoroughly commit to memory
the groups of signs representing the letters of the alphabet, the
numerals, and the principal punctuation points, viz., the period,
the comma, and the point of interrogation. The remaining
characters can be learned afterwards, as they will be little
needed by the beginner.
558. The most approved manner of grasping the key, and
one which has been employed by some of the most successful,
experienced, and rapid operators, is shown in plate 23. Curve
the forefinger, but do not hold it rigid. Let the thumb press
slightly in an upward direction against the knob. Keep the
wrist well above the table. No better general direction can be
given than that the key will be grasped, held, and controlled
with the same flexible but perfectly controlled muscular action
of the fingers, wrist, and forearm with which the skilled pen-
man holds his pen. Carefully avoid tapping upon the knob of
the key ; the raising spring should assist the upward motion of
the key, but should never be permitted to control it.
559. By constant drill, as hereinafter directed, the habit of
making dots with regularity, uniformity, and precision must
B
B B
B
1
|
B
I
B
1
IB
I ^
1" B B
.
i
B
1!
1
B
.
B
B
B I
B
f.
B I _
m B
,.
w
IB .'
5
B
1 B
B
tl
*pr
I
I'll
B
!
o
B B
B
R i
B
5-
ji ._,
-f
I
H
u
i
&*
1 Clft
X. fift-
s
i
Comma, }
Semicolon, j
Colon, ;
i
Q I
1
3 I
Interrogation, '
Exclamation,
Dash,
Hyphen,
Pounds, 2 i
Shillings, 1 y
Dollars,' J
Capitalized Letter,*
Colon-Quotation, ;
Decimal Point.
4
M
1
o
3
o-
V
S^
I * 1
II
1 1
III
1
V
8J-5
o
rt
1!
.
1 I
s
1
1
*s
|8
I 1
I I 1 1
II
-U M y> -o
i ^c
o *
- u
U p
w*
- oj^-^
^ 5 5 ^c- 2
1 J
s
??
> 7 5 ot. o*a
* a
c 2 S Z Z 3
Jf
2 | 3 S S"
1 Hff?
o- 5*U
-s irfii
.^ ^x5 t 3 ^
To be used befo
To be w*d befo
.rf
^ V v * 4^11 5
8-
*
1 I 1 1 W
1 'S 1 33323
P! D <5 a
INSTKUCTION IN GARRISON. 167
first be acquired; then dashes, and lastly, in order, group of
dots and dashes, letters and words. In commencing, the habit
should at once be acquired of making the dots like short, firm
dashes. The recruit should learn to form the conventional char-
acters accurately and perfectly; speed will come in good time,
but only as a result of constant and persistent drill.
Elementary Principles.
560. As a basis for practice, the code may be regarded as
comprising six elementary principles, viz :
First principle. Associated dots.
I S H P 6
Second principle. Associated dashes.
M 5 fl
Third principle. Isolated dots.
E
Fourth principle. Isolated dashes.
L or cipher T
Fifth principle. Dot followed by dash.
A
Sixth principle. ];axhf<illniced by dot.
X
561. The learner will first practice upon the above ele-
mentary principles.
168 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
Make dots with the key at uniform and regular intervals,
until they can be produced with the precision of a machine and
of definite and uniform dimensions.
Next make dashes, first at the rate of about one per second,
which speed may be increased by degrees, as skill is acquired
by practice, to three per second. Make the space interval be-
tween successive dashes as short as possible. If the upward
movement which forms the space be made full, it can not be
made too quickly.
The third principle occurs but once, and needs no specific
directions.
The fourth principle will be found somewhat more difficult
(<> execute. The usual tendency is to make T too long and L
too short. Theoretically, the cipher is one-half longer than L,
but in fact it is always made the same, as the practice has
been found to occasion no inconvenience. Occurring alone or
among other letters, it is translated as L, but when found
among figures it is read as 0.
The fifth principle forms the letter A. The usual tendency is
to separate the two elements too much.
The dash followed by a dot (N) is usually found to be some-
what difficult. Time the movement by pronouncing the word
ninety, sounding the first syllable fully. Guard especially
against the usual tendency to separate the elements by too
great a space.
562. Having become thoroughly familiar with the principles,
the following exercises may with advantage be taken up in
order :
These should be practiced repeatedly until the correct number
of dots in each character can be certainly made at every trial.
A habit once formed of making the wrong number, usually one
or two too many in the case of H, P, and 6, is almost impossible
to eradicate. Guard especially against the objectionable habit
of shortening or clipping the final dot, a vice which leads to
innumerable and vexatious errors and misreading signals.
INSTRUCTION IN GARRISON. 169
T M 5 *
The faults to guard against particularly in this exercise are
shortening or elongating the terminal dash, and separating the
successive dashes by too great a space interval.
The usual tendency to allow too much space between the dot
and dash in the above letters may be overcome by forming them
as by an elongation of the final dot in I, S, H, and P.
Practice these characters in pairs, that the distinction be-
tween them may be more firmly impressed upon the mind.
The student who has mastered the sixth principle will find no
difficulty with the above characters.
w i
U Q i> Period
These are similar to preceding exercises, and present no new
difficulties.
170 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
K J 9 7
J and K are usually considered the most difficult letters in
the code. Avoid the tendency to separate J by a space into
double N, and be careful that the dashes are of equal length.
The numerals 7 and 9 require some care to insure correct
spacing.
These are termed the space letters, and the utmost care and
diligent practice are necessary in order to form them accurately.
The ability to transmit the spaced letters with absolute correct-
ness is the test of a strictly first-class sender. The space should
be just enough in excess of that ordinarily used between the
elements of a letter to enable the letters intended to be made
to be distinguished with certainty from I, S, and H. The
most usual tendency is to make the space too great, even in
some cases as great as the space between letters. This is a
most fruitful source of misapprehension and error, and too
much pains can not be taken to acquire and maintain correct
habits in this particular.
Methods of Practice.
563. In transmitting words containing groups of two or
more spaced letters, careful operators are accustomed to slightly
increase the spacing between successive letters of the group.
Practice in transmission from miscellaneous manuscript is
strongly recommended. The ability to read all kinds of copy
good, bad, and indifferent correctly at sight is a most valuable
one, and it is not difficult to acquire by attention and experience.
If the principles here laid down be firmly adhered to, the
learner will find much reason for encouragement not only at
INSTRUCTION IN GARRISON. 171
the rapidity with which he will master what at first sight ap-
pears to be a very difficult undertaking, but the extreme ac-
curacy with which he will be able to manipulate his instrument
after a fair amount of practice.
This art can only be acquired by constant and persevering
practice, keeping in mind the principles above given.
564. In learning to read by sound, it is advisable for two
persons to practice together, taking turns at reading and writ-
ing, and each correcting the faults of the other. The sounds
of the code characters must first be learned separately and then
short words chosen, which must be written very slowly and
distinctly and well spaced, the speed of manipulation being
gradually increased as the student becomes more proficient in
reading.
565. When the operator has made sufficient progress, he will
be given instruction in checking messages, the conduct of offices,
the care, adjustment, and repair of instruments.
Checking the Message.
566. In preparing the "check" of the message, all words
and figures written in the address, body of the message, and
the signature will be counted. That is, count all words after to
to the end of the signature. The word " sig." is sent merely
to indicate that the signature follows, and is not counted in
the check.
In counting the check of a message, all words, whether in
plain English, code, or cipher, pronounceable or unpronounce-
able, or initial letters, will be counted each as one word. The
abbreviations for the names of places, cities, towns, villages,
States, Territories, and Provinces will be counted as if written
in full; In the names of towns, counties, countries, or States
all of the words will be counted.
Abbreviations of weights and measures in common use and
cardinal points of the compass will be counted each as one
word.
Figures, decimal points, and bars of division, and letters will
be counted each separately as one word.
In ordinal numbers, the affixes st, d, nd, rd, and th will
each be counted as one word.
172 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
CHAPTER III. INSTRUMENTS.
The Buzzer in Telegraphy and Telephony.
567. We are able with a few dry cells to operate an inter-
rupter and coil which transforms the interrupted primary cur-
rent driven by a few volts of the cells into a smaller current
driven by a much greater alternating voltage of a frequency
that gives a high note in the telephone receiver. This current
is capable of efficient use over very leaky and high-resistance
lines when a telephone receiver is the instrument used at the
distant station. The efficiency of the buzzer depends equally
upon the delicacy of the instrument at the receiving end. The
telephone receiver is an instrument of marvelous sensitiveness
to currents of higher acoustic frequencies.
568. The buzzer requires no adjustment at the receiving end.
Leaks, bad connections, and high resistances, any one of which
would cause loss of some or all of the signals on Morse instru-
ments, simply affect the loudness of the signals in the receiving
buzzer.
From its construction and mode of operation it may be appre-
ciateil how we may substitute a telephone transmitter for the
key, and produce variation in its resistance by the voice instead
of interruptions by the vibrator and key, thus instantly con-
verting the telegraph into a telephone station. This feature
alone is of great importance, especially on instruments for
operating tactical lines.
569. The delicacy of the telephone receiver makes telegraphy
possible over lines long after Morse operation has ceased. On
short lines with good insulation the sound is loud enough to be
heard for several feet or more. As the resistance of the line
rises or the insulation decreases, or both, the sound becomes
fainter, but operation remains possible, even with very weak
sounds. The principle of operation is shown in the elementary
din gram of circuits of the field buzzer in plate 24.
The Field Buzzer. Model 1908.
570. This buzzer is Sf inches in length, G| inches deep, and
5 inches wide, all outside measurements. It weighs 9* pounds.
INSTRUMENTS.
173
It contains five 4-0 dry cells in the back compartment. At one
end of this compartment is a small condenser and resistance coil
in series which are bridged across the interrupter. This com-
partment is closed by a hinged lid. The front and lower com-
partment holds a telephone receiver and transmitter.
This is covered with a hard rubber plate, hinged at one end,
which carries on its top an interrupter and key, and line and
ground binding posts at the hinged end. The interrupter con-
tains a single coil of about 9 ohms resistance, the coil having
an iro.n core and jacket, and is provided with a vibrating
tongue and platin ana-tipped contacts at the interrupter points.
When the key is pressed the battery current passes through the
key, coil, and interrupter contacts, which vibrate at the rate of
several hundred times per second. The interruption causes
high-voltage pulsating currents to go out through binding posts
to line and ground through the telephone receiver and distant
stations. The buzzer parts are inclosed in a strong leather
case with hinged top, making a compact and serviceable instru-
ment for field use.
174
TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
571. The wiring diagram of the buzzer is shown in plate 25.
When the key is depressed, the current starting from the bat-
tery at A goes to the coil terminal at B, through the coil C into
BUSfEM.. MODFL JOOt.
the metal jacket and S-shaped spring through the interrupter
and out at D through key E, back to battery at F.
The high-voltage currents come out of the coil at B and H,
to the line through L, and to the ground through the telephone
receiver I and K.
INSTRUMENTS. 175
Transmission of Information.
The small condenser and 25-ohm coil shunt the interrupter
and prevent sparking.
The transmitter can be put into circuit in place of the key
by pressing the button S. When this is done only two of the five
cells are in action. The circuit otherwise is the same as when
the key is depressed.
In receiving, the currents come over the line through L, B,
coil C, H, receiver I, and to ground through K.
572. Some older types of field buzzers remain in service
which are bulkier and heavier than that described. They use
the same form of coil, interrupter, key, dry cells, and telephone
receiver. The transmitter is somewhat different in pattern.
The adjustments and circuits described apply substantially to
them also.
The Cavalry Buzzer.
573. This instrument is 5 inches in length, 7 inches deep,
and 3 inches wide; it also has a cylindrical leather pouch 6
inches in length and 3 inches in diameter, which contains the
receiver and transmitter; it is attached by a carrying strap to
its side. The above are 'outside measurements. It weighs 5
pounds.
This buzzer was not constructed to be used extensively as a
telegraph instrument. Its principal use will be as a telephone.
While the button on top may be used as a telegraph key, its
principal function is as a call on the telephone line.
It has an extra binding post, so connected to a condenser that
the buzzer can be used on a telegraph line without interfering
with the business of the line. In such a case the line wire
should be connected to the condenser post.
This instrument will stand rough usage and will need very
little attention from the repairman, except renewal of battery
occasionally ; but if it does get out of order, it is hard to repair,
due to the delicacy of its parts and its compactness.
574. A simplified diagram of the circuits in the cavalry
buzzer is shown in plate 26.
Two small dry cells in one case furnish the current, and these
automatically connect with the circuit by means of spring con-
tacts. When the key A-2 B-2 is depressed, the current runs
176
TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
through the primary of the induction coil P and then through
the contact E and small electromagnet of the interrupter. A
small condenser C-2 shunts the interrupter break. Thus there
are produced rapidly alternating currents of comparatively high
voltage in the secondary S which go out on the line through
D L and to the distant telephone receiver. There is a second
key A-l B-l so arranged that when the current-controlling key
is depressed the second key puts the secondary coil to the line,
cutting out the home telephone receiver, and thus prevents loud
buzzing in the operator's ears from his own instrument.
575. A condenser C-l is provided in an alternative path to
line through C L which permits of attaching a buzzer directly
to the telegraph line. The condenser freely permits passage of
the voice or buzzer currents, but blocks those of the telegraph,
thus not interfering with its operation.
576. The buzzer is provided with a transmitter T in the
same way as the field buzzer, and by depressing the talking
switch the set is converted into a local battery telephone.
To Use the Buzzer as a Telephone.
577. The key is closed and opened several times to draw the
attention of the operator at other stations. The operator at
the calling station calls the letter or call letters of the station
wanted, signing at intervals his own call ; when answered, in-
forms the station called to use the telephone, which is done by
sending the word " fone."
INSTRUMENTS. 177
To use the telephone press the button on the transmitter
while talking and hold it vertically. If held horizontally the
granulated carbon in the receptacle of the transmitter may not
touch the front carbon disk, thus opening the circuit.
Care of Buzzers Location of Faults and Adjustments.
578. A buzzer used at a station, such as at a tent in the
camp, will cause but little trouble. The buzzer, however, car-
ried by operators in sections gets out of order at times, due to
being jarred while carried on horseback, especially when travel-
ing at the faster gaits. This can frequently be obviated by
seeing that all connections are tight, and that the cells are
packed firmly with excelsior or some other suitable material
before leaving camp.
If the battery is not well packed and an operator rides 10 or
12 miles at a trot, some of the wires connecting the cells will
probably be broken or jarred loose from the cells, and possibly
the connections to the condenser and coil will be loosened or
broken.
The transmitter and receiver should be packed and not al-
lowed to knock against each other and the sides and bottom of
the compartments. The continual jarring for two or three
hours at a time may loosen some of the set screws and even
cause breaks in the cords.
The operator who takes proper care of his buzzer will seldom
have to bring it to the repairman.
Location of Faults (Field Buzzer).
579. Sometimes even with all precautions the buzzer will not
work. When such is the case, the first thing to do is to try
and locate the trouble and remove it.
The trouble may be in the line, connecter, or in the buzzer.
First. See if the circuit is open at the interrupter just in front
of the coil ; the spring should touch the vibrator ; if it does not
touch, the circuit is open, and can be closed by slowly turning
the screw, pressing against the spring to the right until the
spring and vibrator touch ; if a buzz is not heard when the key
is closed or a click when it is opened, the trouble is probably
82940 11 12
178 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
somewhere else. Care will be taken to see that the contact
points on the spring and vibrator are clean.
Second. Disconnect the connecter from the line wire and
connect to the ground rod. If, after adjusting spring contact,
by working the key no circuit can be obtained, short-circuit the
line and ground posts. If still no sound is heard in the re-
ceiver by closing and opening the key, the trouble is without a
doubt in the buzzer.
Third. Examine the battery, see that all connections between
the cells are tight, use a voltmeter to test each cell for voltage.
This to ascertain if any of the wires connecting the cells are
broken inside the insulation.
If no circuit can be obtained after the battery has been gone
over carefully, make an inspection of all the connections on the
buzzer in general. Very likely a loose connection will be found
somewhere.
The receiver can be tested by disconnecting the cords from the
binding posts on the buzzer and touching them to the two poles
of a cell. If a scratching sound is heard when touching the
terminals of the cell, the receiver is in working order.
The transmitter and transmitter cords are in circuit only
when the buzzer is used as a telephone.
58O. Any circuit in the buzzer can be tested by using a dry
cell or two in series with the telephone receiver. Using a lead
wire from one side of the battery and one side of the receiver,
and by touching the two wires to the points, which should be
electrically connected, if no sound is heard in the receiver when
touching these points the circuit between them is open.
As the resistance between any two points in the buzzer should
be very low, the sound heard in the receiver should be loud,
provided the cells used for the test are in good condition. If
the sound is faint, the part tested is faulty. The fault may be
due to a broken wire making partial connection, or to corro-
sion, dirt, or loose connection where the wire is connected to
the binding post. Such connections under certain climatic con-
ditions often become so corroded that they would entirely open
the circuit if not inspected and cleaned occasionally.
Too much care can not be taken in regard to keeping all con-
nections clean and tight. The satisfactory working of the
buzzer will depend on it.
INSTRUMENTS. 179
If the buzzer works poorly with a new, strong battery in it,
there is something wrong, and the cause of trouble should be
located and removed.
Adjustments.
581. The adjustment is made with the screw touching the
spring which touches the armature or vibrator in front of the
coil.
If clicks are heard when closing and opening the key, the
spring is pressing too hard against the vibrator; hold the key
down and turn the screw to the left until a suitable buzz is
obtained. Loudness and clearness of tone are both desirable
for the best results.
In case the spring does not touch the vibrator, turn the screw
to the right until it does, as indicated by the sound in receiver.
Little trouble in adjustment will be experienced with a buzzer
that has a good battery and all connections clean and tight ;
but when the battery is weak, with a high resistance in the
buzzer circuit also, the adjustment becomes very difficult. The
turning of the adjustment screw should be gradual. If turned
fast it is nearly impossible to get good adjustment.
582. The adjustment and repair of the cavalry buzzer is
governed by similar principles. See that the spring contacts
in the top of the battery compartment touch the battery termi-
nals. The adjustment of the small interrupter in the top of the
case is somewhat delicate, but may be done readily with the
small screwdriver in the case. It seldom goes out of adjust-
ment. It should be remembered that when the button operates
the buzzer the home receiver is cut out. By removing the top
and pressing one of the key springs at a time, one of them will
operate the home as well as distant buzzer. For complete test,
the E and DL binding screws in the compound plug should be
short-circuited for loudest effect.
Dry Cells.
583. The operation of all types of buzzers and electric flash
lights depends upon the condition of dry cells used with them.
Dry cells issued with the 1908 and some earlier types of field
buzzers are of the " reserve " variety and the " 4-O " size.
180 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
These are inactive until water is put in them after removing
the small corks in the tops of the carbons. This should be
done by pouring the water in carefully until it no longer sinks,
then throwing out surplus and replacing the corks. The open-
ing in the carbon should be filled at least 10 minutes, when
the water will generally cease sinking. The cells should be in
full operation within half an hour. The cells furnished for the
cavalry buzzer and flash lights are all ready for operation
when received, but they deteriorate in storage and, in general,
are unserviceable after six months. The useful life of a dry
cell depends upon the size, climate, date of manufacture (or
moistening of "reserve" type), and the current drawn from
it. In flash lights the current demand is heavy when the light
is used, so the life of the battery is short if much use is made
of the light. In buzzers, most of their failure is due to de-
terioration in storage or in the buzzer case.
The general tendency is to blame any failure of the buzzers
on the dry cells, throw away those in the case without test,
and substitute new ones. This practice should be rigorously
checked.
The voltmeter test alone is not conclusive, especially when the
voltage of one cell falls below 1.4. The test should be made
while the cell is sending current, and if, after a few minutes of
steady use, the voltage drops below 1.0 the cell is too far ex-
hausted to be serviceable. The cavalry cells are connected in
pairs in their cases and should give not less than two volts.
Field Wireless Telegraphy General Principles.
584. Wireless telegraphy will be used when distance, the
character of the service, and the nature of the terrain prevents
the laying of wire lines. This is particularly the case in service
with the cavalry. It may also be used to keep parallel columns
in communication on the march, and possibly to intercept mes-
sages sent by the enemy or to interfere with the operation of
his wireless station.
The locality for the station will be selected with as much care
as the conditions permit. Open ground as far back from hills
as practicable is to be preferred. The nearer to the commanding
INSTRUMENTS. 181
officer or his headquarters the headquarters station is placed
the better. The range of the present pack set is from 15 to 20
miles.
General Description of Pack Wireless Set.
[1910 type.]
585. The set consists of:
(1) Two chests containing general operating apparatus.
(2) A jointed hollow wooden mast of seven sections, and
one extra section.
(3) An antenna system of four three-ply stranded wires
terminating in ropes, and a stranded lead wire
fastened to a top insulator.
(4) A rubber-covered wire counterpoise of four wires.
(5) A hand-power generator.
(6) Two storage batteries (four cells each).
(7) A set of pack frames and leather bags fitting over
the aparejos of the three mules that carry the
equipment; (1) goes on one mule, (2), (3), and (4)
on another, and (5) on another. When carried,
(6) is put in two boxes that hook on the generator
frame (5).
Transmitting and Receiving Apparatus.
586. In one of the chests is contained the induction coil,
the Leyden-tube secondary condenser, and the spark gap.
587. In the other chest is placed the interrupter, key, pri-
mary condenser (under the base), the detector, and small re-
ceiving condenser in the box under the detector, and a tuning
coil with sliding contacts. A spiral linking coil, small lamp, and
connections for antenna and counterpoise are attached to the lid.
588.. Forty- foot mast equipment: Seven sections of the 5^-foot
length tubular mast are used, four of the larger at the bottom
and three of the smaller at the top. The tube is permanently
fixed in one end of each section, except the top one, making the
section and the tube practically one piece, and this facilitates
very much quick handling of the mast. A large glass, porce-
lain, or composition insulator is screwed on the bottom section,
182 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
and is used at the bottom of the mast to insulate it from the
ground.
589. Antenna: Four phosphor-bronze antenna wires are used,
each 85 feet long. These wires are made up of three of the
regular antenna wires plaited together. This gives more sur-
face in the antenna, and prevents kinking. The guy ropes 0:1
the end of the antenna wires are 75 feet long and are insulated
from the wire by four hard-rubber insulators placed in series.
The antenna wires are secured to a metal piece on the insu-
lator at the top of the mast. The lead wire, which is made up
exactly like the antenna wires, is also fastened to this metal
piece.
590. Counterpoise: The counterpoise consists of four pieces
of cable core (seven-strand Xo. 20 copper wire, eight thirty-
seconds to nine thirty-seconds rubber insulation) 100 feet long.
These four wires are soldered together at the inner end, the
outer ends being insulated. At the junction of the counterpoise
wires a lead wire of this cable core is also soldered for con-
nection with the instruments and this joint insulated with pure
rubber or okonite tape.
591. The pack set should be insulated from the ground. Pins
nnd spare parts should be placed near the base of the mast, so
they will not be lost. The antenna is reeled up from outer
ends by revolving the carriers. The counterpoise is reeled up
from the center, the men drawing in the insulated wires and
coiling them over the arm and hand. These precautions will
prevent kinking the antenna and counterpoise wires. The steel
joining tubes of the mast must be kept bright and well oiled.
591. Each member of the section will thoroughly familiarize
himself with his particular duties. At the same time each
member of the section will be given instruction in the various
duties in putting up the mast.
592. To call a station, first listen in, and adjust detector and
tuning coil to prevent interference. Then signal its call letter,
signing your own call letter at intervals. In opening station
the call will not be continuous, but will be at intervals of about
three minutes, in order to give the other station a chance to
answer. As soon as communication is established report to the
signal officer. Firmly made distinct signals are especially nec-
essary in wireless operation. Speed should be moderate, and
no increase is to be made unless receiving is readily done.
INSTRUMENTS. 183
When difficulties exist, it is safer and, in the end, more expe-
ditious to repeat all messages at least once.
593. The sign " 33 " will be made when through sending,
which means that you are going to switch over to the receiving
side and listen in. Always change over from the sending side
to the receiving side as quickly as possible, and adjust detector
by means of the small buzzer furnished. When changing from
the receiving side to the sending side always make several
periods before commencing your message, in order to give the
other station time to change over and get tuned.
594. It is generally useless and always dangerous to attempt
to operate in a thunderstorm. Therefore in general during
such a storm it is advisable to connect the antenna direct to the
ground.
595. A wireless-telegraph operator must not only be able to
send and receive messages, but must be familiar with the appa-
ratus employed, in order to tune, adjust, overhaul, and make
repairs. Wireless sections will have permanent call letters as-
signed. An accurate record of messages will be kept at each
station, numbering them consecutively.
Instructions for Operating Field Wireless Pack Sets.
596. The diagram of circuits and arrangement is given in
plate 27.
The various operations in sending and receiving are as
follows :
In sending, the control switch is thrown to the right. The
current from the generator or storage battery then starts the
interrupter, coming in at A, to B through interrupter magnets
C, to interrupter driving contact screw D, through small inter-
rupter spring to vibrator K, to E, 1, over to control switch
through F, and back to battery through G. This causes inter-
rupter to vibrate continuously, but the main current, controlled
by the key, is not yet on. When key is closed the main current
goes on as follows: From A to B through primary of induction
coil to I, through key and up to J and to large vibrator screw,
through platinum point of this to large vibrator spring K, to E,
to 1, to control switch, through F, and back to battery through
G. The lower section of primary condenser shunts the contact
points of the small vibrator through 4 and H on one side and
INSTRUMENTS. 185
through 1 and E on the other. The two upper sections shunt
the contact points of the large vibrator and key through 1
and E on one side and through 2, 3, and I on the other. The
rapidly interrupted current in the primary coil induces high
voltage impulses in the secondary. The Leyden tubes, connected
in parallel, are joined across this secondary at L and M. Being
charged at each interruption they discharge through the cir-
cuit formed by the spark gap and included turns of the linking
coil, producing at each discharge the high frequency oscillations
in the included turns in the linking coil. These induce the
high frequency oscillations in the turns of the linking coil in-
cluded between .the antenna and ground connections. These cur-
rents go to ground or counterpoise from the linking coil, down
to N on the control switch, and to ground through " Gr." Those
to the antenna go directly to "Ant."
In receiving, the control switch is thrown to the left. The
high frequency currents induced in the antenna by the waves
from the distant station come in at "Ant." to control switch
at O, to adjustable slider P on tuning coil, out at Q, through
switch at R, and to detector at S, through detector, and up to
"Rec. condenser," through this to T on the switch, and up to
ground at " Gr." The telephone receiver shunts the condenser,
including in its circuit the points U V of the potentiometer and
the turns W Q of the tuning coil. The silicon or " Perikon "
detector tends to rectify the high frequency currents. These,
traversing the telephone receiver circuit, give the signals by
causing vibrations of the diaphragm of the same acoustic fre-
quency as the groups of waves corresponding to the interrup-
tions or half periods in the primary of the induction coil or
transformer.
By closing the small battery switch shown at the bottom of
plate 27 we impart to the telephone receiver circuit, through
the points U V, a portion of the voltage applied at the terminals
of the potentiometer.
Sending Apparatus.
Power: Either of two sources of power may be used. Storage
batteries and hand-driven dynamos.
Hand generator: When hand driven power is used, it should
be steadily applied. Owing to resistance going off and on when
186 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
operating the key, care should be taken to work handles with
arms somewhat stiffened, so as to resist sudden increases in
velocity. Such changes are apt to strain the interrupter or
cause trouble with the primary condenser. A storage battery
connected across the hand generator will do much to assist in
smoothing the action. One of 16 volts and quite small capacity
will serve. The connection should be made while dynamo is
being slowly turned, and disconnected when through sending,
otherwise the battery will be run down by driving the dynamo
as a motor. The hand generator requires frequent cleaning
and occasional oiling. If it fails to "pick up" when the han-
dles are turned, it may be it is being turned in the wrong direc-
tion. If it still fails when turned in the reverse direction, the
commutator and carbon brushes probably need cleaning, and,
possibly, adjusting. Steady operation of the hand generator is
desirable to prevent, on the one hand, too violent action of the
interrupter and flaming, or, on the other hand, insufficient volt-
age to give a good spark.
Batteries: The most satisfactory used so far are the " Duro "
dry-type storage. They should always be charged fully as soon
as possible after receipt, at the rate of about 2 amperes. When
standing they should have a setting-up charge at least once a
month.
They have approximately 20 ampere hours' capacity, and,
when freshly charged, will serve for about eight hours' continu-
ous sending. They should never be permitted to stand long
discharged. For transportation the soft-rubber stoppers should
always be placed in the cells. Keep the rubber stoppers out
during the charge and put in a spoonful of water.
Interrupter: The small contact should be screwed in until it
just touches the spring, and will start when switch is placed
at " send " position. Adjust until an amplitude of vibration
of about one-half inch is reached, and then screw up small
set screw on the side.
The large contact should be adjusted so that the large plati-
num tipped screw pushes in the spring contact about one-
sixteenth inch. If the large contact sticks or flames up when
key is depressed, it may be that it is screwed in too far or
has been roughened by previous burning. In the latter case
the platinum contacts should be sparingly dressed with a
smooth file. Continued and violent flaming indicates an open
INSTRUMENTS. 187
circuit in the condenser shunting the interrupter or the con-
nections therewith. Violent sparking at the key and none at
spark gap indicates a short circuit in the condenser.
Key: Should be worked with a play of not less than three
thirty-seconds inch. There is a tendency for it to stick, and
this should be met by grasping the knob and working with an
upward as well as downward stroke. When the interrupter
sticks or flames badly the key should not be touched until in-
terrupter is adjusted.
Control switch : The sending position is to the right, the receiv-
ing to the left.
Spark gap: Should in no case exceed one-quarter inch spark
length. Between this and three-sixteenths inch gives the best
effects. In the double spark gap each space should be about
one-eighth inch. The spark should appear white and with
some volume and give a sharp crackling sound. A hissing
sound usually indicates that the spark is too short.
Linking coil: This is a flat spiral of rubber-covered wire with
binding posts connected every half turn. These are numbered
from 1 to 20, the adjoining half turns being connected to con-
secutive odd and even numbers.
Two high-frequency (oscillating) circuits are connected with
the linking coil. The first, called the " closed oscillating " cir-
cuit, includes the spark gap and Ley den eight-tube condenser.
The two spring clips leading from these can include one or
more turns of the linking coil.
The " open oscillating " circuit leads at one side into the an-
tenna connection, and at the other side to the binding post con-
nected with the counterpoise wires. The clips from these are
connected with one or more turns of the linking coil, and these
may or may not include the turns already in the closed oscillat-
ing circuit
When there are turns common to the closed and open oscil-
lating circuits, the coupling is said to be " close," and when not
the coupling is said to be " loose." To place the closed and open
oscillating circuits in " tune " with each other, the small glow
lamp in the hard-rubber socket should be connected in the wire
leading to the antenna post. The closed and open oscillating
circuits are then tried on various adjustments until the glow
of the lamp is brightest.
188 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
On the linking coil it is advisable to start out with the closed
oscillating circuit connected with 20 and 15, and the open oscil-
lating clips connected with 20 and 14. Too many turns in the
closed oscillating circuit are apt to make the spark ragged and
red, and to cause flaming at the interrupter.
Receiving Apparatus.
597. Buzzer adjustment of the detector: A small commercial-
type buzzer is connected with a dry cell and push button, and a
wire from the buzzer connected to a bar of the receiving tuning
coil. When the button is pushed and the buzzer operated, if
the detector is in proper adjustment for receiving signals, the
sound of the buzzer will be heard quite plainly in the tele-
phone receiver when the wire is touched to the tuning coil.
Silicon detector: This is the detector usually furnished with
pack sets.
In adjusting the detector :
1. Adjust the pressure of contact point by gently pressing the
spring sleeve down on the cup contact until maximum response
is obtained in the telephone receiver.
2. After clamping the sleeve in above position by the side
screw, then slide the cup contact about to determine if the
response can be improved. A very slight movement or tap will
sometimes cause a great improvement in sensitiveness.
It is important in this detector that both the rounded contact
point and the upper or polished surface of the cup contact be
kept absolutely clean.
In case the rounded contact point becomes oxidized or other-
wise tarnished, it should be cleaned by rubbing gently with
very fine emery paper.
The upper or polished surface of the cup contact can be
cleaned by rubbing with a piece of soft cloth, or, better, wiped
with a clean cloth moistened with carbon bisulphide.
Under no circumstances rub the silicon with emery paper, as
it will destroy the smooth surface.
In damp weather or in tropical climates, where a film of
moisture tends to form on the polished surface of the cup
contact, a layer of insulating oil, such as paraffin, may be
spread on the surface. This will in no way affect the opera-
INSTRUMENTS. 189
tion or adjustment of the detector, as the pressure of the contact
point readily displaces the oil layer at the point of contact.
Per ikon detector: This is used in a way similar to the silicon
detector. The red crystals are quite friable, and in no case
must the two contacts be rotated when in contact, as this would
destroy the crystalline points.
A slight motion or tap will often bring out the signals
clearly, especially at the beginning.
In both silicon and perikon detectors the battery must be
connected in proper direction. In silicon, the positive is con-
nected with the base, and with perikon to the metallic crystal
side. The battery is not needed at moderate distances, but it
improves the strength of signals when they come in faintly.
In later types the battery circuit has been dispensed with.
In General.
598. Connections from the aerial circuit and counterpoise
wires should not have any open loops in them. If there is any
slack, it should be lashed up flat without having open loops,
which seriously affect accurate tuning.
The conductor to the antenna should not come within several
inches of the ground or counterpoise conductors. Particular
care should be observed to have good clean connections in the
storage-battery circuit.
It is essential that all metal and hard rubber of instruments
should be kept clean and free from dust.
VISUAL SIGNALING APPARATUS.
The Flag Kit.
599. Two kinds of flag kits, the 2-foot kit and the 4-foot kit,
are issued by the Signal Corps.
The 2-foot kit. This kit consists of one white and one red
signal flag, two three-jointed staffs, and a suitable carrying
case to contain the outfit. The white flag is made of white
muslin 2 feet square, with an 8-inch turkey-red muslin center.
The red flag is of similar size and material, the only difference
being an alteration of colors in the body and center. The
190 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
means of attachment to the staff consists of a loop at the
center and two ends of white tape at each edge of the back
of the flag body. The staff is made of hickory in three joints,
each 23 inches long, and is assembled by telescoping into brass
ferrules. Brass eyes are provided on the first and second joints
to receive the tape ends at the edge of the flag. The carrying
case, of convenient size and shape to contain the two flags and
staffs complete, is made of 8-oimce standard khaki bound with
leather and fitted with a shoulder strap.
The 2-foot kit is essentially a practice kit, although under
favorable conditions of weather and terrain it may be used to
advantage as a short-distance service signaling outfit. Two of
these kits are issued to each troop, battery, and company for
the purpose of disseminating general instruction in military
signaling throughout the Army.
The 4-foot kit. This kit is of essentially the same description
as the 2-foot kit, except as regards size. The flags are 3 feet
D inches square, with 12-inch centers, and the staffs are con-
siderably heavier, the joints being 36 inches long. The 4-foot
kit is the standard field flag kit, and the range at which signals
can be exchanged with it depends on a variety of factors, such
as the condition of the weather, the location of station, the
proficiency of signalmen, etc. The speed for continuous sig-
naling is seldom greater than five to six words per minute.
600. Care of flag material. Signal flags should be examined
at the close of drill or practice and repairs made to any rents
or loose ties discovered. Flags, when soiled, should be thor-
oughly washed and dried in *the sun. Signals made by clean
flags are much more easily read than those made by dirty ones.
Staffs should be handled with care, especially when jointing or
unjointing. Care should be taken not to bruise the ends of the
brass ferrules. If a ferrule becomes loose on a staff it should
be tightened without delay.
60 1. Powers and limitations of flag signaling. The advantages
which may be claimed for this method of signaling are port-
ability of apparatus, adaptability to varied weather conditions,
and great rapidity of station establishment. The disadvantages
are the lack of celerity of the signals, their impenetrability to
dust or smoke, and the comparatively short ranges at which
they can be read.
INSTRUMENTS. 191
The Heliograph.
602. The heliograph is an instrument designed for the pur-
pose of transmitting signals by means of the sun's rays.
Description. The service heliograph equipment of the Signal
Corps consists of:
A sole-leather pouch with shoulder strap containing
1 screen, 1 sighting rod, 1 screw driver.
A small pouch, sliding by two loops upon the strap of the
larger pouch, containing 1 mirror bar.
A skeleton leather case containing 2 tripods.
The mirrors are each 4^-inch squares of plate glass supported
by sheet-brass and cardboard backings, and mounted in brass
retaining frames. At the center of each mirror there is an un-
silvered spot three thirty-seconds of an inch in diameter, and
holes corresponding to these spots are drilled in the backing.
The sun mirror differs from the station mirror only in that it
has a paper disk pasted upon its face covering the unsilvered
spot. The mirror frames are carried by brass supports pro-
vided at the bases with conical projections accurately turned to
fit the sockets of the mirror bar and grooved at the ends to re-
ceive the clamping spring. Each support is fitted with a tangent
screw and worm-wheel attachment functioned to control the
motion of the mirror frame about its horizontal axis.
The mirror bar is a bronze casting provided at the center
with a clamp threaded to fit the screw of the tripod. By releas-
ing the clamp the bar may be moved independently of the screw .
and adjusted to any desired position. Conical sockets for the
mirror supports are provided for at the ends of the mirror bar.
These sockets work freely in the bar and, being actuated by a
tangent screw and w r orm wheel, serve to regulate the motion of
the mirror frame about its vertical axis. Clamp springs, for
engaging and securing the ends of the mirror frame supports,
are attached at each end of the bar.
The screen is a brass frame 6 inches square, in which six
segments or leaves are mounted in such a way as to form a
shutter. The leaves are designed to turn through arcs of 90
on horizontal axes, unanimity of movement being secured by
connections made with a common crank bar. The crank bar is
192 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
operated by a key and retractile spring, which serve to reveal
and cut off the flash. A set screw and check nut at the lower
edge of the screen frame limits the motion of the crank bar and
the opening of the leaves. A threaded base support furnishes
the means of attaching the screen frame to the tripod.
The sighting rod is a brass rod 6 inches long, carrying at the
upper end a front sight and a movable disk. About the rod is
fitted a movable bronze collar, coned and grooved to take the
socket and clamping spring of the mirror bar. A milled edged
bronze washer serves to clamp the collar to the rod at any
desired point.
The tripods are similar in all respects, the screw of either
threading into the mirror bar or screen frame. Each tripod is
provided with a hook at the base of the head, allowing the
suspension of a weight when great stability is required.
603. Assembling. There are two ways of assembling the
heliograph, and the position of the sun is the guide in deter-
mining which of the two should in any given case be employed.
When the sun is in front of the operator that is, in front of
a plane through his position at right angles to the line joining
the stations the sun mirror only is required ; with the sun
in rear of this plane both mirrors should be used. With one
mirror the rays of the sun are reflected directly from the sun
mirror to the distant station ; with two mirrors the rays are
reflected from the sun mirror to the station mirror, and thence
to the distant station.
604. With one mirror. Firmly set one of the tripods upon the
ground; attach the mirror bar to the tripod; insert and clamp
in the sockets the sun mirror and sighting rod, the latter hav-
ing the disk turned down. At a distance of about 6 inches,
sight through the center of the unsilvered spot in the mirror
and turn the mirror bar, raising or lowering the sighting rod
until the center of the mirror, the extreme point of the sighting
rod, and the distant station are accurately in line. Firmly
clamp the mirror bar to the tripod, taking care not to disturb
the alignment, and turn up the disk of the sighting rod. The
mirror is then moved by means of the tangent screws until the
" shadow spot " falls upon the paper disk in the sighting rod,
j'.fter which the flash will be visible at the distant station. The
" shadow spot " is readily found by holding a sheet of paper or
the hand about 6 inches in front of the mirror, and should be
INSTRUMENTS. 193
constantly kept in view until located upon the disk. The screen
is attached to a tripod and established close to, and in front of,
the sighting disk, in such a way as to intercept the flash.
605. With two mirrors. Firmly set one of the tripods on the
ground; clamp the mirror bar diagonally across the line of
vision to the distant station; clamp the sun mirror facing the
sun to one end of the mirror bar and the station mirror facing
the distant station. Stooping down, the head near and in rear
of the station mirror, turn the sun mirror by means of its tan-
gent screws until the whole of the station mirror is seen re-
flected in the sun mirror and the unsilvered spot and the reflec-
tion of the paper disk accurately cover each other. Still look-
ing into the sun mirror, adjust the station mirror by means of
the tangent screws until the reflection of the distant station is
brought exactly in line with the top of the reflection of the disk
and the top of the unsilvered spot of the sun mirror ; after this
the station mirror must not be touched. Now step behind the
sun mirror and adjust it by means of the tangent screws so
that the " shadow spot " falls upon the center of the paper disk
on the station mirror.
The flash will then be visible at the distant station. The
screen and its tripod are established as described in the single
mirror assembling.
606. Alternate method with two mirrors. Clamp the mirroi
bar diagonally across the line of vision to the distant station,
with the sun mirror and the station mirror approximately fac-
ing the sun and distant station, respectively.
Look through small hole in sun mirror and turn the station
mirror on its vertical and horizontal axes until the paper disk
on the station mirror accurately covers the distant station.
Standing behind sun mirror, turn it on its horizontal and
vertical axes by means of the tangent screw attachments until
the shadow spot falls upon the paper disk on station mirror.
607. Adjustment. Perfect adjustment is maintained only by-
keeping the " shadow spot " uninterruptedly in the center of
the paper disk, and as this " spot " continually changes its posi-
tion with the apparent movement of the sun, one signalman
should be in constant attendance on the tangent screws of the
sun mirror. Movement imparted by these screws to the mirror
does not disturb the alignment, as its center (the unsilvered
82940 11 13
194 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
spot) is at the intersection of the axes of revolution. Extra
care bestowed upon preliminary adjustment is repaid by in-
creased brilliancy of flash. With the alignment absolutely as-
sured and the " shadow spot " at the center of the disk, the
axis of the cone of reflected rays is coincident with the line of
sight and the distant station receives the greatest intensity of
light. Remember the distant observer is unquestionably the
belter judge as to the character of the flash received, and if,
therefore, adjustment is called for when the "shadow spot" is
at the center of the disk, the alignment is probably at fault and
should be looked after at once. In setting up the tripods always
see that the legs have a sufficient spread to give a secure base,
and on yielding soil press firmly into the ground. Keep the
head of the tripod as nearly level as possible, and in high wind
ballast by hanging a substantial weight to the hook. See that
the screen completely obscures the flash, also that the flash
passes entire when the screen is opened. This feature of the
adjustment is partially regulated by the set screw attached to
the screen frame. The retractile spring should sharply return
all the leaves of the screen to their normal position when the
key is released. Failure to respond promptly is obviated by
strengthening or replacing the spring.
608. Care of apparatus. Minor parts of the instrument should
be dismounted only to effect repairs, for which spare parts are
furnished on requisition. Steel parts should be kept oiled and
free from rust. Tangent screws and bearings should be fre-
quently inspected for dust or grit. Mirrors should invariably
be wiped clean before using. In case of accident to the sun
mirror the station mirror can be made available for substitu-
tion therefor by removing the paper disk. If the tripod legs
become loose at the head joints, tighten the assembling screws
with the screw driver.
609. Power and limitations of the heliograph. Portability,
great range, comparative rapidity of operation, and the in-
visibility of the signals except to observers located approxi-
mately on a right line, joining the stations between which
communication is had, are some of the advantages derived from
using the heliograph in visual signaling.
The principal disadvantage results from the entire dependence
of the instrument upon the presence of sunlight. The normal
working range of the heliograph is about 30 miles, though in-
INSTRUMENTS. 195
stances of its having attained ranges many times greater than
this are of record. The heliograph can be depended upon to
transmit from 5 to 12 words per minute.
The Acetylene Lantern.
6 10. The signal lantern is an instrument designed for the
purpose of transmitting signals by means of intermittent flashes
of artificial light. It is the standard night visual signaling
equipment furnished by the Signal Corps, and depends for its
illumination upon the combustion of acetylene gas.
611. Method of gas generation. The method employed for
producing acetylene in the signal lantern is by bringing water
into contact with calcium carbid.
612. Description. This equipment consists of a signal lan-
tern, with cartridge generator attached. The lantern is
equipped with a special aplanatic mirror, 5 inches in diameter
and about 3 inches focus. The lantern is packed complete in a
wooden case with shoulder straps, and the following extra
parts are included, each part having its own receptacle in the
case: Two burners, 1 cover glass, 3 cartridges of calcium car-
bide of 5 ounces each, 1 pair of gas pliers, 1 tube white lead,
1 extra filter bag, 1 screw driver.
The lantern is made of brass, all parts of which are riveted.
The burner is of the double-tip form, consuming three-quarters
of a cubic foot per hour. The lantern is fitted with a hood to
provide proper ventilation and at the same time to prevent tlie
flickering of the light by the wind. The front door of the
lantern is hinged and fastens with a spring clasp; it is so ar-
ranged that it can be entirely removed if necessary. The cover
glass is made in three sections and is not affected by the
expansion and contraction of the metal due to changes in tem-
perature. The glass is fastened by the aid of a spring wire,
so that it can be readily removed if it is necessary to replace
a broken section. In the base of the lantern is a key and the
adjustment for regulating the height of the flame. The key is
so arranged that when not depressed but little gas is admitted
through the by-pass to the burner, and the flame is low. By
depressing the key as much gas as can be entirely consumed is
admitted to the burner, which gives a bright flash. At the back
of the lantern there is an adjustable handle, so that the equip-
196 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
ment can be used as a hand lantern if desired. This form of
lantern can be used with the regular heliograph tripod, the
generator being either attached to the back of the lantern or
suspended. When practicable, it is better to attach the gen-
erator to the lantern. The candlepower of this lantern is about
1,900.
The generator used is known as " the cartridge generator,"
:uid while constructed on the water-feed principle, the disadvan-
tages incident to this method are eliminated as far as possible.
It is constructed of brass and has a removable top. Attached
to the inside of the top is a flexible frame with a spring latch,
the spring latch being hinged. At the top of the frame is a
tube or cylinder, the bottom of which is conical in shape and
covered by a rubber plug. At the bottom of the frame is a
hollow tube, which is the 'water inlet. The cartridge proper
consists of a tin cylinder having an opening at either end. A
small cylinder of wire mesh extends from and connects these
openings. The carbide lies around this mesh on the inside of
the cartridge. The rubber plug before mentioned fits into the
upper opening and the water tube into the lower opening. In-
side the tube, at the top of the frame, is a filter, the function of
which is to remove the dust and moisture from the gas. The
outlet from this chamber is by a brass bent tube having a stop-
cock attached thereto.
613. The principal things to observe in the operation of this
generator are the following:
(1) To see that the rubber plugs fit tightly into the openings
of the cartridge.
(2) That the tube, the cap, and water hole are not stopped up.
(3) That the cotton in the filter is changed frequently.
(4) That the stopcock is closed before inserting the frame in
the water. If this latter instruction is not complied with, it can
be readily seen that the water will have free access to the car-
bide and excessive generation will occur.
614. When the charge is exhausted, the entire cartridge is
taken out and thrown away. This eliminates the handling of
carbide and the disagreeable task of cleaning out the residuum
after the gas has been extracted.
Connection is made from the stopcock to the hose connection
on the lantern proper, and this is the passageway of the gas
from the generator to the burner. As soon as the stopcock is
INSTRUMENTS. 197
opened the water rises through the tube and flows to the car-
bide. The advantage of the cartridge being submerged in the
water is to reduce and absorb as much of the heat liberated by
generation as is possible. These lanterns have been tested up to
a distance of 10 miles with the naked eye, and under favorable
conditions can be used over a range somewhat in excess of this.
With a 30-power telescope the flash can be read at a distance of
30 miles.
615. Operation and care. Take the lamp and generator from
the case by aid of the handle attached to the lamp; screw the
complete outfit on a heliograph tripod, or stand the outfit on a
level object ; remove the cover of generator, to which is attached
the flexible frame, detach spring from the catch of the flexible
frame; tear off flaps from the ends of carbide cartridge (or
pry off small caps), and attach the cartridge. Then attach to
frame, being careful to see that' both rubber plugs fit tightly into
the holes in the cartridge; fasten the latch of the spring over
the metal catch; close stopcock on service pipe; completely fill
the outer can of generator with water, the object being to have
the generator level full of water when the lamp is in service,
then immerse the frame and cartridge, pressing the top of the
generator down tight. In doing this the water will overflow
the sides of the generator tank. Now connect by rubber tubing
the stopcock with the gas inlet at the bottom of the lamps, then
(1) open front door of the lamp, (2) light a match, (3) open
stopcock, and (4) light the gas at the burner. In doing this
hold the key open. In the new model the key and hose connec-
tion are on the side of bottom of lamp.
When the gas is ignited the lamp is ready for signaling, and
the key can be operated as is the Morse telegraph instrument,
but not so rapidly.
In the event of the flame being too high when the key is
closed, adjustment can be made by loosening the set screw and
adjusting the light. When at the proper height tighten the set
screw, which locks the by-pass in its proper position. In the
new model this is accomplished by aid of the regulator by-pass
valve at the left-hand side of bottom of lamp. The lamp is
properly adjusted when shipped and should not be changed
unless absolutely necessary. Connect the rubber tube to the
burner before opening the stopcock on the generator.
198 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
To recharge the generator take the frame and the old car-
tridge from the case, throw away the old case and replace with
a fresh one, proceeding as before.
See that fresh water is put in the generator each time a new
cartridge is used.
In the tube through which the service pipe passes is a felt
filter for taking the dust out of the gas. If the filter clogs, un-
screw the cap to which the service- pipe is attached, clean the
felt, or replace it with a new filter, binding it in place by a
stout thread or string.
If the burner of the lamp does not produce a perfectly flat
flame, it has become clogged and should be cleaned with the
burner cleaner furnished, or a new burner should be substituted,
care being taken to put a little white lead on the nipple, if
practicable, so as to insure a tight joint.
In repacking the outfit in the 'case, throw out the water and
wipe the can and generator parts dry. You can not be too care-
ful to keep the apparatus clean. This is especially true of the
small pipe that passes up through the bottom of the cartridge,
with a cap over it. The cap should always be screwed in place,
as its object is to prevent the water from squirting to the top
of the cartridge.
The back of the lamp can be removed by turning the small
thumbscrew on the top and drawing out the pin which holds
the shell into which is fitted the lens. It is not necessary to
take the back out except to replace a lens, as the latter can
be cleaned by opening the front door.
If it is desirable to use the lamp as a hand lantern, the flame
can be turned on full by turning the button in in a vertical
position ; this locks the key open. In the new model depress
the key and lock it with the latch above the key.
One charge of calcium carbide will supply gas to burn about
one hour with the light turned on full, or for approximately
three hours signaling.
If signaling is to be suspended for some hours, empty the
water out of the generator and close valve.
The glass front can be replaced by taking out the wire
spring. The glass cuts should be mounted in a horizontal posi-
tion and, to prevent breaking, should be protected from rain
when the lamp is hot.
INSTRUMENTS. 199
If a glass should be broken and an extra one is not available
to replace it, signaling can be continued by turning the flame
on full and using the heliograph shutter, a cap or piece of
board in front of the lantern to obscure and reveal the flash.
Without the protection of the cover the flame is easily blown
out when turned low, but will not be extinguished even in a
strong wind if the gas is turned full on.
616. Powers and limitation of the acetylene signal lantern.
As conditions are usually more uniform at night than in the
daytime, the signal lantern is probably the most reliable of all
visual signaling outfits. The advantages of this form of appa-
ratus are its portability, speed of operation, and comparatively
great range. The principal disadvantages are due to the inter-
ference caused by rain, fog, and moonlight. The speed attain-
able with the lantern is about the same as that attainable with
the heliograph.
Rockets.
617. Two distinct kinds of rockets are issued, one of which
is adapted to day and the other to night signaling. Rockets
of the amber-smoke type with parachute are used in the day-
time, while sequence rockets are used at night.
Description. Rockets for both day and night signaling are
equipped with parachutes. The smoke rocket is of similar con-
struction to the smoke shell. The sequence rocket is so ar-
ranged at the base that threaded sections of combustible ma-
terial burning either red or white can be attached to it.
Rockets ascend about 700 feet.
Each rocket is supplied in a cylindrical sealed tin can, which
also contain a port fire, wind matches, and for the rockets a
stick in four sections. On the outside of the can is a label
designating the kind of rocket therein contained. These cans
are easily opened by pulling a ring and require no special
opening tool.
The sequence rocket is prepared for use by attaching red or
white sections to the base in such a combination as to form
letters of the alphabet which it is desired to use.
Letters containing the same color in sequence are very diffi-
cult to read and should be avoided whenever possible. If
necessary to use them, blank sections furnished for the purpose
200 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
should be inserted between the units. The base of the rocket
will secure six units.
6 18. When rockets are to be fired the sticks must be firmly
attached, the rocket placed upright in a trough, upon a frame,
or against a post. If the fuse is beneath the paper covering the
" choke" orifice, the paper should be torn off and the rocket
lighted by a port fire. In the rocket now used the fuse extends
through the covering and can be lighted direct. If the night be
damp, this fuse should be exposed only a moment before the
rocket is fired. If several rockets are to be fired in succession,
it is well to prepare them all at the same time, and to have
them all stood upright, but each separated from the other at
a distance of at least 6 feet, else one may ignite the other acci-
dentally. In firing for chronosemic signals, one rocket ought to
be kept ready upon the frame and in reserve, to be fired in place
of one that fails.
If a rocket misses fire, it is to be taken from the stand and
laid on the ground. Its place is at once supplied by a similar
rocket, fired in its stead. The failing rocket is laid on the
ground, pointed away from the station, in order that if it has
only hung and should afterwards ignite it may not disar-
range the signal shown or injure anyone of the party. If the
wind blows freshly, the rocket to be fired should be inclined
slightly against the wind.
Signal rockets are furnished in sealed cans and should not
be removed therefrom until ready for use. Strict economy
should be observed in the use of these articles, and on no ac-
count should they be used for purpose of display.
619. Employment. Rockets are especially valuable in making
preconcerted or emergency signals. On account of the great
amount of ammunition required it is impracticable to spell out
messages with them. These articles should be supplied to out-
posts, detached stations, etc., to be used for signaling the ap-
proach of the enemy, or the happening of unexpected events,
which should be known promptly.
Very's Night Signals.
620. The Very system employs projected red, white, and
green stars, which are shot from pistols held in the hand.
INSTRUMENTS. 201
Description. The Very pistol is a breech-loading, single-shot
pistol, with an 8-inch steel barrel chambered to receive a 12-
gauge commercial shotgun shell. Brass shells are used and are
packed in boxes colored to indicate the character of stars em-
ployed in loading. The color of the star fired may indicate an
element of any alphabet or any special signal which may be
desired. The stars rise to a height of about 200 feet and remain
visible for some time.
For more complete descriptions of apparatus for visual signal-
ing, management of stations, and instructions for operators ref-
erence is made to Manual No. 6, Signal Corps.
CHAPTER IV. FIELD LINES.
General Provisions.
621. From instruction with the buzzer the work will be car-
ried on in actually laying field lines on the drill ground or along
such roads as are available. The units for this work will be
the section, platoon, and company. Whether operating alone or
in combined training each section lays, operates, and maintains
its own line.
622. Two kinds of wire are provided for this work: The 11-
strand field wire, which will be used when possible, and the
3-strand buzzer wire, which will be used only as hereinbefore
prescribed.
THE WIRE CART.
623. The means provided for laying field lines is a wire cart,
with drums and an automatic gear for picking up the wire when
driving back over the line. This is supplemented by carriers
for buzzer wire to be used by men on foot or mounted.
624. Immediately after each drill, maneuver, or other forma-
tion, the wire cart will be thoroughly inspected by the chief of
section. Notes will be made of necessary repairs, and turned
in by him to the company commander. An inspection will be
made prior to each formation by the chief of section, to see
that all the bearings of the cart are clean and oiled, except the
clutch, which will be bright and free from oil. He will see
that the axles are greased and the harness in repair; that oil
202 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
cans are full, and that there is no sediment in the holes to
prevent the oil from reaching the bearings.
TO CLEAN THE WIRE CART.
625. Always after the cart has been used, after ea<;h forma-
tion, before the cart is parked, the drivers and cart operators
will thoroughly clean the chains, friction clutch, and sprocket
wheels with a stiff brush and rough cloth, removing all dust,
dirt, and hard oil. After cleaning, these parts will be gone
over with a well-oiled cloth to prevent rust.
026. Once each week, or when directed by the company com-
mander, the section will be assembled, and, under the super-
vision of the chief of section, the cart given a thorough washing
and cleaning throughout. All dirt and dust will be removed
from the woodwork with a broom or stiff brush, and dust and
oil from the metal parts with a cloth. Hose will be then used
to wash the cart, if available; otherwise pails and sponges will
be used. The metal parts will be wiped dry before oiling.
Occasionally the friction clutch will be taken apart under
the supervision of the chief of section and cleaned w r ith gaso-
line. A light oil will be sparingly used before assembling to
prevent rust.
In the field paulins will be placed over the carts after use,
and not removed until the cart is again used. These paulins
will be folded and placed on the chest when the cart is in
action.
MANIPULATION OF THE WIRE CART.
627. The manipulation of the machinery of the cart for
handling wire will be a part of the. duty of the cart driver,
unless an operator be placed on the cart, in which case the
latter will do this. He will stop the cart at command or signal
from the chief of section.
The reel will always be stopped before a march to the rear is
taken up.
In spooling up wire the reel should be stopped when the loop
gets too short and the clutch should be thrown in before the
loop gets too long.
FIELD LINES. 203
LAYING THE LINES.
628. Slack will be pulled back and the wire tied in every
500 or 600 yards or when the section chief directs. The
line will always be tied at turns, in such manner as to pre-
vent the wire from crossing the roads. Under no circumstances
will the wire be so tied as to subtend the arc formed by any
turn in the road. Should a number of turns come together,
the cart will be halted until the work is satisfactorily per-
formed. Ties will be made by two round turns and a half
hitch, around bushes, trees, or anything fixed in the ground, and
as close to the ground as possible.
At points where the line crosses roads or at crossroads the
line will be raised overhead or buried, unless the road is little
traveled, when it may be tied on each side with plenty of slack.
When there is nothing to tie to, stones will be placed on the
wire on either side of the road.
Generally the wire will be laid to one side of the roadbed to
avoid unnecessary damage to the wire from wheels, etc., but in
unfenced country, where mounted men and stock may approach
the road from the adjacent fields, it will frequently be advisable
to lay it in the road, so that it will be flat and also be more
easily seen.
Plenty of slack wire always will be taken, so that it will drop
off the feet of animals passing over it, without breaking the
wire or throwing the animal.
In crossing railroads or trolley lines, the wire is cut and the
ends run under the rails. To prevent delay, a man of the sec-
tion will be dropped off at such crossings and connect the wire,
then overtake the section at an increased gait.
In passing through villages, the wire will be placed overhead
on telegraph and telephone poles. The climbers carried with
the cart will be used for this purpose. A man will be dropped
for this work ; when completed, he overtakes the section. Men
left behind in laying the wire, for any duty, will follow the line
in overtaking the section, looking for breaks.
The gait to be taken in laying lines will depend on the kind
of troops the section is following and the speed made by them.
In all cases the line will keep in touch with the element it is
to transmit information for. When the last station is cut in,
204 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
horses may be unhitched if the troops seem likely to remain
in place any length of time.
On the care with which lines are laid will depend in no small
degree their efficiency. Carelessly laid lines will need much
attention to repair breaks, and will cause many delays in mes-
sages, and no end of annoyance to other troops.
Speed will always be sacrificed to carefulness in this work.
Wire fences, telephone and telegraph lines may sometimes be
used to advantage.
OPERATING THE LINES.
Stations and Call Letters.
629. Each section will be assigned call letters for four sta-
tions, which in general should not exceed four. The first section
will be given the letters A, B, C, and D; the second section
the letters F, G, H, and K ; the third section, M, N, Q, and R ;
the fourth section, S, U, W, and X. The stations are assigned
the call letters in order of establishment, not location, begin-
ning with the first letter. The call of headquarters is SO,
which will be its call whenever it may be on the line, suspending
for the time being the letter of the station where it may be.
This applies to the first station established as well as to the
later ones.
Branch lines electrically connected with the main line have
offices given calls as if on the main line.
An office on a branch line not connected with the main line
will be assigned the call letter of the station where the branch
goes out, adding J to it.
630. As soon as a station is established the operator will
call up the initial station and report. The opening of all sta-
tions, including the initial station, will be reported to the officer
or noncommissioned officer in charge of the line, and by the
latter to the company commander and to the commanding
officer for whose use the line was established.
Each operator will have his personal sign, as Smith " SM,"
Johnson " JO," etc.
631. To open station with buzzer the operator will attach
the buzzer connector to the line wire and ground rod. Care
will be taken that the teeth of the connector have penetrated
FIELD LINES. 205
the insulation of the line wire. Damp ground will be sought
for the ground rod; if not available the ground will be damp-
ened around it with water from the canteen.
The operators will not leave their buzzers unless properly
relieved by higher authority.
At night, when lanterns are necessary at a station, the light
must be so placed as to conceal it from hostile observation.
When it becomes necessary to move a station some distance
from the line and it is not practicable to use field wire for
extending the line, the buzzer wire carried by the lineman may
be used.
The buzzer carried by the lineman may be used for opening
stations on branch lines.
632. Stations will be conducted in a military manner. Si-
lence w T ill be preserved, except conversation relative to business.
The lines will not be used for conversational purposes between
operators.
Buzzers will be kept dry. In case of wet weather the shelter
tents of messenger and operator will be made into an office.
No unauthorized persons will be allowed around stations.
MAINTAINING THE LINES.
633. Each lineman will be equipped with a carrier with one-
fourth mile buzzer wire and a buzzer for testing the line. This
will enable linemen to determine in what part of the line a
break may be. Intermediate stations will assist in this, and
when the section in which the break exists has been located the
messenger or any available man will be sent to find and repair
it if no lineman is at hand. In following the line to locate
breaks the lineman will take up the gallop, following the line
with* his eye where it is raised from the ground, and with the
pike where it is on the ground. He picks it up with the hook.
In order to prevent a knot or splice from being caught in the
hook and jerking the pole from his hand he raises the pike in a
horizontal position, slips the wire out of the hook and on to the
handle, and allows the wire to run on it near the hook, the
shoulder of the hook keeping it from slipping off. By lowering
the pike and turning it around in the hand the wire slips
quickly to the ground.
206 TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
634. To repair a break the ends will be first scraped, the
scraped ends tied in a square knot, the loose ends twisted
around the line wire, and all carefully insulated with tape. The
knots should be pulled tight and made as small as possible, so
that in reeling up the knots will not jerk the pike and glove
from the hand.
635. Lines which have been hastily laid will be patrolled at
once, the linemen proceeding from each end until they meet,
reporting from there by wire to their sections for instructions.
In thus patrolling lines it will be with a view to placing the
wire flat on the ground, should it have become taut after the
section passed, and otherwise arranging it to lessen the likeli-
hood of breaks. Should a line cross a macadamized road,
heavily traveled by artillery and cavalry, with no means to
place it overhead, a lineman will be left at the point to repair
any possible break. Should travel over the road practically
cease, he will ask for instructions by wire.
Frequent patrols will be made over lines which pass over
fields of grain, weeds, or underbrush in unfenced country, and
can neither be placed flat on the ground nor overhead. Breaks
are more apt to occur with lines thus laid.
On all occasions in handling wire, such as reeling it on to
the reels in filling them or reeling it off for repairs, the section
chief will have leaks in insulation repaired and all connections
looked over. This aids materially in the working of the lines
when the wire is laid.
RECOVERING THE WIRE.
636. Wire will not be picked up at a faster gait than a trot.
Should a more rapid gait become necessary to escape capture,
the wire will be cut and abandoned. The real object is to lay
wire and not to pick it up. Should wire have to be abandoned,
the cart will refill its reel at the earliest possible moment from
the reserve. Wire will only be temporarily abandoned at ma-
neuvers. The section will return for it when the maneuver is
completed. Under no circumstances will wire be reeled up on
the reels or spools until any breaks in the metallic continuity
of the wire have been repaired.
PART VI.
SIGNAL, TROOPS IN THE FIELD.
POSITION.
637. The position of signal troops will be governed by the
tactical requirements of the situation. Detachments of signal
troops must necessarily, whether on the march, in camp, or in
combat, be near the commanding officer of the troops with
whom communication must be maintained.
To this end commanding officers of signal troops will make
such distribution of their command as will enable signal troops
to best secure this result without interfering with the function
of other troops.
638. The position of the signal officer is usually with the
commanding general or with the commanding officer of the unit
for which he is furnishing lines. From this point he can get a
grasp of the situation and be able to direct the operations of
his platoons and sections to the best advantage. All contem-
plated changes in the location of wire carts and stations will
be reported to him.
MARCHES.
639. The average march for field signal troops, on ordinarily
good roads, is from 15 to 25 miles per day. With rare excep-
tions the walk is invariably the gait. Necessity may require
alternating the trot and walk, or an unbroken trot, for several
miles.
Long marches or expeditions will be begun moderately; 12 to
15 miles per day is enough for the first marches. This may be
increased when the horses are inured to their work.
A halt of from 5 to 10 minutes is made at the end of every
hour, for the purpose of adjusting saddles and harness, etc.
When troops march for the greater part of the day, a halt of
about an hour is made near the middle of the day. At this
halt cinchas will be loosened and horses unhitched.
Chiefs of platoons and of sections, without waiting for ex-
press instruction, will give such orders as may be necessary for
helping horses or wagons out of difficulty. All men of the sec-
207
208 SIGNAL TROOPS IN THE FIELD.
tion will be dismounted and used for this purpose if necessary.
The noncommissioned officer in charge will take similar action
in his train if circumstances make it necessary.
An officer or noncommissioned officer may be sent forward to
select a camp ground and arrange for wood and water.
Upon arrival of the company in camp, damages must be re-
paired without delay ; wagons repaired and greased ; and horses
shod and cared for.
640. When an accident happens to a wagon it is pulled out of
the column, if possible, so as not to interrupt the march ; other-
wise, sections in rear pass it by on the most convenient flank,
so as not to delay the march. It will resume its place in the
column when the damage is repaired, as soon as it is possible
to pass the intervening sections. If a section wire cart or
wagon is damaged, the chief of section, with the necessary num-
ber of men, will remain with it until repaired unless the damage
is beyond repair.
641. More extended instructions for the conduct of marches
will be found in the Field Service Regulations.
CAMPING.
642. Camping, while on the march, will be in line, column
of platoons, or sections, according to the nature of the available
camping space. The company is formed as desired, with proper
intervals or distances, and the platoons or sections, as the case
may be, turned over to the chiefs of the units into which the
camp is established. The men dismount at the command of
their chief; unsaddle and place the saddles in a line; hold
their horses until the picket line is up, when they tie on the
line, reform, and pitch tents. ( See par. 649. )
643. The wagons will be parked with about 15 yards interval,
on the most convenient flank. The wagons of the train may
be parked in a similar manner 15 yards in rear of them. The
section picket lines will be carried on the carts. While the men
individually mounted are unsaddling the other men attach the
picket lines. The horses of each section are tied in the space
between the carts, commencing with the first section. This
work is supervised by the company commander.
644. The harness is placed on the footboards and covered
with the paulins used for protecting carts and instruments.
SIGNAL TROOPS IN THE FIELD. 209
Saddles are placed alongside the tongues under the paulins,
and this equipment protected from the weather by the cart
paulins.
645. Should it become necessary to camp in the road, the
shelter tents can be placed to one side in line and the picket
line extended from one flank, as indicated above. The officers'
tents will be placed in the locality most available and the
kitchen in the most convenient place for the men. Tents will
be faced according to prevailing weather. Men not assigned to
sections will pitch tents with the train.
646. On arriving in camp, sinks will be dug at once. If the
march is to be resumed the following day, some sanitary ar-
rangement may be made; ordinarily sinks with brush screens
will be necessary.
647. Camp will be broken in the following order: Irnme-
mediately after reveille the men will feed their horses and, if
time permits, groom for 20 minutes, each man caring for his
own horse.
Tents will be struck and rolls made, which is followed by
breakfast, then water call, followed by boots and saddles. The
picket lines are placed upon the carts and the company formed
in column of sections or as directed by the captain.
648. In maintaining extended lines, the men will camp in
pairs, squads, or sections, as the nature of the duty dictates.
For camps of any duration, or permanent camps, instructions
contained in Field Service Regulations will be followed.
PITCHING TENTS.
Single Shelter Tents.
649. The captain causes the company to form for shelter
tents.
The officers fall out, the first sergeant falls in as rear-rank
man of the right file, composed of himself and guidon ; blank files
are filled by the file closers or by men taken from the front rank.
The captain then commands : 1. To the left (right) take shelter
tent intervals; 2. MARCH; 3. COMPANY; 4. HALT; 5. FRONT;
6. PITCH TENTS.
At the command march, all face to the left and move off in
succession, the front and rear rank men alternating. Each
82940 11 14
210 SIGNAL TROOPS IN THE FIELD.
rear-rank man places himself in rear of his front-rank man in a
single column; as the line is being extended each man grasps
with his left hand the right wrist of the man in front.
If intervals are taken to the right, the front-rank man of each
file follows his rear-rank man, and each man grasps with his
right hand the left wrist of the man in front.
At the command halt, given as the second man from the right
has his interval, all halt, face to the front, dress to the right,
and correct their intervals by moving to the left until the arms
are fully extended.
At the command front, all drop their hands.
At the command pitch tents, each rear-rank man moves back
to four paces in rear of his front-rank man ; all unsling and
open the blanket rolls and take out the shelter half, poles, and
pins; the front-rank man places one pin in the ground at the
point where his right heel, kept in position until this time,
was planted. Each then spreads his shelter half, triangle to the
rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, rear-rank man's
half on the right. The halves are then buttoned together. Each
front-rank man joins his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of
the halves, and holds the pole upright beside the pin placed in
the ground; his rear-rank man, using the pins in front, pins
down the front corners of the tent on the line of pins, stretching
the canvas taut ; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the rope
and drives the pin at such distance in front of the pole as to
hold the rope taut. Both then go to the rear of the tent ; the
rear-rank man adjusts the pole and the front-rank man drives '
the pins. The rest of the pins are then driven by both men, the
rear-rank man working on the right.
As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges the con-
tents of the blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in
front of his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin.
The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter
tents are pitched, should all be of the same length.
650. Shelter tents are pitched by a squad, section, or platoon
in the same manner as by a company.
Double Shelter Tents.
651. The double shelter tent is formed by buttoning together
the square ends of two single tents. Two complete tents, except
SIGNAL TROOPS IN THE FIELD. 211
one pole, are used. Two guy ropes are used at each end, the
guy pins being placed in front of the corner pins.
The double shelter tents are pitched by Nos. 1 and 2 front and
rear rank, and by Nos. 3 and 4 front and rear rank; the men
falling in on the left are numbered, counting off if necessary.
The captain gives the same commands as before, inserting
double before shelter in the first command, and before tents in
the last command.
The commands are executed in the same manner as when
pitching single shelter tents, with the following exceptions :
Only the front-rank men grasp wrists; the rear-rank men
cover their file leaders at 6 paces.
The first sergeant places himself on the right of the guidon
and with him pitches a single shelter tent.
Only the odd numbers of the front rank mark the line with
the tent pin.
All the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the tent
is to occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the tri-
angular ends to the front. All four halves are then buttoned
together, first the ridges and then the square ends. The front
corners of the tent are pinned by the front-rank men, the odd
number holding the poles, the even number driving the pins.
The rear-rank men similarly pin the rear corners.
While the odd numbers steady the poles, each even number
of the front rank takes his pole and enters the tent where, as-
sisted by the even number of the rear rank, he adjusts the
pole to the center eyes of the shelter halves in the following
order : First, the lower half of the front tent ; second, the lower
half of the rear tent; third, the upper half of the front tent;
fourth, the upper half of the rear tent. The guy ropes are then
adjusted.
The tents having been pitched, the triangular ends are turned
back, contents of the rolls arranged, and the men stand at
attention, each opposite his own shelter half and facing out from
the tent.
652. To pitch single or double shelter tents by battalion, the
major causes the right (left) guides to cover, dresses the bat-
talion on the covering guides, and commands : 1. Pitch (double)
tents. Each captain causes his company to pitch tents by the
same commands and in the same manner as previously de-
scribed.
212 SIGNAL TROOPS IN THE FIELD.
TO STRIKE SHELTER TENTS.
653. Everything having been removed from the tents: 1.
Strike tents, 2. DOWN, 3. To the right (left) assemble, 4. MARCH.
At the first command the side pins are removed; the front
rank men steady the front pole, the rear rank men the rear
pole, and all remaining pins are removed.
At the second command, or last note of the genera/, the tents
are lowered, blanket rolls packed and slung, and the men stand
at attention in front and rear of the places lately occupied by
their tents at their original places after extension.
At the fourth command they close in to the right and re-form
company.
COMMON AND WALL TENTS.
654. Four men, numbered from 1 to 4, consecutively, pitch
each tent.
Nos. 1 and 2 place the ridgepole perpendicular to the com-
pany street, with one end against the position pin ; Nos. 3 and
4 drive a pin at the other end of the ridgepole. Nos. 1 and 2
mark the positions of the four corner guy-rope pins by placing
the ridgepole parallel to the company street, to the right (fac-
ing the tent) of the position pin; Nos. 3 and 4 drive a large pin
one pace in front of the outer end of the ridgepole. The other
three corner guy pins are set in succession in the same manner,
going first straight to the rear, then across the tent, and then
to the front. All four then spread the tent on the ground it is
to occupy : Nos. 1 at the front and 2 at the rear insert the up-
rights. The ridgepole and uprights are joined, the pole pins
inserted in the eyelets of the tent and fly, and the tent raised
to a vertical position with the poles at the pins. Nos. 1 and 2
hold the tent in position; No. 3 places the front guy ropes of
tent and fly, No. 4, the rear, on their pins, and tighten the same
so as to hold the poles vertical. The wall pins are then driven
through the loops, walls hanging vertically. The other pins are
then driven on line with the corner pins and in prolongation of
the seams of the tent.
CONICAL WALL TENTS.
655. The conical wall tent is pitched by eight men. The
ranking noncommissioned officer numbers the men from 1 to 7
SIGNAL TROOPS IN THE FIELD. 213
and superintends the work. Upon the hood lines of the tent
are placed three marks; the first about 8 feet 3 inches, the
second about 11 feet 3 inches, the third .about 14 feet 2 inches
from the hood ring ; the first marks the distance from the cen-
ter to the wall pins, the second to the guy pins, and the distance
between the second and third is the distance between guy pins.
These distances vary slightly for different tents and should be
verified by actual experiment before permanently marking the
ropes. They should also be frequently verified on account of
the stretching of the rope. To locate the position of guy pins
after the first, the hood being held on the center pin, with the
left hand hold the outer mark on the pin last set, with the right
hand grasp the rope at the center mark and move the hand
to the right so as to have both sections of the rope taut; the
center mark is then over the position desired ; the inner mark is
over the position of the corresponding wall pin.
To pitch the tent, No. 1 places the tent pole on the ground,
socket end against the door pin, pole perpendicular to the com-
pany street. No. 2 drives the center pin at the other extremity
of the pole. No. 3 drives a wall pin on each side of and 1 foot
from the door pin. No. 4 places the open tripod flat on the
ground with its center near the center pin. The whole party
then places the tent, fully opened, on the ground it is to occupy,
the center at the center pin, the door at the door pin.
The noncommissioned officer in charge holds the hood ring on
the center pin, and superintends from that position. No. 1
stretches the hood rope over the right (facing the tent) wall
pin and No. 2 drives the first guy pin at the middle mark. No. 1
marks the position of the guy pins in succession and No. 2
drives a pin lightly in each position as soon as marked. At the
same time No. 5 inserts small pins in succession through the
wall loops and places the pins in position against the inner
mark on the hood rope, where they are partly driven by No. 6.
No. 4 distributes large pins ahead of Nos. 1 and 2 ; No. 7, small
pins ahead of Nos. 5 and 6; No. 3 fellows Nos. 1 and 2 and
drives the guy pins home. No. 7, after distributing his pins,
takes an ax and drives home the pins behind Nos. 5 and 6.
No. 4, after distributing his pins, follows No. 3 and loops the
guy ropes over the pins.
Nos. 1, 2, and 3, the pins being driven, slip under the tent
and place the pin of the pole through the tent and hood rings
214 SIGNAL TROOPS IN THE FIELD.
while the noncommissioned officer in charge places the hood in
position. Nos. 1, 2, and 3 then raise the pole to a vertical
position and insert the end in the socket of the tripod. They
then raise the tripod to its proper height, keeping the center
of the tripod over the center pin. While they hold the pole
vertical Nos. 4, 5, 6, and 7 adjust four guy ropes, one in each
quadrant of the tent, to hold the pole in its vertical position,
and then the remaining guy ropes. As soon as these are ad-
justed the men inside drive a pin at each foot of the tripod, if
necessary, to hold it in place.
TO STRIKE COMMON, WALL, AND CONICAL WALL TENTS.
656. 1. Strike t$nts, 2. DOWN.
The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner
guy ropes four quadrant guy ropes in case of the conical wall
tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle.
One man removes each guy from its pin, and all hold the tent
in a vertical position until the command down, or the last note
of the genera/, and then lower it to the indicated side.
The canvas is then folded, or rolled, and tied, the poles, or
tripod and pole fastened together and the remaining pins col-
lected.
TO FOLD TENTS.
657. Wall tents. Spread the tent flat on its side and place
all guys but two over on the canvas; fold the triangular ends
over so as to make the canvas rectangular; fold both ends so
that they meet at the center, and then fold one end over on the
other ; fold the bottom and ridge over so that they meet at the
center of the strip, and then fold one end over on the other.
Fold the fly into four folds, parallel to its length, then in a
similar manner across its length, making a rectangle with
dimensions about the same as the folded tent.
Place the fly on the tent, cross the two free guys, and tie
them so that they pass over the ends and across the sides.
The hospital and command tent are folded in the same man-
ner as the wall tent.
Conical wall tents. Spread the tent flat, with the door up;
holding the ring vertical, fold the two edges in so they meet at
SIGNAL TROOPS IN THE FIELD. 215
the center, and again fold in the same manner ; place the hood
on one half and fold the other half over on it; turn wall over
toward ring, fold coming at about middle of height of wall ; two
men working together then roll from the ring down, placing
knees on each fold to make bundle compact and flat.
Tie the bundle with the two free guys, as in case of the
wall tent.
GENERAL REMARKS.
658. As soon as the lines of company streets are established
the positions of the tents should be marked, from the flank near-
est the officers' tents, by pins. The front pole of the wall and
common tent and the door pins of the conical wall tents occupy
the points so marked. The distance between pins may be deter-
mined by pacing or by a light cord with the distances marked
upon it. These distances are : For wall tents, 8 paces ; common
tents, 6 paces; conical wall tents, 10 paces. The pins marking
the position of the tents are, when practicable, set on a straight
line, and the company officers verify and correct the alignment
of such pins in the quickest and most convenient manner.
659. Wall pins are so driven as to slope slightly away from
the tent ; guy pins so as to slope slightly toward the tent.
660. Each tent, its fly, hood, poles, and tripod, should have
the same number.
661. The conical wall tent complete consists of 1 tent and
hood, 76 pounds; 1 tent pole and tripod, 32 pounds; 48 pins,
about 20 pounds ; total weight, 128 pounds. Its dimensions are :
Diameter, 16 feet ; height, 10 feet ; height of wall, 3 feet ;
packed, contains 13 cubic feet.
662. The wall tent complete consists of 1 tent, 43 pounds;
1 fly, 15 pounds; 1 set poles, 25 pounds; 10 large and 18 small
tent pins, about 15 pounds; total weight, 98 pounds. Its di-
mensions are : Length of ridge, 9 feet ; width, 8 feet 11 inches ;
height, 8i feet ; height of wall, 3 feet 9 inches ; packed, contains
6 cubic feet.
663. The common tent complete consists of 1 tent, 26 pounds ;
1 set poles, 15 pounds ; 24 small tent pins, weight about 9
pounds; total weight, 50 pounds. Its dimensions are: Length
of ridge, 6 feet 11 inches ; width, 8 feet 4 inches ; height, 6
feet 10 inches ; height of wall, 2 feet.
216 SIGNAL TROOPS IN THE FIELD.
664. The shelter-tent equipment of each enlisted man con-
sists of the following :
(a) One shelter half, weight 3 pounds.
(6) One pole in 3 joints, 47 inches long; weight, 10i ounces.
(c) Five tent pins, 9 inches long; weight, 10 ounces.
The shelter tent is pitched by two men, whose combined
equipment make a complete tent. The tent, when pitched, oc-
cupies a space 5 feet 4 inches deep and 6 feet 4 inches wide;
the two triangular parts, when pinned to the ground, inclose
an additional triangular space 20 inches deep.
665. In striking tents, common and wall tents are, unless
otherwise directed, lowered to the right facing out from the
tent door; conical wall tents away from the door.
PART VII.
CEREMONIES.
CHAPTER I. GENERAL RULES.
666. On occasions of ceremony, except funerals and reviews
of large forces, troops will be arranged from right to left in
line and from head to rear in column in the following order:
First, Infantry; second, Field Artillery; third, Field Signal
troops; fourth, Cavalry.
Artillery, Engineer, and Signal Corps troops, equipped as
Infantry, are posted as Infantry; dismounted Cavalry and
Marines attached to the Army are on the left of the Infantry in
the order named; companies or detachments of the Hospital
Corps and mounted detachments of engineers are assigned to
places according to the nature of the ceremony. When Cavalry
and Field Artillery are reviewed together without other troops
the Artillery is posted on the left; if, however, Field Signal
troops are present, they are posted between the Cavalry and
Field Artillery. Troops in column in funeral escorts will be
arranged from head to rear in the following order : First, Cav-
alry ; second, Field Signal troops ; third, Field Artillery ; fourth,
Infantry. In the same arm, Regulars, Militia in the service of
the United States, and Volunteers are posted in line from right
to left or in column from head to rear in the order named.
In reviews of large bodies of troops the different arms and
classes are posted at the discretion of the commanding general,
due regard being paid to their position in camp. On all other
occasions troops of all classes are posted at the discretion of
the general or senior commander.
667. At formations for ceremony sabers are drawn. Mounted
officers in facing toward the line and in resuming their front
always execute a left about.
Staff and noncommissioned staff officers, when it is not other-
wise prescribed, draw and return saber with their chief.
668. A noncommissioned officer in command of a company
takes post on the right of the company in line with it. After
217
218 CEREMONIES.
it he takes the post of the captain when the battalion
is in column.
Companies of the battalion are formed and posted as pre-
scribed in paragraph 329.
CHAPTER II. REVIEWS.
GENERAL RULES.
669. The adjutant or the adjutant general posts men or
otherwise marks the points where the column changes direc-
tion, in such manner that the right flank in passing the review-
ing officer shall be about 10 yards from him.
670. The post of the reviewing officer, usually opposite the
center of the line, is marked by a flag.
671. The reviewing officer, his staff, and others at the review-
ing stand salute the standard as it passes, whether the stand-
ard salutes or not; those with arms not drawn salute by un-
covering. The reviewing officer returns the salute of the com-
manding officer of the troops, and of such commanding officer
enly.
672. The staff of the reviewing officer is in single rank,
yards in rear of him, in the following order from right to left :
Chief of Staff, officers of the General Staff Corps, adjutant gen-
eral, aids, then the other members of the staff in the order of
rank, the senior on the right ; the flag and orderlies place them-
selves 3 yards in rear of the staff, the flag on the right.
673. Officers of the same or higher grade and distinguished
personages invited to accompany the reviewing officer place
themselves on his left ; their staff and orderlies place them-
selves, respectively, on the left of the staff and orderlies of the
reviewing officer; all others who accompany the reviewing
officer place themselves on the left of his staff, their orderlies
in rear. A staff officer is designated to escort distinguished
personages and to indicate to them their proper positions.
674. When riding around the troops, the reviewing officer
may direct that his staff, flag, and orderlies remain at the post
of the reviewing officer or that only his personal staff and flag
shall accompany him ; in either of these cases the commanding
officer alone accompanies the reviewing officer. If the review-
ing officer is accompanied by his staff, the staff officers of the
REVIEWS. 219
commander place themselves on the right of the staff of the
reviewing officer.
While passing in review or riding around troops the staff is
formed in one or more ranks, according to its size.
675. The staff, flag, and orderlies of brigade commanders
place themselves in the order prescribed for the staff, flag, and
orderlies of the reviewing officer.
676. When the reviewing officer is not in front or in rear
of a regiment, or other separate organization, its commander
may cause it to stand at ease, to rest, or to dismount and rest,
and to resume attention and mount, but so as not to interfere
with the ceremony.
677. When the commanding officer of the troops turns out
of the column his post is on the right of the reviewing officer;
his staff, in single rank, on the right of the staff already there ;
his flag and orderlies in rear of his staff
When the column has passed, the commanding officer, without
changing position, salutes the reviewing officer and then with
his staff and orderlies rejoins his command.
If the person reviewing the command is not mounted, the
commanding officer and his staff, on turning out of the column
after passing the reviewing officer, dismount preparatory to
taking post on the right of the reviewing officer and his staff.
In such case the salute of a commanding officer, prior to rejoin-
ing his command, is made with the hand before remounting.
678. When the general, the colonel, or the major faces the
line to give commands, the staff and orderlies do not change
position.
679. Each guidon and, when the rank of the reviewing
officer entitles him to the honor, each standard salutes at the
command, present saber; and again in passing in review when
6 yards from the reviewing officer. The standard and guidons
are raised at the command, carry saber, or when they have
passed 6 yards beyond the reviewing officer.
680. The band of each battalion, corps, or regiment plays
while the reviewing officer is passing in front of and in rear of
the organization.
During the march in review each band, immediately after pass-
ing the reviewing officer, turns out of the column, takes post in
front of and facing him, and continues to play until its organi-
zation has passed, then ceases playing and follows in rear of
220 CEREMONIES.
its organization; the band of the following organization com-
mences to play as soon as the preceding band has ceased. The
trumpeters of each organization, except those pertaining to the
organization commanders, are consolidated in rear of the band.
If the band be not present, the trumpeters of each organiza-
tion, with the exceptions above noted, are consolidated and
posted in single rank in a position corresponding to that of the
band. They conform to what is prescribed for the band, the
chief trumpeter taking post and performing the duties of the
drum major.
This rule applies to all ceremonies.
681. If the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the
honor, the march or flourishes are sounded by the trumpeters
when sabers are presented, and sounded again in passing in
review at the moment the standard salutes, by the trumpeters
halted in front of the reviewing officer.
Trumpeters with the organization commanders do not sound
the march or flourishes.
682. The formation for review may be modified to suit the
ground, and the present saber and the ride around the line by
the reviewing officer may be dispensed with.
683. If the post of the reviewing officer is on the left of
the column the troops inarch in review with the guide left; the
commanding officer and his staff turn out of the column to the
left, taking post as prescribed above, but to the left of the
reviewing officer.
684. Field companies of the Signal Corps pass in review at
a walk, trot, or gallop. When passing at the trot or gallop no
salutes are made except by the commander of the troops when
he leaves the reviewing officer.
685. When the command is to pass at an increased gait the
band (or trumpeters, if no band is present) remains in front
of the reviewing officer and continues to play until the column
has completed its second change of direction after passing the
reviewing officer. As soon as the increased gait is taken up
by the column the band plays in appropriate time, ceasing when
the column has again completed the second change of direction
after passing the reviewing officer. Upon the completion of
the review, the band returns to the position it occupied before
marching in review or is dismissed, as may be directed, if
there be more than one band, the band last in the column
REVIEWS. 221
remains in front of the reviewing officer; the others turn out
of the column when the increased gait is taken up by their
respective organizations, and rejoin them, or are dismissed on
the termination of the review.
686. In reviews of brigades or larger commands each bat-
talion, after its rear has passed the reviewing officer 50 yards,
takes an increased gait for 100 yards in order not to interfere
with the march of the column in rear.
The troops, having passed the reviewing officer, return to
their camps by the most practicable route, being careful not
to delay the march of the troops in rear of them.
687. When field companies of the Signal Corps are reviewed
in line with Cavalry, Infantry, or Field Artillery, they are
formed with the mounted men aligned on the front rank of
the Infantry or on the rank of Cavalry, or on the lead drivers
of the Artillery.
At the command close ranks, march, with infantry, or attention,
posts, with cavalry or field artillery, the Signal Corps commander
commands: 1. Attention; 2. POSTS. The chiefs of platoon and
standard bearer resume their posts in line.
The instrument, kit, and field wagons do not accompany the
companies at the review unless so ordered.
688. When it is necessary that an organization should be
reviewed before an inspector junior in rank to the commanding
officer, the commanding officer receives the review and is ac-
companied by the inspector, who takes post on his left.
BATTALION REVIEW.
689. The battalion being in line, the major faces to the
front; the reviewing officer takes his post; the major turns
about and commands : 1. Prepare for review; 2. MARCH. The
staff remains in position, facing to the front.
At the command march, the chiefs of platoons, and the stand-
ard bearers, if present with the standards, move up on the line
of captains. Noncommissioned officers acting as chiefs of pla-
toon do not move up on the line of captains.
The major then faces to the front.
The reviewing officer moves a few yards toward the major
and halts; the major turns about, commands: 1. Present; 2.
SABER, and again turns about and salutes.
222 CEREMONIES.
The reviewing officer returns the salute, the major turns
about, brings the battalion to carry saber, and again turns to
the front.
The reviewing officer approaches to within about 6 yards of
the major, the latter salutes, returns saber, joins the reviewing
officer, takes post on his right, and accompanies him around the
battalion. The reviewing officer proceeds to the right of the
band, passes along the front of the officers to the left of the line,
and returns to the right, passing in rear of the line. The re-
viewing officer and those accompanying him salute the standard
when passing in front of it.
While the reviewing officer is riding around the battalion
the band plays, ceasing when he leaves the right to return to
his post.
On arriving again at the right of the line the major salutes,
halts, and, when the reviewing officer and staff have passed,
moves directly to his post in front of the battalion, faces it,
draws saber, and commands : 1. Attention; 2. POSTS. The chiefs
of platoon and standard bearers execute a left about and take
their posts in line. The major commands: 1. By the right flank;
2. MARCH; 3. BATTALION; 4. HALT. The command halt is given
as soon as the sections have completed the turn. The band
takes post 36 yards in front of the leading company.
The column being formed, the major commands: 1. Pass in
review; 2. Forward; 3. MARCH. At the command march the
column marches off, the band playing. Without command
from the major the column changes direction at the points indi-
cated, and column of companies or platoons at full distance
with guide to the right is formed successively to the left at the
second change of direction. The major takes his post 24 yards
in front of the band, immediately after the second changer
The band having passed the reviewing officer, turns to the left
out of the column, takes post in front of and facing the review-
ing officer, and remains there until the review terminates.
When the major is 6 yards from the reviewing officer he and
his staff salute, turning the head and eyes sharply to the right
When the major has passed 6 yards "beyond the reviewing officer
he and his staff resume the carry, turning the head and eyes to
the front.
The other officers, noncommissioned staff officers and the
drum major, salute at the point prescribed for the major, turn-
REVIEWS. 223
ing the head and eyes as above described. Noncommissioned
officers commanding platoons salute with the hand.
The reviewing officer returns the salutes of the major and of
the standard only.
The major, having saluted, takes post on the right of the
reviewing officer, remains there until the rear of the battalion
has passed, then salutes and rejoins his battalion. The band
ceases to play when the column has completed its second change
of direction after passing the reviewing officer.
If the battalion is to pass around again at an increased gait,
in order to keep the original first section at the head of the
column each company should execute right by sections just
before executing the first change of direction after passing the
reviewing officer.
When the battalion arrives at its original position in column
the major commands: 1, Trot (or Gallop); 2. MARCH.
The battalion passes in review as before, except that no sa-
lutes are rendered except by the major when he leaves the
reviewing officer.
The review terminates when the rear company has passed the
reviewing officer : the band then ceases to play and rejoins the
battalion or is dismissed. The major and his staff rejoin the
battalion.
The reviewing officer may prescribe how often the column
shall pass in review and the gait or gaits to be used.
REVIEW OF A BATTALION WITH CLOSED INTERVALS.
690. The battalion is formed in line, each company being at
closed intervals. The review is conducted according to the
principles previously explained, except that instead of first
executing by the right flank the battalion is formed in column
of companies with closed intervals but full distances, and
passes in review in that formation.
691. When space is limited the battalion may be formed in
line with each company in platoon column. The review will be
conducted on the general principles previously explained, the
battalion passing in review either in platoon column or in
column of companies at full distance, as before.
224 CEREMONIES.
GARRISON REVIEW.
692. A review of a body of troops less than a division, com-
posed of different arms, is conducted on the principles laid down
for a battalion.
The senior officer present commands the review; the senior
officer present with each arm commands that arm. The troops
of each arm form on the line according to the principles pre-
scribed in the drill regulations for that arm.
Each commander gives the commands necessary to carry out
the orders of the officer commanding the review.
Mounted troops will not be put in march to pass in review
until the rear element of the foot troops has completed the
second change of direction. The commanding officer, having
saluted, turns out and joins the reviewing officer. The other
commanders do not turn out of the column.
CHAPTER III. INSPECTIONS.
GENERAL RULES.
693. The inspector prescribes the kind of inspection which he
desires.
694. If there be both inspection and review, the inspection
may either precede or follow the review. When an inspection
follows a review with the other arms, the Signal Corps pro-
ceeds, at the proper time, to the place designated by the in-
spector and is inspected separately.
695. Officers draw and return saber with the captain.
COMPANY INSPECTION MOUNTED.
696. The company being in line at normal intervals, the cap-
tain forms the mounted men of the sections in line in front of
the carts and pack mules by the commands.
1. Sections; 2. Left front into line; 3. MARCH; 4. COMPANY;
5. HALT.
697. He then draws saber and commands: 1. Prepare for in-
spection; 2. MARCH; 3. FRONT.
At the first command the captain goes to the right of the
company, at a trot or gallop, and takes post facing to the left,
INSPECTIONS. 225
8 yards in front of the guidon ; and the trumpeters take post 2
yards to the right of and abreast of the guidon.
At the second command, the chiefs of platoons move forward
8 yards, and the drivers and all individually mounted men
dress to the right.
The captain verifies the alignment of the chiefs of platoons
of the mounted men in line and of the carts, returns to his post
in front of the guidon on line with the chiefs of platoons, com-
mands Front, and faces to the front.
The chiefs of platoons cast their eyes to the front as soon as
the alignment is verified.
The captain then faces to the left and commands : 1. Inspec-
tion; 2. PISTOL. As the inspector approaches, the men take the
position of inspection pistol and the trumpeters raise their
trumpets for inspection. Revolvers are returned as soon as
inspected.
The inspector begins the inspection by passing around and
inspecting the chiefs of platoons, who, after being inspected,
face to the rear and remain at ease at their posts unless di-
rected to assist in the inspection. The inspector then goes to
the right of the company and inspects the trumpeters and
guidon, after which he inspects each section in turn, commenc-
ing at the right flank, passing along the front of the sections,
and returning in the rear of the sections.
To inspect the company more minutely, the captain may cause
the men to dismount, and without forming ranks, conduct the
inspection.
To inspect the technical signal equipment carried, the captain
dismounts the company, if not already dismounted, forms ranks
and commands: 1. Inspection; 2. EQUIPMENT.
At this command the horses of the sections are turned over to
the horse holders, and the men fall in, in front of their horses.
The chiefs of section then march the sections by the right flank
of the sections to the rear of the carts or pack mules, faces them
to the front, and commands FALL OUT.
The equipment is then removed from the carts or mules and
placed upon the ground in the following order, from right to
left:
82940 11 15
226 CEREMONIES.
ARRANGEMENT OF INSTRUMENTS FOR INSPECTION FROM RIGHT
TO LEFT.
Wireless.
Batteries.
Pack chest.
Antenna and eonnUTpoise box.
Mast.
Wire.
Buzzers, field.
Buzzers, cavalry.
Ground rods.
Kits, inspection pocket.
Pads, message.
Carriers, wire.
Hatchets.
Pikes, wire.
Flags, etc.
When the equipment has been laid out, the sections will form
in single rank, in rear of the equipment, facing to the front.
Upon the completion of the inspection of a section, its equip-
ment is replaced without command and the section is formed
and marched back to the horses, where the men resume their
horses and stand at ease, until the completion of the inspection.
All sections, when not being inspected, stand at ease awaiting
the approach of the inspector, and are brought to attention by
the chief of sections on his approach.
When the captain dismounts the company, the guidon dis-
mounts with it ; the chiefs of platoons return saber, dismount,
and stand to horse facing their platoons; the captain returns
saber and dismounts and his horse is held by a trumpeter. If
the arms are not to be inspected, the commands therefor are
omitted.
The chiefs of platoons, when the inspection of the rank be-
gins, face toward the company and remain at ease, resuming
front on the completion of the inspection of arms, or the captain
may require them to assist him. If dismounted, their horses-
are held by trumpeters. The captain may require each chief
to inspect his own platoon while he makes a general inspection.
INSPECTIONS. 227
While inspecting the company or accompanying the inspector
the captain does not return his saber while mounted ; if dis-
mounted, he returns saber.
On completion of the inspection the captain brings the com-
pany to attention, commands: 1. Prepare to mount; 2. MOUNT;
3. FORM; 4. RANKS, and then commands Posts. At this com-
mand the chiefs of platoons turn to the left about, move for-
ward, and resume their posts by another left about, and the
trumpeters take their posts.
Should the inspector be other than the captain, the latter
prepares the company for inspection and awaits the arrival of
the inspector. Upon the approach of the inspector the captain
at his post in front of the guidon salutes, the inspector returns
the salute and informs him of the character of the inspection
desired; the captain gives the necessary commands, faces to
the front, and, when inspected, accompanies the inspector.
698. The company carries for inspection every article that
is prescribed as a part of the regular equipment and for
which there is a specially designated place on the horses or
wagons.
COMPANY INSPECTION DISMOUNTED.
699. The company being in line, the officers at carry saber,
the captain commands: 1. Prepare for inspection; 2. MARCH;
3. FRONT.
At the first command the noncommissioned officers on the
right of each section step backward 2 yards to mark the new
alignment of the rear rank; the file closers step backward 2
yards in rear of this line. The captain goes to the right flank
and sees that the guides are on a line parallel to the front rank,
then places himself facing to the left, 4 yards in front of and
2 yards to the right of the company, and commands: March.
At the command March, the chiefs of platoons step forward
2 yards, the chiefs of sections step forward 1 yard, and all dress
to the right. The front rank and file closers dress to the right ;
the rear rank steps backward, halts a little in rear of the line,
and then dresses to the right.
The captain aligns the chiefs of platoons and of sections,
the ranks and the file closers; the chiefs of platoons and of
sections and the file closers turning their heads and eyes to
the front as soon as their alignment is verified. He then re-
228 CEREMONIES.
sumes his post in front of the right of the company and com-
mands Front.
At this command the guides marking the line of the rear rank
move forward into the front rank and all cast their eyes to the
front.
The captain then commands: 1. Inspection; 2. PISTOL.
70 O. The captain returns saber, inspects the chiefs of platoon
and of sections, the ranks, and the file closers, beginning on the
right of each and returning by the left and rear. During the
inspection of the ranks the lieutenants face about and stand
at ease; they may be directed to accompany the captain or to
assist in the inspection, tlpon the completion of the inspec-
tion the lieutenants face to the front and resume the attention ;
and the captain commands posts, upon which the rear rank
and file closers step forward to their original positions, and the
chiefs of platoons and of sections resume their posts by making
an about face, stepping forward 2 and 1 yards, respectively, and
then making another about face.
701. Should the inspector be other than the captain, the
latter prepares the company for inspection and when the in-
spector approaches brings the company to attention, and from
his post in front of the right of the company salutes. The
salute acknowledged, the captain carries saber, faces to the
left, commands: 1. Inspect/on; 2, PISTOL, and again faces to
the front.
The inspection proceeds as before; the captain returns saber
and accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter has in-
spected him.
At inspection of quarters the inspector is accompanied by the
captain and followed by the other officers, or by such of them
as he may designate; the men, without accouterments, stand
uncovered near their respective bunks; in camp they stand
covered, without accouterments, in front of their tents; upon
the approach of the inspector the first sergeant commands
attention, salutes, and leads the way through the quarters or
camp.
BATTALION INSPECTION MOUNTED.
702. The battalion being in column of companies, on the
approach of the inspector the major commands: 1. Prepare for
inspection; 2. MARCH.
INSPECTIONS. 229
The companies are prepared for inspection as already pre-
scribed.
The trumpeters join their companies. The drum major con-
ducts the band, if there be one, to the rear of the column, pass-
ing by the right flank, and places it facing to the front 36 yards
in rear of the rear company, and opens ranks.
The battalion staff officers place themselves in line with 1
yard intervals about 30 yards in front of the column, opposite
the center, in order of rank from right to left; the noncom-
missioned staff form in a similar manner 6 yards in rear of the
staff officers; the guard of the standard marches to the front
and takes post 6 yards in rear of the center of the line of the
noncommissioned staff. The major takes post in front of the
center of the column 6 yards in front of the staff.
Field and staff officers senior in rank to the inspector do not
take post in front of the column, but accompany him.
The inspector inspects the major and, accompanied by the
latter, inspects the staff officers.
The major and his staff, as soon as inspected, return saber
and accompany the inspector. The noncommissioned staff offi-
cers return saber when inspected.
The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, in-
spects the noncommissioned staff, guard of the standard, and
band. The noncommissioned staff and guard of the standard
may be dismissed as soon as inspected.
The captain of each company not undergoing inspection dis-
mounts his men and brings the men to rest. As the inspector
approaches the company the captain brings it to attention and
mounts the men ; as soon as he himself has been inspected, he
gives the necessary commands, returns saber, and accompanies
the inspector. The inspector proceeds as in company inspection.
At its completion the captain commands posts, dismounts his
men, if not already dismounted, and brings the company to
rest. Upon intimation from the inspector the major may direct
that each company in turn be dismissed as soon as inspected.
The band plays during the inspection of the companies.
When the inspector approaches the band the adjutant com-
mands: 1. Inspect/on; 2. INSTRUMENTS, and the band is in-
spected as prescribed in paragraph 735.
703. The battalion may be inspected in line. The inspection
is conducted according to the same principles as when formed
230 CEREMONIES.
in column. The major and his staff are inspected at their posts
in front of the center of the line ; the band, which remains at its
post on the right, is next inspected ; then the companies in order
from right to left.
704. If the major is himself the inspector the inspection is
conducted according to the same principles.
705. At dismounted inspection the companies of the battalion
will be separately inspected, dismounted, on their own parade
grounds.
CHAPTER IV. MUSTER.
BATTALION OR COMPANY MUSTER.
706. Muster is held in line or in column of companies in line.
The adjutant is provided with a muster roll of the field staff
and band ; each captain, with the roll of his company. A list
of absentees alphabetically arranged, showing cause and place
of absence, accompanies each roll.
As the mustering officer approaches a company the captain
commands: Attention to muster. The mustering officer or the
captain then calls the names on the roll, and as each man's
name is called he answers here and dismounts.
After muster the mustering officer verifies the presence of the
men reported absent from the formation, but in the post or
camp.
If the company be mustered dismounted, as each man's name
is called he answers HERE and steps one pace to the front.
The formation for dismounted muster of the company is the
same as for company inspection dismounted, the muster being
usually preceded by an inspection.
CHAPTER V. FUNERAL ESCORT.
707. The composition and strength of the escort are pre-
scribed in Army Regulations.
The escort is formed with its center opposite the quarters of
the deceased, the mounted men in line to the front; the band
(or musicians) on that flank of the escort toward which it is to
march.
Upon the appearance of the coffin the commander of the escort
commands: 1. Present; 2. SABER, if sabers are worn, otherwise
FUNERAL ESCORT. 231
he alone salutes, and the band plays an appropriate air ; sabers
are then brought to the carry, and the escort is formed in section
column.
The procession is formed in the following order: 1. Music;
2. Escort; 3. Clergy; 4. Coffin and pallbearers; 5. Mourners;
6. Members of the former command of the deceased; 7. Other offi-
cers and enlisted men; 8. Distinguished persons; 9. Delegations;
10. Societies; 11. Civilians.
Officers and enlisted men (Nos. 6 and 7), with side arms, are
in the order of rank, seniors in front.
The escort marches at a walk to solemn music, and on arriv-
ing at the grave is formed in line with the center opposite the
grave ; the sections then form line to the front ; the coffin is car-
ried along the front of the escort to the grave; sabers are
presented, and the band plays an appropriate air; the coffin
having been placed over the grave, the music ceases and sabers
are carried.
After the coffin is lowered into the grave and the funeral
services are completed, a trumpeter sounds taps over the grave.
The escort is then formed into column, marched to the point
where it was assembled, and dismissed.
The band does not play until it has left the inclosure.
The funeral ceremony for an enlisted man is the same as for
an officer, except that the commands present and carry saber are
omitted; the sergeant in command of the escort salutes with
the hand on the appearance of the coffin at the quarters of the
deceased and also when the coffin is carried along the front of
the escort to the grave.
When the distance to the place of interment is considerable,
the escort after leaving the camp or garrison may march
at ease until it approaches the burial ground, when it is brought
to attention. The music does not play while marching at ease.
In marching at attention the field music may alternate with
the band in playing.
708. When it is impracticable for the horses and carts to
approach the grave, they are left outside the inclosure. If the
escort consists of Signal Corps only, the officers, noncommis-
sioned staff officers, and all individually mounted men dis-
mount, turn over their horses to the horse holders, and the
officers draw saber ; a suitable formation is then taken and
the coffin is escorted to the grave, where line is formed and
232 CEREMONIES.
the same ceremonies are performed as before prescribed. The
ceremony at the grave having been completed, the command
remains in line until the trumpeter sounds taps over the grave.
709. Should the entrance to the cemetery prevent the hearse
accompanying the escort till the latter halts at the grave, the
column is halted at the entrance long enough to take the coffin
from the hearse, when the column is again put in march. The
Cavalry, Artillery, and Signal Corps of the escort, when unable
to enter the iriclosure, turn out of the column and salute the
coffin as it passes.
7 I.O. In all funeral ceremonies six pallbearers will be selected
as far as practicable from the grade of the deceased. If the
deceased is a commissioned officer, the coffin is borne by six
commissioned officers; if a noncommissioned officer or private,
by six privates.
711. When arms are presented at the funeral of a general
officer, the trumpters sound the march or flourishes, according to
the rank of the deceased, after which the band plays an appro-
priate air.
7 12. At the funeral of a mounted officer or enlisted man, his
horse, in mourning caparison, follows the hearse.
713. When necessary to escort the remains from the quarters
of the deceased to the church before the funeral service, arms
are presented upon receiving the remains at the quarters and
also as they are borne into the church.
714. Before the funeral the commander of the escort gives
the clergyman and pallbearers all needed directions.
CHAPTER VI. COMPANY GUARD MOUNTING.
715. At the assembly the men warned for stable or other
guard duty fall in on the company parade in two ranks, facing
to the front ; the senior noncommissioned officer on the right of
the front rank, the other noncommissioned officers and the
supernumerary in the file closers.
The first sergeant verifies the detail, dresses it to the right,
and inspects the arms, equipment, and appearance of the men,
and replaces by the supernumerary any man unfit to march on
guard.
COMPANY GUARD MOUNTING. 233
He then takes post 4 yards to the front of the detail facing
it, and commands: 1. Guard to its post; 2. Right; 3. Face; 4.
Forward; 5. MARCH.
At the fifth command the guard moves to its post ; the senior
noncommissioned oflicer marching near its left and rear, his
place as guide being taken by a file closer. The supernumerary
is then dismissed.
When an oflicer mounts the guard he will take post 6 yards
in front of the detail ; the first sergeant will salute and report
to him the result of his verification of the detail and will then
face to the left and take post 2 yards to the left of the front
rank. The oflicer will inspect the detail and march the guard
to its post as above described.
716. On arrival at the guardhouse or other designated place
the commander of the old guard will give the commander of
the new guard all the information and instructions relating to
his guard and turn over to him all property or prisoners in
his charge. The guard will then be divided into reliefs and the
men designated for the different posts, less the commander of
the guard, and the members of the first relief will relieve the
corresponding members of the relief of the old guard on post.
When all of the members of the old guard have been relieved
the old guard will be dismissed by its commander.
PART VIII.
MISCELLANEOUS.
THE GUIDON.
717. The position of carry guidon, dismounted. The lance of
the guidon is held vertically in the right hand, thumb in front
of the lance, forefinger along the side, ferrule about 6 inches
from the ground. It is thus carried in marching.
When leading the horse the lance is held in a corresponding
position in the left hand.
718. The position of order guidon. The ferrule of the lance
rests on the ground on a line with and touching the toe of the
right shoe ; the right hand grasps the lance in the same manner
as when at a carry.
719. The position of parade rest. The ferrule of the lance
is on the ground as at the order; the lance is held with both
hands in front of the body, left hand uppermost.
720. To mount and dismount The position of carry guidon ,
mounted. At stand to horse the ferrule of the lance rests on
the ground on a line with and touching the toe of the left shoe,
lance vertical and supported by the left hand ; hand at the
height of the neck, elbow and forearm closed against the lance.
Preparatory to mounting, grasp the reins and a lock of the
mane in the left hand, lance held in the same hand, reins on the
near side of the lance ; place the right hand on the pommel and
mount in the usual manner. After mounting, grasp the lance
with the right hand under the left, which lets go of it without
quitting the reins; carry the lance to the right side, lower and
place the ferrule in the stirrup socket. The right hand then
grasps the lance, forearm nearly horizontal, the arms through
the sling, lance vertical ; this is the position of carry guidon,
mounted.
Dismounting with the guidon is executed in a manner the
reverse of the foregoing.
234
MISCELLANEOUS. 235
(NOTE. Mounting and dismounting with the wire pike should
be similarly executed.)
72 1. Sa/utes Being mounted. Lower the guidon to the front
until the lance (under the right arm) is horizontal.
Being dismounted. Slip the right hand up the lance as high as
the eye, then lower the lance to the front by straightening the
right arm to its full extent.
If marching, the salute is executed when at 6 yards from
the officer entitled to the salute; the carry is resumed after
passing 6 yards beyond him.
At the halt the salute is executed at the command present
saber (or arms) ; the carry is resumed at the command carry
saber (or arms).
THE STANDARD.
722. Whenever in these regulations the term the standard is
used it includes both the national and the regimental standards ;
if either alone is to be referred to, the term the national standard
or the regimental standard is used.
723. The manual of the standard is as prescribed for the
guidon except that at carry standard, dismounted, the ferrule
of the lance is supported at the right hip.
The standard salutes an officer entitled to the honor, but in
no other case.
724. The guard of the standard. The guard of the standard
consists of the color sergeants and of two experienced men
selected by the colonel. The guard is habitually formed in line,
the color sergeants in the center.
The national standard is carried by the senior color sergeant,
,who is nearest to the right flank of the guard and who com-
mands the guard. The signal-corps standard is carried by the
.other color sergeant. The latter conforms to the movements of
the former, maintaining his position on the left.
The standard, kept at the quarters or office of the command-
Ing officer, is escorted by the guard to the place of formation of
the battalion and is similarly returned.
725. Post of the standard. At the formation of the battalion,
as soon as the companies have taken their places, the guard of
the standard takes post midway between the two center com-
panies, in line, abreast of the front ranks of the sections; in
column, at the center of the column.
236 MISCELLANEOUS.
If the formation of the battalion is changed from line to
column or the reverse, the standard conforms to the movement,
taking its new position by the most direct route.
When during exercises the battalion formation is broken up,
the standard joins the commanding officer or is dismissed, as
may be directed by the adjutant.
THE SABER.
726. Officers are armed with the saber.
At ceremonies sabers are habitually drawn. In route marches
they are habitually in the scabbard. At other times they are
drawn or in the scabbard, in the discretion of the officer in
command ; when he draws or returns saber, officers and noncom-
missioned staff officers under his command draw and return
saber with him.
For dismounted duty the saber is attached to the belt, and
is kept hooked up except when drawing and returning saber.
For mounted duty the saber is habitually attached to the left
side of the saddle ; in full dress it is attached to the belt, unless
otherwise directed by the commanding officer. The saber is not
removed from the saddle when dismounting temporarily for the
performance of some duty on foot.
727. To draw the saber The position of carry saber. Unhook
the saber with the thumb and first two fingers of the left hand,
thumb on the end of the hook, fingers lifting the upper ring;
grasp the scabbard with the left hand at the upper band, bring
the hilt a little forward, seize the grip with the right hand and
draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to its full extent to the
right front at an angle of about 45 with the horizontal, the
saber, edge down, in a straight line with the arm ; make a slight
pause and bring the back of the blade against the shoulder,
edge to the front, arm nearly extended, hand by the side, elbow
back, third and fourth fingers back of the grip ; at the same time
hook up the scabbard with the thumb and first two fingers of
the left hand, thumb through the upper ring, fingers supporting
it ; drop the left hand by the side. This is the position of carry
saber dismounted.
To draw the saber when mounted, reach with the right hand
over the bridle hand, and, without the aid of the bridle hand,
MISCELLANEOUS. 237
draw the saber as before. The right hand at the carry rests
on the right thigh.
728. The saber if drawn is, while at attention, habitually
held at the carry, except when dismounted and moving in double
time; in the latter case it is carried diagonally across the
breast, edge to the front, the left hand steadying the scabbard.
729. Being at carry saber: 1. Present; 2. SABER.
For officers : At the command present raise and carry the
saber to the front, base of the hilt as high as the chin and 6
inches in front of the neck, edge to the left, point 6 inches
farther to the front than the hilt, thumb extended on the left
of the grip, all the fingers grasping the grip. At the command
saber lower the saber, point in prolongation of the right foot and
near the ground, edge to the left, hand by the side, thumb on
left of grip, arm extended. If mounted, the hand is lowered
behind the thigh, point a little to the right and front of the
stirrup.
730. Being at present saber: 1. Carry; 2. SABER.
At the command saber, resume the position of carry saber.
731. Being at carry saber: 1. Parade; 2. REST.
Take the position of parade rest (Par. 49), point of saber on
or near the ground in front of the center of the body, edge to
the right.
At the command attention, resume the carry saber and the
position of the soldier.
732. To return saber. Carry the right hand opposite to and
6 inches from the left shoulder, saber vertical, edge to the left ;
at the same time unhook and lower the scabbard with the left
hand and grasp it at the upper band; drop the point to the
rear and pass the blade across and along the left arm ; turn the
head slightly to the left, fixing the eyes on the opening of the
scabbard, raise the right hand, insert and return the blade;
turn the head to the front, drop the right hand by the side,
hook up the scabbard with the left hand, drop the left hand
by the side.
When mounted the saber is returned without using the left
hand.
THE BAND.
733. The band is generally formed in column of fours. It
may be formed in two or more ranks.
238 MISCELLANEOUS.
Dismounted the baud is formed iu two or more ranks, with
sufficient intervals between the men and distances between the
ranks to permit a free use of the instruments.
The drum major is ;} yards (dismounted, 2 yards) in front of
the center of the front rank. He gives the commands or signals
for its movements. The commands are the same as for a squad,
substituting in them band for squad.
In line the band is posted with the left of its front rank 36
yards to the right of the right company. In column it marches
with its rear rank 36 yards in front of the leading company or
its front rank 36 yards in rear of the rear company, according
as the column has been formed to the right or the left.
Dismounted the band takes post as when mounted.
When united the musicians form in rear of the band. When
the band is not present the posts, movements, and duties of the
musicians are the same as prescribed for the band.
In rendering honors, whenever the standard salutes, the
musicians sound the march, flourishes, or to the standard, at a
signal from the drum major.
In marching, the different ranks dress to the right.
When the command with which the band is posted faces to
the rear the band executes the countermarch. The intervals aro
increased before executing a countermarch and closed upon the
completion of the countermarch.
In executing the countermarch the men in the leading rank,
or four to the right of the drum major, turn individually to the
right about, and those to his left to the left about, each followed
by the men covering him in the column. The drum major passes
through the center.
In dismounted formations, when right, left, or about face is
executed, the band faces in the same manner.
SIGNALS OF THE DRUM MAJOR.
734. The signals for the movements of the band will cor-
respond to the saber signals (par. 344) as far as practicable.
Prepare to play. Take the first position of present saber.
Play. Thrust upward energetically with the saber, arm fully
extended, and quickly resume the carry.
Prepare to cease playing. Same as prepare to play.
Cease playing. Same as play.
MISCELLANEOUS. 239
The march or flourishes. 1. Prepare to play: Raise the hand
to the height of the forehead and hold the saber in a horizontal
position, point to the left. 2. Play: Lower the hand quickly
to the belt and resume the carry.
Increase intervals. Extend the arm to the front, and wave
the saber several times to the right and left in front of the
body.
TO INSPECT THE BAND.
735. Being at the halt. Prepare for inspection; MARCH; front.
The front rank dresses to the right ; the other ranks move back-
ward, each taking the distance of 3 yards (dismounted, 2 yards)
from the rank preceding, halt and dress to the right. 1. Inspec-
tion; 2. INSTRUMENTS.
Each musician, as the inspector approaches him, raises his
instrument in front of his body, reverses it so as to show the
other side, and then returns it to its former position.
A trumpeter, when inspected, executes with his bugle what is
prescribed for a band musician.
POSTS.
The front rank stands fast, the other ranks move up and
close to the proper distance.
HONORS.
736. The national or regimental color or standard, uncased,
passing an armed body, is saluted, the field music sounding to
the color. Officers or enlisted men passing the uncased color
render the prescribed salute; with no arms in hand, the salute
is made by uncovering; the headdress is held in the right hand
opposite the left shoulder, right forearm against the breast.
737. Whenever "The Star Spangled Banner" is played by
the band on a formal occasion other than retreat at a mili-
tary station, or at any place where persons belonging to the
military service are present in their official capacity, all officers
and enlisted men present stand at attention throughout the
playing of the air. The same respect is observed toward the
national air of any other country when it is played as a com-
pliment to official representatives of such country. Whenever
" The Star Spangled Banner " is played as contemplated by this
240 MISCELLANEOUS.
paragraph, the air is played through once without the repeti-
tion of any part, except such repetition as is called for by the
musical score. When the flag is lowered at retreat and aboard
transports, when the flag is hoisted at guard mounting, all
officers and enlisted men out of ranks stand at attention, fac-
ing the flag, while the air is being played, and at the last note
of the music salute in the prescribed manner.
738. Troops under arms salute other armed bodies, the com-
manding officer, and his superiors ; if halted in line, by persent-
ing arms; if marching, eyes are turned in the direction of the
person or body of troops saluted by the commands : 1. Eyes,
2. Right (Left), 3. Front; the command front is given when the
person or body is passed. The commander of the troops
salutes.
When troops are in column at a halt, the commander alone
salutes; the present or eyes right (left) is omitted.
Troops are brought to attention when a body of troops or
an officer entitled to a salute passes in rear.
Unarmed troops salute as prescribed for armed bodies, except
that when halted the present is omitted.
The commander of a body of troops salutes, in person, his
superior officers not mentioned above ; the other officers and men
of the command do not salute; the present or eyes right (left)
is omitted.
Troops are brought to attention, if not already there, before
their commander salutes.
739. No honors are paid by troops when on the march or in
trenches, except that they may be called to attention ; no salute
is rendered when marching in double time.
740. The commander of a body of troops is saluted by all
officers junior in rank and by all enlisted men. The salute is
returned by the commander only.
741. All officers salute on meeting and in making and receiv-
ing official reports. Military courtesy requires the junior to
salute first, but when the salute is introductory to a report
made at a military ceremony or formation to the representative
of a common superior as, for example, to the adjutant, officer
of the day, etc. the officer making the report, whatever his
rank, will salute first; when not otherwise prescribed in cere-
monies the officer to whom the report is made will acknowledge
by saluting that he has received and understood the report.
When under arms the salute is made with the saber drawn;
MISCELLANEOUS. 241
otherwise with the hand. A mounted officer dismounts before
addressing a superior not mounted.
On official occasions officers, when indoors and under arms,
do not uncover, but salute with the saber if drawn ; otherwise
with the hand. If not under arms they uncover and stand at
attention, but do not salute except when making or receiving
reports.
742. Enlisted men carrying rifles, not in ranks, when within
saluting distance salute an officer with the rifle salute, look
toward him, and retain the left hand in position until the
salute is acknowledged or he has passed.
If unarmed the salute is made in a similar manner with the
hand farthest from the officer ; if mounted the salute is made
with the right hand.
If approaching an officer the salute begins when six paces
from him.
Indoors and armed with a rifle, the salute is made from the
position of the order on trail.
Officers are saluted whether in uniform or not.
743. An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an
officer, faces toward him and salutes. If standing he faces the
officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the same
place or on the same ground, such compliments need not be
repeated. Soldiers actually at work do not cease work to
salute an officer unless addressed by him.
744. An enlisted man makes the prescribed salute with the
weapon he is armed with, or, if unarmed, whether covered or
uncovered, with the hand, before addressing an officer. He also
makes the same salute after receiving a reply.
745. All salutes in passing or approaching are begun first by
the junior at 6 paces distance, or at 6 paces from the nearest
point of passing ; no salutes, except as otherwise prescribed, are
made at greater distances than 30 paces.
746. Indoors, an unarmed man uncovers and stands at atten-
tion upon the approach of an officer; he does not salute unless
lie addresses or is addressed by the officer. If armed, he salutes
as heretofore prescribed, without uncovering.
747. When an officer enters a room where there are soldiers,
the word attention is given by some one who perceives him,
when all rise and remain standing in the position of a soldier
until the officer leaves the room. Soldiers at meals do not rise.
82940 11 16
242 MISCELLANEOUS.
748. Officers at all times acknowledge the courtesies of
junior officers and enlisted men by returning their salutes.
When several officers in company are saluted, all who are en-
titled to the salute return it.
749. Officers arriving at the headquarters of a military com-
mand, or at a military post, call upon the commander thereof
as soon as practicable, and register their names. If the visiting
officer be senior to the commander, the former may send a card,
in which case it becomes the duty of the commander to make
the first call.
750. Officers of the Navy are saluted according to their rela-
tive rank ; officers of marines and of the volunteer forces or
militia in the service of the United States, and officers of for-
eign services, are saluted according to rank.
751. Honors, courtesies, and ceremonies not referred to
herein are found in Army Regulations and in the Manual of
(iunrd Duty.
TRUMPET CALLS.
WARNING CALLS.
752. First call, guard mounting, full dress, overcoats, drill,
stable, water, and boots and saddles; they precede the assembly
by such intervals as may be prescribed by the commanding
officer.
In camp, where the men are near their horses, and known to
be present, the assembly may be sounded immediately after boots
and saddles, in which case the men immediately proceed to the
horses and saddle.
Mess, church, and fatigue, classed as service calls, may also be
used as warning calls.
First call is the first signal for formation dismounted only ; it
does not precede, and is not used in connection with other warn-
ing calls, except full dress and overcoats.
Guard mounting is the first signal for guard mounting.
Boots and saddles is the signal for mounted formations or
mounted drills ; it immediately follows the signal guard mounting
or drill.
The trumpeters assemble at first call, guard mounting, and
boots and saddles.
MISCELLANEOUS. 243
When full dress or overcoats are to be worn, the full dress or
overcoats call immediately follows first call, guard mounting, or
boots and saddles.
Call to quarters. The signal for the men to repair to their
quarters.
FORMATION CALLS.
753. Assembly. The signal for companies or details to
fall in.
Adjutant's call. The signal for companies to form battalion;
also for the guard details to form for guard mounting on the
camp or garrison parade ground ; it follows the assembly at such
interval as may be prescribed by the commanding officer.
To the standard. Is sounded when the standard salutes.
Alarm Calls.
754. Fire call. The signal for the men to fall in, without
arms, to extinguish fire.
To arms. The signal for the men to fall in, under arms, on
their company parade grounds as quickly as possible.
To horse.^-The signal for mounted men to proceed under arms
to their horses, saddle, mount, and assemble at a designated
place as quickly as possible.
SERVICE CALLS.
755. Tattoo, taps, mess, sick, church, recall, issue, officers',
captains', first sergeants', fatigue, school, and the general.
The general is the signal for striking tents and loading wagons
preparatory to marching.
Reveille precedes the assembly for roll call ; retreat follows the
assembly; the interval being only that required for formation
and roll call, except when there is a parade.
Taps is the signal for extinguishing lights; it is usually pre-
ceded by call to quarters by such interval as prescribed by Army
Regulations.
Assembly, reveille, retreat, adjutant's call, to the standard, the
flourishes, ruffles, and the marches are sounded by all the field
music united; the other calls, as a rule, are sounded by the
musician of the guard or orderly musician ; he may also sound
the assembly when the musicians are not united.
244 MISCELLANEOUS.
The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, if
marches be played before reveille, it is fired at the commence-
ment of the first march.
The evening gun is fired at the last note of retreat.
DRILL SIGNALS.
756. The drill signals include both the preparatory. commands
and the commands of execution; the last note is the command
of execution.
When a command is given by the trumpet, the chiefs of sub-
divisions give the proper commands orally.
The memorizing of these signals is facilitated by observing
that all signals for movements to the right are on the ascending
scale; that the signals for the same movements to the. left are
corresponding signals on the descending; that changes of gait
are all on the same note ; that captain's call is the first two bars
of officers' call with the attention added.
Form rank and posts are the same.
The signals for the turn are preceded by the signal platoons,
when the platoons are to execute the movement.
In sounding the signals for simultaneous movements, the
signal platoons precedes the preliminary signal for the move-
ment.
The signals are sounded in the same order as the commands
are prescribed in the text.
TRUMPET CALLS.
To economize space, the music is written an octave higher than the
trumpet scale, and is adjusted to the scale of the bugle.
1. FIRST CALL.
^-esp^=^r
2. GUARD MOUNTING.
quick.
iHg :
! I
245
246
TRUMPET CALLS.
3. FULL DRESS.
Quick.
4. OVERCOATS.
Quick.
5. DRILL.
Quick.
6. STABLE.
TRUMPET CALLS.
7. WATER.
247
Quick.
8. BOOTS AND SADDLES.
-a* ? * =r* ^
-*-+-
l
LU
9. ASSEMBLY.
Moderate.
H h
10. ADJUTANT'S CALL.
_^3^i
.
r i* _ r I r p r p_^f j i \ * r
11. To THE STANDARD.
^J^fe^-t^=^^^^^
248
TRUMPET CALLS.
To THE STANDARD Concluded.
End.
Repeat at will.
I
r '-=f^
Utfzt =2=tr-*-
13. To ARMS.
Quick
"BrUItnW
^ Repeat at itntt.
r / r ^
TRUMPET CALLS.
14. To HORSE.
249
Presto.
15. REVEILLE.
Quick.
r*\_ =s je-i ^X r-
...a. ,. fri jg - - ffTT:^^ ^_r __*__ s-F^
^^^^^i^^i
g-u^- ^zc i a-P ^ i-
End.
}^_^_^rrazpc^__ Fs-rf
1 6. RETREAT.
^
-
250
TRUMPET CALLS.
R ETR E AT Concluded.
mm* H Md^^d L L T
TRUMPET CALLS.
17. TATTOO.
Quick.
251
***
a^
s
4=^3::+: :^^=^f =r=^rS:| jg
ti^tf zSl it-tzt zi^zitzb
:sznzizzr=3d:
^^H*-^4
H 1-f-pF
U-J3J
252
TRUMPET CALLS.
TATTOO Continued.
TRUMPET CALLS.
TATTOO Concluded.
253
254
TETJMPET CALLS.
19. TAPS.
**!!,, *" .r?,g?. n,^ n^ fl-r
fcS^-^q
r^
? i
i p
\
-TTI r>^~T
&^
'. LJi
&
^3| i 1
20. MESS.
Quick.
Quick.
TRUMPET CALLS.
21. SICK.
255
2ii
22. CHURCH.
LIJb:=^=aqpilf^ I ? 13-
IrTK* *-*H -> * : F-P"-^ ^H 1 '
EP-^B-L^=- * rLa-u=g^g
23. RECALL.
Moderate.
24. ISSUE.
Allegro.
256
TRUMPET CALLS.
25. OFFICERS' CALL.
Quick.
26. CAPTAINS' CALL.
! H"' !
27. FIRST SERGEANTS' CALL.
Quick.
Quick.
28. FATIGUE.
3
-* f-^-ftft.
Si
TRUMPET CALLS.
29. SCHOOL.
257
Quick.
30. THE GENERAL.
:d-3i-n ^-F
La k*^
82940 11 17
258
TRUMPET CALLS.
31. ATTENTION.
:
32. PREPARE TO MOUNT, MOUNT.
33. PREPARE TO DISMOUNT, DISMOUNT.
34. FORM RANK OR POSTS.
35. FORWARD, MARCH.
TRUMPET CALLS.
36. HALT.
Fi8r-2- ** f
Ep=f3=3
37. WALK, MARCH.
Slow. /^ ^
259
38. TROT, MARCH.
Quick.
F^^'^T^
39. GALLOP, MARCH.
40. GUIDE RIGHT.
41. GUIDE LEFT.
Slow.
lli
42. GUIDE CENTER.
Slow. /^
260
TRUMPET CALLS.
43. BY THE RIGHT FLANK, MARCH.
Moderate.
44. BY THE LEFT FLANK, MARCH.
Moderate.
45. RIGHT ABOUT, MARCH.
i '
46. LEFT ABOUT, MARCH.
Slow.-~^*.
^
47. COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
- -R-R--g-*
48. COLUMN LEFT, MARCH.
TRUMPET CALLS.
49. PLATOONS.
261
Quick.
50. RIGHT TURN, MARCH.
Mod.
* _ m * m ^ ,- ' - *
51. LEFT TURN, MARCH.
Mod.
52. SECTIONS COLUMN HALF RIGHT, OR RIGHT OBLIQUE, MARCH.
Stow.
53. SECTIONS COLUMN HALF LEFT, OR LEFT OBLIQUE, MARCH.
Slow.
262 TRUMPET CALLS.
54. RIGHT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH.
Moderate. /^
55. LEFT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH.
56. ON RIGHT INTO LINE, MARCH.
Moderate. /5N
57. ON LEFT INTO LINE, MARCH.
58. COMMENCE FIRING.
iE
59. CEASE FIRING.
60. ROUTE ORDER.
<fa)4
*-
i r"
V
MM
TRUMPET CALLS.
61. PRESIDENT'S MARCH.
263
Quick time.
ij^jgi^JH^ * r in IH*-M-*-^
-gp-^-^fp [j I- J- ; if r r 4
""^t ^tHMMtaMMBBt
J ir
*=f=
ft f \.
m
264
TRUMPET CALLS.
62. GENERAL'S MARCH.
Quick time.
63. FLOURISHES FOR REVIEW.
Quick. ^
64. ROGUE'S MARCH.
QtwVfc me
yjpKpqci [J.,r.fijr^i
11 i || * I II i i
JUHJ.M : .|l '-(- } P ' ' ^
-* ft-
TRUMPET CALLS.
65. FUNERAL MARCH.
265
Very slow.
^=sj^-n^^^^^^
yfyi^s
I
Repeat at will.
^
266
TRUMPET CALLS.
66. QUICKSTEP No. 1.
Quick.
End.
End.
:
TRUMPET CALLS.
67. QUICKSTEP No. 2.
267
T^^ggpimujrgEiii
68. QUICKSTEP No. 3.
EE-jg=gi=fr_L * _CLi*ji: ^'f=-fy=f~Si
^fci_Jj-#=j=gE^g^pjQ LJMUrfe
69. QUICKSTEP No. 4.
,r
1 I 2
268
TRUMPET CALLS.
69. QUICKSTEP No. 4 Concluded.
-* s-jr-PryP-a f^ ^i_. _-.
~~~Lu~ "
70. QUICKSTEP No. 5.
-T i. -^ ir .
71. QUICKSTEP No, 6.
TRUMPET CALLS.
71. QUICKSTEP No. 6 Concluded.
269
72. QUICKSTEP No. 7.
i
73. QUICKSTEP No. 8.
F TRUMPET.
G CROOK.
270
TRUMPET CALLS.
73. QUICKSTEP No. 8 Concluded.
^
Second time. End.
Da Capo.
F TRUMPET.
74. QUICKSTEP No. 9.
C CROOK.
TRUMPET CALLS.
74. QUICKSTEP No. 9 Concluded.
271
End
fsrm-t-CDf
At
^
1
33
272
TRUMPET CALLS.
75. QUICKSTEP No. 10.
Quick. F TRUMPET.
C CROOK.
EE
-t-*f-
?-?-
Z).C.
MISCELLANEOUS. 273
Arms and Equipment.
757. Arms and equipment of enlisted men, field company,
Signal Corps, and equipment of animals:
(a) For each enlisted man
1 revolver, approved type.
1 revolver holster.
1 revolver cartridge belt and fastener.
1 first-aid packet (medical department).
1 pouch for first-aid packet.
1 waist belt.
1 revolver cartridge box.
1 artillery knapsack.
1 canteen.
1 canteen strap, cavalry.
1 meat can.
1 cup.
1 knife.
1 fork.
1 spoon.
1 shelter tent, half.
1 shelter tent pole.
5 shelter tent pins.
(&) For each enlisted man individually mounted, in addi-
tion to (a)
1 saddle, cavalry, complete.
1 saddle cover.
1 saddle bag.
1 saddle cloth.
2 spurs.
2 spur straps.
1 curb bridle, complete.
1 currycomb.
1 horse brush.
1 link.
1 watering bridle.
(c) For each driver in addition to (a)
1 currycomb.
1 horse brush.
1 haversack.
1 haversack strap.
82940 11 18
274 MISCELLANEOUS.
(d) For each dismounted man, in addition to (a)
1 haversack.
1 haversack strap.
(e) Equipment for each horse
1 saddle blanket.
1 halter complete.
Inose bag.
1 surcingle.
1 horse cover.
(/) Equipment for each mule
1 halter, complete.
1 nose bag.
(g) For each pack mule, in addition to (/)
1 aparejo, complete.
Service Kii.
758. The service kit for men of field and field wireless com-
panies, Signal Corps, comprising the field kit and the surplus
kit. is as follows :
(a) The field kit comprises, in addition to the clothing worn
on the person, the following article :
Clothing, etc.
1 overcoat.
1 blanket.
1 comb.
1 housewife.
1 slicker.
1 soap, cake.
1 stockings, pair.
1 toothbrush.
1 towel.
Rations
2 haversack rations.
1 emergency ration.
(6) The surplus kit consists of:
1 drawers, pair.
1 shoes, marching, pair.
2 stockings, pairs.
1 undershirt.
MISCELLANEOUS. 275
Arms and equipments, as prescribed in paragraph 1, ex-
cepting
1 waist belt.
1 revolver cartridge box.
1 saddle cover.
1 saddle cloth.
1 horse cover.
Ammunition
20 rounds revolver cartridges, ball.
Technical Equipment.
759. The technical equipment for enlisted men of a field com-
pany, Signal Corps, is as follows:
(a) Each enlisted man carries on the person 1 electrician's
knife, 1 pair of 5-inch pliers.
(&) Chiefs of sections will carry, in addition to (a), 1 field
glass, Type D, a wrist watch, map case and map, a field message
book, a pencil, and a compass.
(c) Operators will carry, in addition to (a) : Of wire sec-
tions 1 field buzzer (when not carried on the wire cart), 1
connector, buzzer, 1 ground rod, 1 wrist watch, 1 field message
book, and 25 message envelopes, 2 pencils, 1 small roll of tape,
1 cipher disk. Of wireless stations 1 wrist watch, and also
field message books, 25 message envelopes, 2 pencils, cipher disk
and tape in the pack chests.
(d) Linemen will carry, in addition to (a), 1 wire pike. 1
cavalry buzzer, 1 connector, buzzer, 1 ground rod, 1 carrier with
buzzer wire, 1 small roll of tape. The pike will not be carried
at ceremonies except at mounted inspection.
(e) Messengers will carry, in addition to (a) : Of wire sec-
tions 1 field message book, 1 pencil, 1 small roll of tape, 1 box
of wind matches, and, when not carried on the wire cart, a lan-
tern, 3 candles, and box of wind matches. Of wireless sec-
tions 1 field message book, 1 pencil.
(/) Horseholders will carry, in addition to (a) : Of wire sec-
tions 1 small roll of tape, and, when not carried on the wire
cart, a lantern, 3 candles, and a box of wind matches.
o
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
BERKELEY
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE
f STAMPED BELOW
Books not returned on time are subject to a fine of
50c per volume after the third day overdue, increasing
to $1.00 per volume after the sixth day. Books not in
demand may be renewed if application is made before
expiration of loan period.
YA 06347
214808